. - ‘ ' 5 x 
t : pans ; 
: i 
, . ‘ a) 
. if , 
~ ‘ 3 


k A, wu 4 y Re ws 
; a . ; 
= ‘ 7 ‘ 4 L They 
o aes - ; ihe x we 
. . oo ‘ - ‘ 
” _ 4 ar, , . Sat 
‘ i fue F ‘ : R \ , - 
4 . A ‘ ‘ ‘ } J : ; ” 4 De a ra y 
acne ¥ 7 a ) , ' 
‘ 2 : : 
aa * 4 Pp . a \ } 
Md ‘ . ‘ - + ¥ : ~ ( 
a . . 7 . | iy $ Y a 
E nf ; - ‘ a . ‘ OS) ite oan nM { i | 
wae, , 7 a ey i ; } t 
js " tyre BE A's mAs ‘ : CMP tee ‘ fi i 
bie 4 ital t ; hg pe V, } 
, “ A £ \ p 
; ; L, ak =) t" oe } 4 ‘ie ha 4 
x . A ie i. = ‘ 4 ; 4 
oe : . i (ts ; , h a NaS 
~4, _ 4 ‘ 
ve ai \ } "i e ty 
i d ; 
iets ; 
en 
! : : 
4 ee r : 
r ie / ry 
? . iy - t . 
en : { 
bs 1 td ee Fr i 1 
—TUINEV. € | [ 
Univ. oF no 
JorontO 


j LiBRARY fe 


THE 
AMERICAN MUSEUM 
JOURNAL 


VOLUME IX, 1909 


NEW YORK: 
PUBLISHED ‘BY THE 
AMERICAN MUSEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY 


1909 


4 


4 \ 


> 


Committee of Publication 


EDMUND OTIS HOVEY, Editor 
MARY CYNTHIA DICKERSON, Associate Editor 
FRANK M. CHAPMAN 


‘ 
| 
LOUIS P>GRATAGAPR [ Advisory Board 
WILLIAM K. GREGORY | 


THE AMERICAN MUSEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY 
77TH STREET AND CENTRAL Park, West, NEw York Ciry 


BOARD OF TRUSTEES 


PRESIDENT 
HENRY FAIRFIELD OSBORN 


FIRST VICE-PRESIDENT SECOND VICE-PRESIDENT 
J. PIERPONT MORGAN CLEVELAND H. DODGE 
TREASURER SECRETARY 
CHARLES LANIER J. HAMPDEN ROBB 
Class of 1909 
JOSEPH H. CHOATE J. PIERPONT MORGAN 


HENRY F. OSBORN 


Class of 1910 


J. HAMPDEN ROBB PERCY BR. PYNE 
ARTHUR CURTISS JAMES JOHN B. TREVOR 

Class of 1911 
CHARLES LANIER WILLIAM ROCKEFELLER 
ANSON W. HARD GUSTAV E. KISSEL 


SETH LOW 


Class of 1912 
De Oh MILLS ALBERT S. BICKMORE 
ARCHIBALD ROGERS CORNELIUS C. CUYLER* 
ADRIAN ISELIN, Jr. 


Class of 1913 


GEORGE S. BOWDOIN CLEVELAND H. DODGE 
A. D. JUILLIARD ARCHER M. HUNTINGTON 


EXECUTIVE OFFICERS 


ASSISTANT-SECRETARY AND 
DIRECTOR ASSISTANT-TREASURER 
HERMON C. BUMPUS GEORGE H. SHERWOOD 


* Deceased. ee 
ili 


Scientific Staff. 


DIRECTOR. 
Hermon C. Bumpus, Ph.D., Se. D. 


DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC INSTRUCTION. 


Prof. ALBERT S. Bickmore, B.S., Ph.D., LL.D., Curator Emeritus. 
Grorce H. SHerwoop, A.B., A.M., Curator. 


DEPARTMENT OF GEOLOGY AND INVERTEBRATE PALHONTOLOGY 


Prof. R. P. Wurrrieyp, A.M., Curator. 
Epmunp Oris Hovey, A.B., Ph.D., Associate Curator. 


DEPARTMENT OF MAMMALOGY AND ORNITHOLOGY. 
Prof. J. A. AuLEN, Ph.D., Curator. 
Frank M. CHapman, Curator of Ornithology. 
Roy C. Anprews, A.B., Assistant in Mammalogy. 
W. pe W. Muiuer, Assistant in Ornithology. 


DEPARTMENT OF VERTEBRATE PALHZONTOLOGY. 
Prof. Henry FairFieELD OsBorn, A.B., Sc.D., LL.D., D.Se., Curator. 
W. D. Marruew, Ph.B., A.B., A.M., Ph.D., Associate Curator. 
WALTER GRANGER, Assistant. 

Barnum Brown, A.B., Assistant. 


DEPARTMENT OF ICHTHYOLOGY AND HERPETOLOGY. 


Prof. BAsHrorp Dean, A.B., A.M., Ph.D., Curator of Fishes and Reptiles. 
Louis Hussaxor, B.S., Ph.D., Assistant Curator of Fossil Fishes. 


DEPARTMENT OF ANTHROPOLOGY. 
CuarK Wissuer, A.B., A.M., Ph.D., Curator. 
Haran I. Smirn, Assistant Curator. 
Rosert H. Lowrie, A.B., Ph.D., Assistant Curator. . 
CHarutes W. Meap, Assistant. 


Prof. MarsHatt H. Savinue, Honorary Curator of Mexican Archeology. 


DEPARTMENT OF MINERALOGY. 


L. P. Gratacar, Ph.B., A.B., A.M., Curator. 
Grorce F. Kunz, A.M., Ph.D., Honorary Curator of Gems. 


DEPARTMENT OF BOOKS AND PUBLICATIONS 
Prof. RatpH W. Tower, A.B., A.M., Ph.D., Curator. 


DEPARTMENT OF INVERTEBRATE ZOOLOGY. 
Prof. Henry E. Crampton, A.B., Ph.D., Curator. 
Roy W. Miner, A.B., Assistant Curator. 

Frank E. Luiz, A.B., Ph.D., Assistant Curator. 

L. P. Graracap, Ph.B., A.B., A.M., Curator of Mollusca. 
WituiaAmM BrurenmMiLurr, Associate Curator of Lepidoptera. 


Prof. Win~t1AM Morton Wueewer, Ph.D., Honorary Curator of Social Insects. 
ALEXANDER PrerruNKEVITCH, Ph.D., Honorary Curator of Arachnida. 
Prof. Aaron L. TREADWELL, B.S., M.S., Ph.D., Honorary Curator of Annulates 


DEPARTMENT OF PHYSIOLOGY. 
Prof. Ratepw W. Tower, A.B., A.M., Ph.D., Curator. 


DEPARTMENT OF MAPS AND CHARTS. 
A. Woopwarp, Ph.D., Curator. 


lV 


CONTENTS OF VOLUME IX. 


TirLe-PAaGE ; 
COMMITTEE OF PUBLICATION 
OFFICERS AND TRUSTEES 
SCIENTIFIC STAFF 
CONTENTS 

List or ILLUSTRATIONS . 


No. 1; JANUARY. 

THe Duck Hawk, Hackensack MrEApow AND EGRET Groups 
(Illustrated) . 

Two NorewortHy ForREIGN MUSEUMS 

THE INTERNATIONAL TUBERCULOSIS EXHIBITION é ; : 

An ErHnovoaicaL Trip to Lake ArHapasca. By R. H. Lowte. 
(Illustrated) 

Museum Nrews NOTES 

LECTURE ANNOUNCEMENTS 

MEETINGS OF SOCIETIES 


No. 2, FEBRUARY. 

A SUMMER WITH THE Pactric Coast Wuaters. By Roy C. 
ANDREWS. (Illustrated) ‘ 4 . 3 : 

St. Prerre anp Mr. Perf in 1908. By Epmunp Oris Hovey. 
(Illustrated) 

THE INDIANS OF CALIFORNIA : f : : d : 

ScHooL CHILDREN AT THE "TUBERCULOSIS ExuipiTion. — (IIlus- 
trated) 

Museum News Notes 

LecTturE ANNOUNCEMENTS 

MEETINGS OF SOCIETIES 


No. 3, MARCH. 


THe Darwin CELEBRATION. (Illustrated) : : 
New Haprrat Groups or NortH AMERICAN Birps. _ (Illustrated) 
THe ANNUAL MEETING OF THE ‘l‘RUSTEES 

THE STEFANSSON-ANDERSON ArcTIC EXPEDITION 

RECENT Purcuases oF Fossth VERTEBRATES 

Museum News Notes 

SciENTIFIC PUBLICATIONS IN 1908 . 

LEcTURE ANNOUNCEMENTS 

MEETINGS OF SOCIETIES 


We 


~l oe 


10 
15 
16 
IS 


50 


Jt Y! 
“I OO 


65 
67 
6S 
70 
70 
73 


76 


CONTENTS 
No. 4, APRIL. 


A COLLECTION FROM THE ANDAMAN IsLaNps. By CHARLES W. 
Meap. (Illustrated) : : : : 

Tue Oxtpesr Lanp Reprites 1n NortH America. By W. D. 
Marruew. (Illustrated) : : : : : 

A Group or PecutiaR Mouiusks. By L. P. Gratracar.  (Illus- 
trated) 

Museum News Notes 

LrecrurE ANNOUNCEMENTS 

MEETINGS OF SOCIETIES 


NOt 5, EAN? 


‘THe Serres or Prorozoan Movers. By Roy W. Miner. (Illus- 
trated) : 

A New Marine Hasirat Group : : 

MopeEL or THE GOBLIN SHARK. (Illustrated) 

News FROM THE Musrtum’s Arctic Expiorers. (Illustrated) 

THe Fistan CoLtLection. By Roperr H. Lowe. — (Illustrated) 

Dr. Wituiam Jones. By CLARK WISSLER 

‘Toe EARTH AND THE Sun. (Illustrated) 

Toe Parrpine Exutpirion. (Illustrated) . 

Museum News Noves 


No. 6, OCTOBER. 


‘THE ENRICHMENT OF OuR COLLECTIONS FROM ARCTIC AMERICA 
Museum News Nores 
LECTURE ANNOUNCEMENTS 
MEETINGS Or SOCIETIES : ; : ; ; ‘ ; 
THE INDIANS or MANHATTAN ISLAND AND VICINITY. By ALANSON 
SKINNER. (Illustrated) 
No. 7, NOVEMBER. 
ACHIEVEMENT IN PoLAR Expioration. — (Illustrated) 
Toe Murat Decorations or tHE Eskimo Hauu. — (Illustrated) 
Museum News Nores 
LECTURE ANNOUNCEMENTS 
No. 8, DECEMBER. 
THe Giant or ANcieNT SHarks. By Basnrorp DEAN _ . 
EXPERIMENTAL Work with Pomace Fires. By F. E. Lutz. 
(Illustrated) . 


vi 


95 
97 
9S 
100 


ILLUSTRATIONS 


THE GurreEy, CoLorapo, Meteorite. By Epmunp Oris Hovey. 
(Illustrated) . ; : : , 

RECENT ADDITIONS TO THE METEORITES IN THE Foyer.  (lIllus- 
trated) . ; : 

A TRiIp TO SOUTHERN- Mexico ror Sprpers. By ALEXANDER 
PETRUNKEVITCH. (Illustrated) 

Museum News Notes 

LECTURE ANNOUNCEMENTS 

MEETINGS OF SOCIETIES 


LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. 


THe Duck Hawk Hasirat Group 

THe Ecrer Hapirar Group ; 

THE Hackensack Mrapow Hasiratr Group 

THE “GRAHAME” ON LAKE ATHABASCA ; 

HeapMan. “Onp CATHERINE.” FULLBLOODED CHIPEWYAN 

‘TALLEST CHIPEWYAN MEASURED 

CHIPEWYAN Boys f . 

THe “Spout” or a Finpack WHALE 

A Humppack WHALE EMERGING FROM BENEATH THE STEAMER 

THe Tart or A Divinc HumMpBaAck , 

THE WHaLE Harpoon Gun, ReEapy To FIRE 

THE GuN HARPOON IN THE AIR ; 

An EIGHTY-FOOT SULPHURBOTTOM WHALE ON THE SLIP 

Breast View or A LARGE SULPHURBOTTOM WHALE : é 

St. Prerre, MARTINIQUE. VIEW NorTHWARD FROM HOoTeEL 
Winnpow. May, 1908 . : : ; ’ 

St. PIERRE, MARTINIQUE. SOUTHERN Part OF THE City. May, 
1908. : : 2 : ‘ : : : 2 : 

St. PIERRE, MARTINIQUE. GENERAL VIEW OF Ruins. May, 1908 

Sr. Prerre, Martinique. Rue Vicror Huco, Lookine Sovutru- 
WwaRD. May, 1908 ; i ; ; : : 

St. PreRRE, MARTINIQUE. RUINS OF THE THEATER. May, 1908. 

Mr. Pett, Martinieurt. THE West SIDE OF THE VOLCANO IN 
May, 1908 : ; : : ‘ 5 , ; 

Mr. Pert, MartiniguE. Summit or NEw Cone LOooKkInGS. 60° W. 
May, 1908 : ; 2 ; : 

Mr. PELE. THe SPINE oR OBELISK IN Marcy, 1903 


Vii 


Io IO bo bh bo 


41 
41 


ILLUSTRATIONS 


Pusiic SCHOOL CHILDREN APPROACHING THE NORTH AND SOUTH 
ENTRANCES OF THE Museum TO VISIT THE INTERNATIONAL 
TUBERCULOSIS EXHIBITION . 

Tue MemortaL Bust or CHARLES DARWIN 

Front View or Darwin Bust 

ProriLeE VIEW or Darwin Bust 3 

BooBles AND MaAn-o’-War Birps oN Cay VERDE 

A Kramato Lake Birp CoLony 5 

Arctic-ALPINE Brrp-LirE IN THE CANADIAN Roo KIES 

SaGe GROUSE IN WYOMING A ; : : 

GREBES (upper figure) AND WILD Gone: (lower figure) ON CRANE 
LAKE, SASKATCHEWAN 

ANDAMAN ISLANDER SHOOTING FISH 

THe MEETING (right) AND THE PARTING (left) « OF THE AN DANTANESE 

An ANDAMANESE MARRIAGE CEREMONY : 4 : : 

PREPARED SKULLS AND BonES Worn AS TOKENS OF RESPECT FOR 
THE DEAD 

ANDAMANESE ORNAMENTS AND IMPLEMENTS 

Baskets, Mats anp HouseHoLp IMPLEMENTS 

SPEARING A TURTLE 

An ANDAMANESE DANCE : 

IMPLEMENTS OF WAR AND THE CHASE 

SpPINE-BackEeD Lizarp Dimetrodon 

ARMORED AMPHIBIAN Eryops. SKULL AND JAWS 

ARMORED AMPHIBIAN Diplocaulus 

SKULL OF ARMORED AMPHIBIAN Diplocaulus 

SKELETONS OF THE ARMORED AMPHIBIAN Cricotus 

A Group or PrcuLiAR MoLLusK SHELLS 

Vermicularia? Nigricans DAL 

A New Marine Hasirat Group 

THe Prorozoan, Auloceros elegans HACKEL 

Move or Auloceros elegans HACKEL ; , 

Giass MopEL oF SKELETON OF PROTOZOAN, Goeronune mirabilis 
HACKEL 

THE GOBLIN SHARK 

Mar or Arctic ALASKA 

STENCIL PATTERN. FIJIAN CLOTH 

FitAN CLUBS AND SPEARS 

Mope. or BuRE or ‘TEMPLE ; 2 . ‘ : 

CANNIBAL FLESH HANGERS, CANNIBAL Fork, Fi1AN Porrery, 
Kava Bow. AND Cups 


viii 


PAGE 


ILLUSTRATIONS 


SAMPLES OF FIJIAN CRAFTSMANSHIP : ; . 

MopEt TO DEMONSTRATE THE CAUSE OF Day AND NIGHT AND THE 
CHANGE OF SEASONS 7 

GENERAL VIEW OF THE PHILIPPINE SEE 

Icorot Group : : : 

Inwoop Rock-SHELTER, MANHATTAN 

Fincu’s Rock House : : 

DIAGRAM OF A TYPICAL SHELL DEpadrt 

Cross SECTION OF A SHELL PIT ; 

Map GIviInG THE LOCATIONS OF SHELL Deposits 

GRAVE OF SKELETONS WITH ARROW PoINts . : . 

Bones PuNcTURED By ARROW POINTS, FROM SKELETONS FouND 
ON STATEN ISLAND : ; 

VERTICAL SECTION OF REFUSE IN Ne H’s Bes kK HovusE, aes T 
Mipway OF THE CAVE 

Tyres or Arrow Pornts 

KNIVES AND SCRAPERS : 

DRILLS, SCRAPERS AND OTHER Onin TS 

TYPES OF STONE AXES AND CELTS ; s 

A HAFTED CELT FROM A PoNnD AT eoeenoe DuTrcHEss te ra Pe 

Porrery ForMS OF THE CoASTAL ALGONKIN f 

TypicaL ALGONKIAN PoTTERY PIPE AND FRAGMENT OF AN EFFIGY 
Pier FROM Port WASHINGTON, L. I. 

InNcISED DESIGNS FROM PoTTrERY VESSELS 

IncISED DESIGNS FROM ALGONKIAN VESSELS : : 

Map SHOWING THE LOCATION OF THE NEW YorK CoAstTAL ALGON- 
KIN AND "HEIR NEIGHBORS 

InpIAN Buriat, MANHATTAN : . : 

LocaTION OF BurIALs, Pits AND SHELL- Buys NEAR INWOOD 

FLoor Puan, WESTERN END OF THE HALL OF THE PLAINS INDIANS. 

THe Peary Arctic CLus EXHIBIT : ; : 
An ExpiLorer’s TRAIL LEFT AT THE ICE FOOT ON THE COAST OF 
GRINNELL LAND. GREELEY EXPEDITION, May, 1882 
PRESSURE RipGE IN NortH PouarR ICE SHOWING ONE OF THE 
DIFFICULTIES oF ArcTIC "TRAVEL. GREELEY EXPEDITION, 
JUNE, 1882 : : : : : ; 

Part or THE NortH Poiar REGIONS, SHOWING LINES OF Me 
PROACH FROM AMERICA AND EUROPE 

Musk Ox anp PoLar BEAR : ; 3 

THE “Morris K. Jesup,” A PEARY ee THAT REACHED THE 
NortH Poe 


ix 


150 


151 
1538 
155 
157 
159 
161 
167 


168 
169 
170 


175 
190 
191 
193 
198 


201 


203 


205 


207 


208 


ILLUSTRATIONS 


THe Peary Caripou (Rangifer pearyt ALLEN) 

Eskimo GODDESS OF THE SUN , ; 

SSKIMO CONCEPTION OF THE MOON, A che NTER IN Pa RSUIT OF THE 

SUN : 

PoutarR Bear aT Bay 

Eskimo STALKING THE SEAL 

Eskimo ENCAMPMENT IN LATE AUTUMN 5 

Watrus HUNTING IN THE LIGHT OF THE AURORA BOReaT IS 

WINTER SCENE AT PETERAWIK ON THE SHORE OF SMITH SOUND 

REINDEER HUNTING IN SUMMER 

Eskimo IN SEALSKIN CANOE HARPOONING A Niaaenare 

SCENE AT Cape YORK, A SUMMER HoME or THE ESKIMO : 

RESTORATION OF THE JAWS OF THE Fossitt SHARK, Carcharodon 
megalodon ; : : , 

ForE Lec or A MALE Pomack Fiy, Drosophals ampelophila 

A Wine or Drosophila ampelophila SHow1NG REDUCTION OF VENA- 
TION DUE TO SELECTION 

A Normau WING oF Drosophila anselontala. 

A WinG or Drosophila ampelophila SHOWING INCREASE OF v ENA- 
TION DUE TO SELECTION 

Gurrey METEorRITE. FRONT, or “ BRUSTSEITE ’ : 

Gurrey METEORITE. REAR SIDE, PROTECTED DurinG [Ts jon R- 
NEY THROUGH THE AIR } F : 

Gurrrey MereoriteE. Upper EpGcre or Mass as EXHIBITED 

Gurrey MereorireE. Lower Epcr or Mass as EXaipBirep 

GurrEy METEORITE. PHOTOMICROGRAPH 

GIBEON IRON METEORITE. GENERAL VIEW 

GIBEON Iron METEORITE. GREAT NamMaqua LAND, Ag RICA 

GIBEON IRON METEORITE. POLISHED AND ETCHED SECTION : 

Map or SOUTHEASTERN MEXICO SHOWING REGION VISITED BY DR. 
PETRUNKEVITCH : 

‘TPRAP-DOOR SPIDER, Chorizops loricatus ‘ 

TRAP-DOOR SPIDER, Chorizops loricatus. SipE View 

TRAP-DOOR SPIDER, Chorizops loricatus. ENpD or ABDOMEN, USED 

s THE “TRAP Door” : : 

Santa Lucrecira. A NATIVE VILLAGE ON THE ISTHMUS OF TE- 
[UANTEPEC ; : 

ON THE JALTEPEC River, [StHmMuS oF "TEHUANTEPEC 

On THE TEHUANTEPEC RIVER 

‘TEHUANA ‘TRANSPORTATION 


THE 
AMERICAN JSIUSEUM 


JOURNAL 


Volume 1X January, 1909 Number 1 


Published monthly from October to May inclusive by 
Tae AmeERIcAN Museum or Natura History 


New York City 


American Museum of Natural History 
Seventy-seventh Street and Central Park West, New York City 


BOARD OF TRUSTEES 


President 
Henry FAIRFIELD OSBORN 
First Vice-President Second Vice-President 
J. Prereont MorGan CLEVELAND H. Dopar 

Treasurer Secretary 

CHARLES LANIER J. HAMppEN RoBB 
Class of 1908 
H. O. HAVEMEYER FREDERICK E. HYDE 
A. D. JUILLIARD GEORGE 8. BOWDOIN 


CLEVELAND H. DODGE 
Class of 1909 


JOSEPH H. CHOATE GEORGE G. HAVEN 
J. PIERPONT MORGAN HENRY F. OSBORN 

Class of 1910 
J. HAMPDEN ROBB JPABIRXO NE 18%, JE NINE, 
ARTHUR CURTISS JAMES JOHN B. TREVOR 

Class of 1911 
CHARLES LANIER WILLIAM ROCKEFELLER 
ANSON W. HARD GUSTAY E. KISSEL 


SETH LOW 
Class of 1912 


D. O. MILLS . ALBERT 8. BICKMORE 
ARCHIBALD ROGERS CORNELIUS C. CUYLER 


ADRIAN ISELIN, Jr. 


EXECUTIVE OFFICERS 


Director Assistant-Secretary and Assistant-Treasurer 
Hermon C. Bumpus GrorGE H. SHERWOOD 


Tue American Musrum or Narurau History was established in 1869 to promote 
the Natural Sciences and to diffuse a general knowledge of them among the people, and 
it is in cordial codperation with all similar institutions throughout the world. The Museum 
authorities are dependent upon private subscriptions and the dues from members for pro- 
curing needed additions to the collections and for carrying on explorations in America 
and other parts of the world. 


The membership fees are, 


Annual Members..:..:........ 9 LO HOllOW Sins corere. tes her tha on taco TEE 
Life: Metobersi/e.'s.2es- ae eee 100 FBtHONS: is cvrncttie ote W's... Gee 1000 


All money received from membership fees is used for increasing the collections and 
for developing the educational work of the Museum. 


The Museum is open free to the public on every day in the year. 


THE DUCK HAWK HABITAT GROUP. 


Hall No. 308, 


Gallery Floor. 


The American Museum Journal 


Vou. [1X JANUARY, 1909 No. 1 


THE DUCK HAWK, HACKENSACK MEADOW AND EGRET GROUPS. 


HE Journat presents this month photographs of three Bird 
Habitat Groups. Two of these, recently completed, are of 
special interest to residents of the vicinity of New York City. 

The first shows the Duck Hawk or Peregrine Falcon as it nests on 
the Palisades. This Falcon is famed for its fearlessness and strength 
of wing and talon. Among falconers the Peregrine was rated second 
only to the Gyrfalcon and no person of lower rank than an earl was 
permitted to own and fly one of these noble hawks. ‘The Peregrine is 
found throughout the greater part of the world but is nowhere common. 
Near New York City it is known to nest only on the less accessible 
ledges and cliffs of the Palisades and Hudson Highlands. 

The second local group illustrates the bird-life of our Hackensack 
Meadows in August. During this month, and in September, these 
marshes are the home of myriads of birds which come to them to roost 
and to feed. Swallows of several species are comparatively rare in the 
marshes during the day, but late in the afternoon they stream in by the 
thousand, coming from every direction and steering their flight toward 
some regularly frequented roost in the reeds. ‘They leave early in the 
morning radiating to all points of the compass to scour the country for 
food. Red-winged Blackbirds, Bobolinks, new called Reedbirds, and 
Carolina or Sora Rail are attracted to the marshes by the wild rice which 
ripens about this time; and the last two are now killed in large numbers. 
In August the marshes are remarkable not only for their birds but also 
for their flowers. Marsh mallows, cardinal flowers, jewel-weed, sagit- 
taria, pickerel weed, loose-strife, wild sunflower, hempweed, vervain, 
gerardia and many other species bloom so luxuriantly that one might 
imagine that nature was holding a flower show. 

The third group shows part of a colony of the White Egret in a 
flooded cypress forest of South Carolina. This Habitat Group was 
added to the series early in the year, in fact the history of the accumu- 


3 


’ 


4 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


lation of Egret studies is reported in the JouRNAL for December, 1907. 
Both the birds and their haunt are singularly picturesque. ‘The nests 
are high in the trees and look out over the waters of a swamp through 
ragged cypress sprays and festoons of “Spanish moss.’”’ ‘This is the 
Egret that has been brought so near extermination by the plume-hunters. 
It is a matter for rejoicing that there still exists this large South Caro- 
lina rookery and, moreover, that it is within the precincts of a game 
preserve where continued protection is assured. 


TWO NOTEWORTHY FOREIGN MUSEUMS. 


WO European museums of natural history, rather small and 
relatively recent in establishment, are nevertheless peculiarly 
noteworthy. ‘This is according to the impressions of Mr. 

James L. Clark, of the Department of Preparation and Installation, who 
spent the summer of 1908 abroad. ‘The institutions in question are the 
Musée de Teryueren, or Congo Museum, just outside of Brussels, and 
the Senckenberg Museum at Frankfurt; and their prominence is the 
result-of methods of installation, displaying objects in direct relation to 
their environment or to industry. 

The Musée de Teryueren is an unpretentious one-story building 
with its two main halls devoted to the zodlogy and ethnology, respectively, 
of the Congo Free State. The hall of zodiogy contains many rare mam- 
mals, birds and fishes, several okapi of different ages making perhaps 
the most striking exhibit. It is the hall of ethnology, however, that 
claims emphatic admiration in Mr, Clark’s opinion. ‘The lighting is 
from above. Each specimen is well placed and is accompanied by 
photographs illustrating action or use. The general arrangement is in 
alcoves, where are shown various phases of every day life. In the 
alcoves devoted to home life, for instance, straw mats and implements 
and utensils of the hut are arranged on the walls as a background; 
large pieces, such as stone pestles, or models of the huts, are set on the 
floor; while a life-sized family group is made to occupy the central space. 
The figures of these groups are beautifully modeled and executed in 
plaster, cleverly painted, and are clothed in the genuine wearing apparel 


of the natives. The people are represented in action, grinding grain or 


‘SOE “ON [TBE] “a00pT Aaoyp ey 


"dNOYS LVLIGVH L3Y¥93 SHL 


ad 


THE HACKENSACK MEADOW HABITAT GROUP. 


oC 


Hall No. 308, 


Gallery Floor. 


TUBERCULOSIS EXHIBITION 


“I 


making ornaments, as the case may be. Finally, above the alcove 
exhibit, mural paintings of an entire settlement show the village life. 
Thus is told in a comparatively small space a complete story of Congo 
home life in a manner highly instructive and artistic as well. 

The Senckenberg Museum at Frankfurt is in connection with the 
University. The building is modern, well lighted and provided with a 
large hall equipped for lectures and study. A group of African antelope 
with a painted background to show environment proclaims the enter- 
prize of the institution and the tendency of its work. ‘The large Diplo- 
docus presented by the late Mr. Morris Kk. Jesup, while president of the 
American Museum of Natural History, stands in the main foyer. 

The world to-day demands not only that the modern museum shall 
exhibit a multitude of rare and splendid specimens for the use of scientists 
and students, but also that it shall so install these specimens that they 
will make a vivid appeal to the ordinary observer, forcefully portraying 
stages in the evolution of the material world and in the history of civiliza- 


tion. 


THE INTERNATIONAL TUBERCULOSIS EXHIBITION. 


NDER the auspices of the Charity Organization Society of the 

City of New York, the International ‘Tuberculosis Exhibition 

opened November 30th in the new northwest wing of the 

Museum. It immediately proved its power to attract. By the close 

of the fourth day it had been visited by 65,000 people, and before the end 

of the first week by one-third of the half-million attendance expected by 
the society for the whole period of six weeks. 

So admirably is the exhibition organized that it readily permits 
comparative study. The extensive German display, prepared under 
the auspices of the Imperial Board of Health of Berlin, stands mainly 
for treatment and cure, as do also the exhibits of Switzerland, Hungary 
and several other foreign nations, while Ireland’s notable campaign 
under the Women’s National Health Association has been aimed toward 
an education that would bring about prevention. 

The keynote of the American exhibits also is prevention. ‘Those of 
Pennsylvania and Rhode Island are realistic in the presentation of actual 


8 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


living rooms to contrast the conditions promoting tuberculosis and the 
conditions that should obtain. A part of New York’s exhibit shows the 
disastrous effects of over-crowding under adverse light and air conditions, 
comparing models of old tenements and those built under the new law 
and bringing to mind the striking features of the “Congestion of New 
York” exhibition held here last winter and the Tuberculosis exhibition 
of three years ago. Massachusetts gives a study of the industrial aspect 
of the disease, showing photomicrographs of dust and dust-clogged lungs, 
and making plain the need of efficient protection for workers in horn 
and celluloid, steel, iron, felt and other materials. 

A prominent place at the south entrance is occupied by the exhibit of 
the New York Charity Organization Society’s Committee on the Pre- 
vention of Tuberculosis. This Committee at the recent International. 
Congress in Washington shared with Ireland the first prize of $1,000 for 
the best evidence of effective work. Just to glance through this Com- 
mittee’s mass of free literature put forth in Yiddish, Italian, Bohemian, 
Swedish, French, German and English is to gain a realization of the 
comprehensive character of its work. 

New York City has been fortunate in a codperation of officials and 
physicians, and, in the opinion of Dr. Robert Koch, has a better organi- 
zation for the prevention of tuberculosis than any other city in the world. 
In 1886, the death rate from tubercular diseases was 4.42 per 1,000; in 
1907, it was 2.42 per 1,000, a decrease of more than 40 per cent. Of 
the 14,000 free beds for tuberculosis patients in the United States, 25 per 
cent are in New York City. But, as was emphasized at the meeting 
that formally opened the exhibition, conditions in New York can never 
become ideal, and tuberculosis as rare as smallpox, until there is a trio of 
forces at work — officials, physicians and an enlightened public. Hence 
the value of the Tuberculosis Exhibit as an educative force in counter- 
acting habit, ignorance and prejudice; hence the place of the exhibition 
within the walls of the American Museum of Natural History and its 
classification with other evidences of increased knowledge and municipal 
progress, such as playgrounds and free baths, parks, schools, museums 
and free public lectures. 

A review of the whole exhibit, or of even a part of the whole, convinces 
one that tuberculosis is a preventable disease, that the 1,095,000 lives 
sacrificed to it each year (200,000 in the United States, 14,406 in New 


York State in 1907) are an unnecessary loss. It is the human interest 


TUBERCULOSIS EXHIBITION Si 


in this stupendous fact that holds the visiting throngs of whatever station 
in life to earnest study of alcove after alcove. The exhibition also 
makes it clear that, in most parts of the world at least, the fight against 
tuberculosis is. well on. At the same time, it suggests even more defi- 
nitely that the prevention of tuberculosis must be a prevention of infec- 
tion, and that therefore the manner of the warfare must be segregation. 

It is interesting in this connection to compare tuberculosis and 
leprosy. Both are caused by bacilli whose growth produces local tissue 
changes; both may have a long period of latency; both are protracted 
in course; both lack evidence of hereditary predisposition. Out of all 
expert discussions, this fact remains the final issue: that a complete 
stamping out of the white plague can never take place, no matter how 
resistant to tubercle bacilli the populace can be made, except by segrega- 
tion of advanced cases. ‘This conclusion is reached not only by analogy 
with diseases like leprosy, nor only by a study of the pathology of the 
disease, nor only by experimentation with cattle by which extermination 
of tuberculosis was effected in numerous herds in one generation by 
segregation, but also by a comparison of the actual experience of various 
countries. ‘This comparison shows institutional care rather than any con- 
dition of living or industry, the influence that remains in constant relation 
to the amount of tuberculosis existing; therefore this institutional care 
must be the predominant influence. A knowledge of this adds new 
force to a prominent feature of the exhibit,— models of hospitals and 
sanatoria, such as those designed for the new buildings to be put up at 
the Henry Phipps Institute, Philadelphia. The visitor searches for 
facts, not merely of structure, but likewise of organization and main- 
tenance of such institutions. How many will be privately endowed ? 
How many should be erected and supported at the expense of state or 
nation? ‘These are questions that must have practical answers in the 
near future. It is computed that if every consumptive now dying in the 
state of New York were given hospital care, the number would be about 
one-half of the insane supported at public expense. 

Man’s infection from bovine tuberculosis is given emphasis in various 
exhibits, particularly in the pathological work presented by the Bureau 
of Animal Industry of the United States Department of Agriculture, 
in the laws of the New York Department of Health with regard to the 
city’s milk supply, in a demonstration of the pasteurization of milk, 
and in the equipment of a model dairy and model cowshed shown in 


10 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


temporary structures just outside the north entrance to the exhibition. 
It must be conceded, however, that among physicians there exists a 
difference of opinion, relatively unimportant in its practical bearings, 
concerning the matter of man’s infection from cow’s milk. Many 
believe that milk is a minor vehicle of infection for adults, though a 
potent one in the case of children. In fact, the controversy that arose 
at the Congress of 1901 as to the identity of human and bovine tubercle 
bacilli is still an unsettled scientific question, with Dr. Koch maintaining 
the distinct character of the two germs but allowing the possibility of 
man’s infection from bovine bacilli. 

The International Tuberculosis Exhibition must be admitted to be 
of far-reaching significance. It stands for increased knowledge of 
nature, of the relations between the hosts of the microscopic world and 
the health of man; it stands for social and economic progress; and, 
happily, it means for the future a closer union between men of science 
and men of affairs. Besides accomplishing its main object, it is certain 
to bring about, in general, more hygienic ways of living, broader ideas 
of the work that should be done in health-control by city, ‘state and 
national governments, and a more practical recognition of the obligations 
of mutual helpfulness. 

The exhibition will be open to the public until January 10, Num- 
erous mass meetings and special conferences are being held by physi- 
cians, medical students, nurses, social workers, labor unions, street 
railway employees and others, with announcements in the daily papers 
of the dates of these meetings and the programmes of speakers. 


AN ETHNOLOGICAL TRIP TO LAKE ATHABASCA. 


URING the summer of 1908, by arrangement between the 
Museum and the New York Academy of Sciences, I undertook 
an ethnological expedition to the Chipewyan Indians of Lake 

Athabasca. Leaving New York on the 5th of May, five days’ travel 
brought me to Edmonton, probably the greatest fur-mart of the world 
and the northernmost point that can be reached by rail. It was at this 
place, in the office of the Hudson’s Bay Company, that I completed my 


camping outfit and procured the two articles considered the most essen- 


AN ETHNOLOGICA® TRIP TO LAKE ATHABASCA 11 


tial parts of a Northland traveler’s equipment, a mosquito bar for pro- 
tection at night and a netting for day use. After leaving Edmonton 
two days’ stage journey found me at Athabasca Landing, the last post 
office and the head of the Arctic inland water-route.’ 

Here, I joined Captain Kelly of the Hudson’s Bay Company, who 
was prepared to start down stream with a fleet of seven scows bearing 
the yearly provisions for all the Company’s northern trading posts. 
Each boat was manned by several oarsmen, who rowed after the fashion 
of the old Roman galley-slaves, rising from their seats at each stroke, 
and by a steersman who manipulated a heavy sweep. For several days 


THE ‘‘GRAHAME"' ON LAKE ATHABASCA 


we alternately rowed and drifted down the Athabasca River, our half- 
breed crew whiling away leisure time with a hand-game similar to our 
“button, button, who’s got the button.” 

By the 19th of May we were only a short distance above the Grand 
Rapids of the Athabasca, and, owing to the extreme shallowness of the 
water and the numerous rocks in the river-bed, the oarsmen were 
obliged to punt instead of row. At the Grand Rapids, the river is 
divided into two channels by an island nearly a half mile long. The 


1 Dr. Lowie’s route may be traced by studying the map on page 102 of the 
JourNAL for November, 1908. 


12 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


western of the two channels is wholly impassabie, but the eastern channel 
can be traversed, provided boats have been lightened of their cargoes. 
Accordingly we removed our freight and baggage to the shore, transport- 
ing them the length of the island in hand-pushed carts or on our backs, 
and steered the emptied scows through the shoals along the eastern bank. 
Finally, at the far end of the island, we reloaded the boats, having con- 
sumed six days in the tedious operation. 

The next hundred miles gave an almost continuous succession of 
rapids, which, however, our scows passed without damage. We reached 


HEADMAN ‘OLD CATHARINE.”’ 


Fullblooded Chipewyan. 


Ft. McMurray, the objective point of the scows, on the 28th of May. 
Here the freight was unloaded and piled on the bank to await the arrival 
of the Hudson’s Bay Company’s steamer, the ‘Grahame,’ which 
plies irregularly between Ft. McMurray and Smith’s Landing. Captain 
Kelly then turned back, leaving me and two half-breed watchmen with 
three days’ supply of provisions — which it turned out we had to hus- 
band with care, since the steamer did not appear for eight days. ‘The 


remainder of the trip presented no unusual features, and on the Sth of 


AN ETHNOLOGICAL@TRIP 
June, I landed at Ft. Chipewyan, on 
the northwestern shore of Lake Atha- 
basca. Here I found good opportuni- 
ty for the investigation I had planned, 
since this settlement is one of the 
chief rendezvous of the Chipewyan 
Indians. 

These Indians are a branch of the 
Athabascan, or Dé€né © stock, the 
largest linguistic family of North 
America, embracing the Hupa_ of 
California and the Apache and Na- 
vajo of the Southwest, as well as the 
aborigines of the Mackenzie River 
basin. ‘They do not live on reserva- 
tions, but hunt and fish in primitive 
fashion around the shores of Lake 
Athabasca, Lake Claire and the Slave 
River. Peltries are offered to the 
Hudson’s Bay Company and to rival 
“free-traders”’ in exchange for cloth- 


TO LAKE ATHABASCA 13 


TALLEST CHIPEWYAN MEASURED. 
Height 6 feet 2 inches. 


ing and provisions; but, even with these supplies, considerable hard-- 


ship is often encountered during the long winters. 


CHIPEWYAN BOYS 


14 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


Many valuable photographs were secured at Ft. Chipewyan and at 
Fond du Lac near the eastern extremity of the Lake. The physique of 
the Chipewyan differs considerably from the Sioux prototype on which 
popular conceptions of Indian appearance are modeled. ‘Their cheek- 
bones are, on the whole, less prominent; and, as the hair of the face is 
not plucked out, fairly heavy moustaches are common and whiskers 
also occur. ‘Though not averaging below five feet seven inches in height, 
the natives of the Athabasca district are short as compared with the 
Plains Indians. 

Ethnologically, the Chipewyan were found to share two fundamental 
traits of all their Athabascan congeners: (1) great simplicity of organi- 
zation and (2) extraordinary susceptibility to extraneous influences. 
They do not practise any elaborate ceremonials, nor is there any strongly _ 
centralized executive power; esoteric fraternities and age-societies are 
lacking. Shamanistic activity, however, flourished until recent times, 
and within the memory of men still living at the fort, there resided at 
Fond du Lac a medicine-man, who, according to the belief of the natives, 
could transform himself into a wolf and thus hunt the moose. In their 
mythology, the Chipewyan betray a strong family resemblance to their 
northern congeners. ‘There are tales of giants, of the man in the moon, 
of a weird foundling who by his magical powers aided his people in 
times of famine, and of a powerful shaman who avenged his father’s 
murder and destroyed all his enemies until the time when he himself 
perished by an accident. ‘The receptivity of the Chipewyan is shown 
by the strong influence exerted by the Catholic missions and the Hud- 
son’s Bay Company, both of which have profoundly modified primitive 
conditions. Other instances in point are the adoption of a complete Cree 
cycle into their mythology, and the imitation of their southern neighbors 
in the Cree tea-dance, a purely social diversion. 

In July, an opportunity offered to return to civilization with a free- 
trader. Our little craft was towed for three days by a small tug through 
172 miles of lake and river to Ft. McMurray. ‘There the eight men of 
the crew were harnessed to a tow-line to pull the boat up the remaining 
265 miles of the Athabasca River. At each of the rapids, we were 
obliged to get out and commence an ‘‘obstacle-walk,” at times for 
several miles, now clambering up a five-foot ledge of limestone, now 
trying to get a foot-hold on a slippery earth-bank, dodging lodged 


deadfalls, and jumping across logs in our way. Every night we camped 


MUSE@M NEWS NOTES 15 


ashore, pitching our mosquito-bars on wet soil or dry as the case might 
be. At five o’clock each morning we rose, bundled up our bars and 
bedding, re-embarked, and continued our journey. ‘Twenty miles’ 
journey we considered a good day’s work. As we were not fortunate 
enough to sight any moose, our diet was a well-nigh uninterrupted 
combination of bacon, bannocks and beans. We made the trip, as a 
whole, in relatively short time, covering the total distance of 437 miles 
in seventeen days, but it was with a sense of great relief that we ulti- 
mately sighted the wharves and buildings of Athabasca Landing. 
From there we took the stage to Edmonton, and were again in railroad 
connection with the outside world. 
R. H. Lowte. 


MUSEUM NEWS NOTES. 


HE Hon. Mason MircHerr, to whom the departments of An- 
thropology and Mammalogy are already indebted for much 
valuable material from eastern Asia, presented to the Museum 

in December an exceptional series of ethnological specimens from Tibet, 
together with some choice things from China and India. An extended 
notice of this acquisition is reserved for a future number of the JouRNAL. 


THe Department of Anthropology has recently received a guanaco 
skin cape as a gift from Mr. Charles H. Townsend, who obtained it 
some years ago at Punta Arena, Strait of Magellan. The guanaco is a 
mammal related to and somewhat larger than the llama. ‘The hair of 
the adult is coarse, so that old skins are not suitable for use in the manu- 
facture of garments, but the hair of the young is fine, and animals proba- 
bly not more than two weeks old are slaughtered for skins to be used in 
capes like the one just received. The skins are sewed together with 
ostrich sinew. The Tehuelches of the continental side of the Strait 
wear the robe with the hair next to the body, while the Onas across the 
water from them, where the rainfall is much greater, turn the fleece 
side out, since the hair readily sheds water. 


Tue following members have been elected since the last issue of the 
JourNaL: Life Members, Messrs. GEORGE SHIRAS, 3D, JAMES W. 


16 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


ExLiswortH, Henry A. Murray and GorpoN Knox BELL and MMEs. 
Emma B. Aucuincioss, Emiry H. Morr and WiiirAm CHurcH Os- 
BORN; Annual Members, Messrs. WaLrer E. Frew, Grorce F. 
Norton, CHARLES SCRIBNER, PARKER D. Hanpy, Epmunp D. RaAn- 
DOLPH, JEFFERSON CLARK, GEORGE L. JeEwerr, Marcus MaAyEr, 
JacQuEs Bain, Wm. R. BEAL, CHARLES E.. HERRMANN, ANTONIO 
KnautH, CHartes W. McKetvey, Jos—EpH NATHAN, ROBERT Sco- 
VILLE, E. A. S. CLARKE, Karu Birrer, ROSWELL MILLER, Wm. GORDON 
FELLows, FRANKLIN Murpuy, A. J. Sauter, Jos. H. STEINHARDT, 
Cart Drerer, ALPHONSE Montant, RavpH Punirzer, G. H. RIsLrEy, 
Wo. Fettowes Moraan, Dr Lancey Nico.ti, NATHAN STRAUS, MosEs 
Biyur, RupoteH E. ScoirMER, GEORGE W. JENKINS, RosBert M. 
GaLLaway, J. G. Taytor, HEINRICH SCHNIEWIND, JR., HENRY B. 
Barnes, W. J. Curtis, EBEN RicHarps, WM. ARMISTEAD LANE, S. 
L. ScHOoNMAKER, Isaac J. BerRNHEIM, T. A. HAVEMEYER, JOHN 
ZIMMERMANN, SAMUEL Morritr and C. A. Tarum, Rev. W. R. 
HunrTInGcTon, Cot. JOHN SCHUYLER CrRosBy, Docrors ALFRED K. 
Hitis, Coartes McBurney, E_mMer A. SHEETS, DANIEL M. STIMSON, 
Brerr. A. Burns and Lyman Apsott, Mmes. JoHN WELLS, JOHN 
Hopart WarrkEN, E. H. Harriman, R. Somers Hayes, T. B. Woo.sry, 
Mary A. Tutte, Isaac N. Sots, J. E. SpPIncARN, R. Dun Doucuass, 
G. G. WHEELOCK and FLORENCE P. MAXwE Lt and Dr. ANNA BLOOMER. 


LECTURE ANNOUNCEMENTS. 


LEGAL HOLIDAY COURSE. 


Fully illustrated. Open free to the public. No tickets required. 
Lectures begin at 3:15 p.m. Doors open at 2:45 p. M. 
‘Two lectures remain to be given in this course: 
New Year’s Day, January 1, 1909. 

“Florida Bird Life.” (Moving pictures.) By Frank M. CHAPMAN. 
Washington’s Birthday, February 22, 1909. 

“Some of the Food and Game Fishes of the Eastern United States.— 

Habits and Methods of Capture.” By Roy W. Miner. 


LECTURES 17 


COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY COURSE. 


JESUP LECTURES. 


GIVEN in coéperation with Columbia University. 
Wednesday evenings at 8:15 o'clock. 


Continuation of a course of lectures on light by PRorrssor Ricnarp C. 
Mactavrin of Columbia University. 


~ 


January 5—‘“‘The exact laws of reflection and refraction and their 
bearing on the construction of optical instruments.” 

January 13.— “Optical properties of crystals.” 

January 20.— ‘The principle of interference and its explanation of vari- 
ous color phenomena.” 

January 27.—‘‘The measurement of light waves and the theory of dif- 
fraction.” 

February 3.— ‘Some relations between light and electricity.” 


PEOPLE’S COURSE. 


GIVEN in coéperation with the City Department of Education. 
Tuesday evenings at 8 o'clock. Doors open at 7:30. 
Ian C. HaNNAH,— a course of six lectures on European relations with the 
Far East. 
January 5.—‘ The East and the West and Their Different Ideals.” 
January 12.— ‘“China’s Everlasting Empire.” 
January 19.— ‘‘England’s Eastern Empire.” 
January 26.— “The Russian March Across Asia.”’ 
February 2.— ‘‘Japan’s Transformation.” 
February 9.— “‘America as an Asiatic Power.” 
Saturday evenings at 8 o'clock. Doors open at 7:30. 
January 9.— Proressor Larayetre B. Menpet of Yale University, 
“Development of the Milk Industry.” 
January 16.— Hon. J.S. Warppie, “The Adirondack Forest.” 
January 23.— Proressor Larayetre B. MENDEL, “Growth and Beauty 
of Children.” 
January 30.— Winuiam L. Hatt, “Forests and Waters.” 


18 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


MEETINGS OF SOCIETIES. 


Public meetings of the New York Academy of Sciences and its Affhated 
Societies are held at the Museum according to the following schedule: 
On Monday evenings, ‘The New York Academy of Sciences: 
First Mondays, Section of Geology and Mineralogy. 
Second Mondays, Section of Biology. 
Third Mondays, Section of Astronomy, Physics and Chemistry. 
Fourth Mondays, Section of Anthropology and Psychology. 
On Tuesday evenings, as announced: 
The Linnean Society of New York, The New York Entomological 
Society and the Torrey Botanical Club. 
On Wednesday evenings, as announced: 
The New York Mineralogical Club. 
On Friday evenings, as announced: 
The New York Microscopical Society 
The programmes of the meetings of the respective organizations are 
published in the weekly Bulletin of the New York Academy of Sciences and 
sent to the members of the several societies. Members of the Museum on 
making request of the Director will be provided with the Bulletin as issued. 


The American [luseum Journal 


Epmunpb Ottis Hovey, Editor. 
FRANK M. CHAPMAN, ) 
Louris P. GRATACAP, Advisory Board, 
WILLIAM K. GREGORY, ) 


Subscription, One Dollar per year. Fifteen Cents per copy. 
A subscription to the JouRNAL is included in the membership fees of all classes of Members of 
the Museum. 


Subscriptions should be addressed to The American Museum Journal, 30 Boylston St., Cam- 
bridge, Mass., or 77th St. and Central Park West, New York City. 


Entered as second-class matter January 12, 1907, at the Post-office at Boston, Mass. 
Act of Congress, July 16, 1894. 


Scientific Staff. 


DIRECTOR. 
Hermon C. Bumpus, Ph.D., Se. D. 


DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC INSTRUCTION. 
Prof. AuBerT S. Bickmore, B.S., Ph.D., LL.D., Curator Emeritus. 
GeorGE H. SHERwoop, A.B., A.M., Curator. 


DEPARTMENT OF GEOLOGY AND INVERTEBRATE PALZONTOLOGY 


Prof. R. P. Wurrrietp, A.M., Curator. 
Epmunp Otis Hovey, A.B., Ph.D., Associate Curator. 


DEPARTMENT OF MAMMALOGY AND ORNITHOLOGY 
Prof. J. A. AuLEN, Ph.D., Curator. 
FraNnK M. Cuapman, Curator of Ornithology. 


Prof. Henry Farrrietp Osporn, A.B., Se.D., LL.D., D.Se., Curator. 
W. D. MarrHew, Ph.B., A.B., A.M., Ph.D., Associate Curator. 
WALTER GRANGER, Assistant. 

BarnuM Brown, A.B., Assistant. 


Prof. BasHrorp Dean, A.B., A.M., Ph.D., Curator of Fossil Fishes. 
Louis Hussakor, B.S., Ph.D., Assistant. 
DEPARTMENT OF ANTHROPOLOGY. 

CLaRK WissteR, A.B., A.M., Ph.D., Curator. 
Haran JI. Smiru, Assistant Curator. 
GEORGE H. PrEpper, Assistant. 
CHarLes W. Meap, Assistant. 


Prof. MarsHaLut H. Savitie, Honorary Curator of Mexican Archeology. 


DEPARTMENT OF ENTOMOLOGY. 
WILLIAM BEUTENM@ULLER, Curator. 


DEPARTMENTS OF MINERALOGY AND CONCHOLOGY. 
L. P. Graracap, Ph.B., A.B., A.M., Curator. 
GeorGcE F. Kunz, A.M., Ph.D., Honorary Curator of Gems. 


DEPARTMENT OF BOOKS AND PUBLICATIONS. 
Prof. RauepH W. Tower, A.B., A.M., Ph.D., Curator. 
DEPARTMENT OF INVERTEBRATE ZOOLOGY 


Roy W. Miner, A.B., Assistant Curator. 
B. E. Dauueren, D.M.D., Assistant Curator. : 
Prof. Witt1am Morton WHEELER, Ph.D., Honorary Curator of Social Insects. 


DEPARTMENT OF PHYSIOLOGY. 
Prof. Ratepw W. Tower, A.B., A.M., Ph.D., Curator. 


DEPARTMENT OF MAPS AND CHARTS. 
A. Woopwarp, Ph.D., Curator. 


THE AMERICAN MUSEUM 
OF 


NATURAL HISTORY 


FORGEHE PEOPEE 
FOR EDVCATION 
FOR.o GAISESNeCsE 


in 


‘spavd parpuny euo ynoqe jo sourysip Be wosy poydvisojoyq 


*8061 ‘02 LSNONV “3IVHM HOVENIS V SO 1.LNOdS,, SHL 


The American Museum Journal 


Vou. IX FEBRUARY, 1909 No. 2 


A SUMMER WITH THE PACIFIC COAST WHALERS. 


HE recent establishment of several shore-whaling stations on 

the coasts of Vancouver Island and Alaska, has made possible 

a study of certain species of the large whales inhabiting the 

North Pacific Ocean. With the exception of a single work, “Marine 

Mammalia,” written by Captain C. M. Scammon in 1874, these 

animals have remained almost unknown scientifically, and their rela- 

tionship to the corresponding Atlantic forms, which have been carefully 

investigated by Dr. F. W. True, has never been satisfactorily determined. 

To secure data for a comparative study of the external and osteological 

characters of these whales, I left New York late in April on a Museum 
expedition to the west coast whaling stations. 

The species commonly taken there are the Humpback, Sulphur- 
bottom and Finback, the first-named in largest numbers. All belong to 
the group known as Finwhales, having short, coarse baleen or ‘“‘ whale- 
bone” and thin blubber. Before the invention of the harpoon gun in 
1864, they were seldom hunted, because the comparatively small yield 
of oil and whalebone and the great speed of the animals in the water, 
together with their tendency to sink when killed, rendered them persona 
non grata to the men in the small boat. ‘To-day, however, they are 
being taken at a rate which threatens their speedy extinction. 

The study of whales is beset with many and unusual difficulties. 
Their great size, alone, is a serious obstacle. If one wishes to do such an 
ordinary thing as to turn over a fin for observation of the color or mark- 
ings of the other side, he must have the assistance of not only one man 
but several. Thus the naturalist is totally dependent for the success of 
his studies upon the men about him, in fact, they make or ruin his work 
by their attitude toward it. 

Fortunately, I met with most courteous treatment from the owners 
of the stations, and my thanks are due to the Pacific Whaling Company 
and Dr. Rismuller of Victoria, B. C., and to Captain I. N. Hibbard of 


21 


22 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


the ‘Tyee Company, Alaska; also to the managers of the several factories, 
Messrs. J. Quinton, S. C. Ruck and V. H. Street. ‘These gentiemen, 
by their generous coéperation in extending the courtesies of their stations 
and vessels, rendered my stay pleasant as well as profitable. 

The months of May and June were spent on the west coast of Van- 
couver Island, at Sechart, an old Indian village site on Barclay Sound. 
Although the weather was bad, Humpback whales were plentiful, and 
whenever a fair day broke the monotony of rain and fog, the following 
morning we were sure to find four or five Humpbacks floating breast-up 
at the end of the wharf. On such a day there was need for rapid work. 
Little could be done until the whales were drawn out of the water upon 
the “slip,” as the long inclined platform is called; then photographs, 
detailed measurements and descriptions had to be secured before the 
animal was denuded of its blubber covering. The ease and quickness 
with which a large whale weighing, perhaps sixty or seventy tons, can 
be handled by means of the steam winch is almost incredible; within 
fifteen or twenty minutes from the time the animal is taken from the 
water, little remains of the blubber on the upper side. In order to 
determine the extent of individual variation in color and external char- 
acters, each specimen was carefully described, a ‘‘standard”” set of 
measurements taken, and as much additional matter recorded as time 
and circumstances permitted. While the flesh was being stripped from 
the bones, there was opportunity for study of the fresh skeleton, and it 
was possible to obtain many facts relating to variations in the vertebral 
column, pectoral limb, ribs and other parts. Later many of the bones 
were measured and photographed. ‘Thirty Humpbacks in all were 
examined at Sechart, and the skeleton of an exceptionally fine specimen, 
including its complete set of baleen, was secured. 

At the end of June, I proceeded one hundred miles up the coast to 
the station located in Kyuquot Sound, where Humpbacks, Sulphur- 
bottoms and an occasional Finback were being taken. ‘The weather 
conditons of the month of July were good, and the facilities for study 
enjoyed through the kindness of Mr. S. C. Ruck, manager of the station, 
were exceptional. As the result of one day’s hunting, the steamer towed 
to the wharf two large Sulphurbottoms, one Finback and three Hump- 
backs, a record catch which raised the total number to twenty-six whales 
for the week. 

At Kyuquot an opportunity offered for work upon a large Sperm 


A HUMPBACK WHALE EMERGING FROM BENEATH THE STEAMER 


> blowholes or nostrils are open, sin 1e animal is drawing in its breath. 
The blowholes or nostrils are open, since the animal is drawing in its breath 


THE TAIL OF A DIVING HUMPBACK 


23 


‘ 7 
, Lee alt RAS ate a ta 


of = 


es 


THE GUN HARPOON IN THE AIR. 
Showing, besides harpoon and rope, the smoke and sparks of the discharge, bits of 
burning wadding and the back of the whale. 


25 


ié 
“ 


is need 


ee 


AN EIGHTY-FOOT SULPHURBOTTOM WHALE ON THE SLIP 


The animal is being drawn out of the water by means of a cable attached to its tail. 


PACIFIG, COAST WHALERS. 29 


whale. Sperms are but rarely taken at these shore stations, and I was 
delighted at the unexpected good fortune. The whale was drawn upon 
the slip early in the morning, and ample time was given to secure a com- 
plete set of photographs and measurements, with a full description of the 
animal as a basis for a life-sized model to be prepared at the Museum. 
The Sperm whale is a strange-looking creature, the great square- 
ended head haying a size out of all proportion to the body and giving 
the animal a peculiarly shapeless appearance. ‘The whole upper third 
‘oil-tank”’ containing the valuable sperma- 


‘ 


of the head is devoted to an 
ceti, which lies in a liquid state and may be dipped out after an opening 
has been made. Fifteen barrels of pure spermaceti were obtained from 
the oil-tank in the head of this individual, and twenty-five barrels more 
were secured from the fat surrounding the head. ‘The total amount of 
oil, including the spermaceti and _ that obtained from the meat, bone 
and blubber, was ninety barrels. 

Finbacks were taken at such infrequent intervals at Vancouver 
Island, that I decided to go to the station at Tyee, Admiralty Island, 
Alaska, where this species was said to be plentiful. Arriving there early 
in August, I found that the reports had not been exaggerated, for Fin- 
backs were being brought in every day. I remained at ‘Tyee about 
three weeks collecting a considerable amount of valuable data, and 
receiving the most hospitable treatment. 

At each of the stations, some time was spent on board the whaling 
vessels, studying and photographing the animals in the water. Few 
students of the Cetacea have made attempts to record their observations 
with the camera. The discomforts of such work are many, and one 
must be constantly on the alert. Nevertheless, the study is most interest- 
ing, for the momentary glimpses of phases of whale-life obtained while 
the animals are above the water give fascinating hints of what may take 
place below the surface. 

The whaling steamers which hunt from the shore stations are small 
steel vessels, having a maximum speed of ten or twelve knots per hour. 
Mounted on the bow, they carry a heavy cannon which shoots a harpoon 
having an explosive head or point called the “bomb.” When the man 
stationed in the “barrel” at the masthead sights a whale, the vessel is 
sent at full speed in pursuit, and stopped on the smooth patch of water 
called the “slick” which invariably follows the whale’s dive. Then 
begins a period of waiting until the animal re-appears. If the place has 


30 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


been well judged, the whale may come to the surface almost under the 
vessel’s bow. As the animal bursts into view, sending the spout high 
into the air, the captain swings the gun about, sights along the barrel 
and fires just as the dorsal fin appears above the water. At times the 
whale may rise actually under the boat. ‘This happened on one of my 
trips, allowing me to secure a picture of considerable interest, showing 
the nostrils or blowholes widely distended during the act of inspiration. 

When the whales were too far away for good photographs, I watched 
their movements with field glasses from the bridge or the “barrel” at the 
mast-head. From the latter position on several occasions, I saw the act 
of feeding. The animals eat a small crustacean (a shrimp) about three 
quarters of an inch in length, which at times floats at the surface of the 
ocean. When the whale has taken in a mouthful of water containing 
quantities of these minute animals, it turns on its side, letting the im- 
mense under jaw close over the upper, while the water spurts out in 
streams between the plates of whalebone. The fin and one lobe of the 
flukes are thrust into the air and even the full length of the body is 
sometimes exposed, as the animal rolls from side to side. 

I was fortunate in securing a photograph of a large Finback whale 
while it was feeding, and of a Humpback which threw itself entirely out 
of the water. Other pictures show both species in the acts of spouting 
and diving. Thus many interesting observations on the habits and 
“home life” of these strange animals were given indisputable record by 
the aid of the camera. 

Roy C. ANDREWS. 


A portion of the central Hall (No. 204) of the second. floor of the 
Museum has been fitted up expressly for children, through the generosity 
of subscribers to a special fund. Among the features of the Children’s 

toom are live animals in aquaria and growing plants, as well as 
books, pictures and specimens which may be handled by the juvenile 


visitors. ‘lhe room is under the direct care of Mrs. Agnes L. Roessler. 


THe attendance at the Museum during 1908 was 1,043,562, the 
record attendance for one day being 63,256, on December 27, 1908. 
‘The International ‘Tuberculosis Exhibition was visited by 753,954 
persons from November 30, 1908, to January 17, 1909. 


4 
% bd ’ 
4 ot 


ow 


ST. PIERRE, MARTINIQUE. VIEW NORTHWARD FROM HOTEL WINDOW 
Rue Victor Hugo, the main street of the city, which has been cleared of voleanic 
ash and other débris. In the background is Mt. Pelé. May, 1908. 


ST. PIERRE, MARTINIQUE. SOUTHERN PART OF THE CITY 


View looking northward from the road to Le Carbet showing growth of vegeta- 
tion over the city. Mt. Pelé in the background. May, 1908. 
29 


MARTINIQUE EXPEDITION 30 


ST. PIERRE AND MT. PELE IN 1908. 


EADERS of the American Museum JourNau will remember 
that the Museum sent an expedition to Martinique and St. 
Vincent in 1902, directly after the beginning of the series of 

eruptions that made that year famous in the annals of vulcanology. 
The following year the Museum sent a second expedition to observe the 
changes that had taken place in the two voleanoes, particularly those at 
Mt. Pelé, Martinique, through the extrusion of the great “spine” that 
surmounted its eruption cone for nearly a year. Five years passed ; 
the spine fell to pieces, entirely altering the form of the summit cone of 
Mt. Pelé; eruptions of débris entirely ceased in July, 1905, at Pelé, 
while there had been none at the Soufriére of St. Vincent after March, 
1903; vegetation was asserting its sway over the devastated areas, and 
human occupation was advancing again toward the craters, hence it 
was determined to send a third expedition to the region to bring observa- 
tions on the volcanoes up to date. 

Leaving New York April 16, 1908, on the steamship “Guiana” of 
the Quebec Line, this time accompanied by my wife, I reached Fort de 
France, the capital of Martinique, Sunday, ten days later. ‘Two days 
after this we took the ancient little coasting steamer ‘‘ Diamant” for Le 
Carbet, an important town on the leeward coast about two miles south 
of the ruined city of St. Pierre. Le Carbet occupies the site of the most 
important settlement of the aboriginal Carib inhabitants of the island, 
and a shrine and cross within its borders mark the spot where Chris- 
topher Columbus is supposed to have first set foot upon Martinique in 
June, 1502. 

From Le Carbet, we made the remainder of the journey by canoe, 
arriving at St. Pierre by ten o’clock with our various belongings and 
settling at the little ‘hotel’? which has been built on the Rue Victor 
Hugo, the main street of old St. Pierre. This “hotel”? boasts two guest 
rooms and a dining room of diminutive size, and harbors a store where 
malodorous salt cod fish and other viands are sold to passers-by; never- 
theless, one can stay several days very comfortably at the little hostelry, 
and it makes convenient headquarters for excursions. 

The ruins of St. Pierre look like those of a place destroyed a century 
ago, rather than only a few years since. Many walls that were standing 
on the occasion of my second visit, in the spring of 1903, have fallen, 


34 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


and many streets and buildings that were plainly distinguishable then are 
now completely obliterated as to surface indications. Earth has been 
washed down abundantly from the denuded surrounding bluffs and 
hill slopes, bringing grass and other seeds with it, and the whole city, 
except for a few clearings, is covered with vegetation. ‘The knotty bunch 
grass characteristic of the Lesser Antilles is flourishing luxuriantly, 
together with the castor-oil plant (Ricinus communis) and many bushes 
strange to northern eyes. Here and there a mango or other tree that 
lived through the terrible eruption blasts and the consequent burning 
of the city is struggling to recover from its injuries and gives a little grate- 
ful shade to the stray wanderer amid the ruins and to the cattle that are 
being pastured where once stood the cathedral, the hospital, the theatre, 
the government buildings and the stores and residences of a wealthy city.. 

The Rue Victor Hugo has been cleared of ash and débris for its 
entire length from south to north; so too have been the streets connecting 
this old artery of travel with the road to Morne d’Orange and the south- 
east, with that to Fond St. Denis and thence to Fort de France and with 
the route to Morne Rouge and the rich sugar and other estates of the 
northeastern parts of the island. he clearing of these streets was made 
necessary to meet the requirements of the great agricultural district that 
was naturally tributary to St. Pierre and that now must ship out its 
sugar, rum and other produce by the old route. ‘To accommodate this 
traffic and the travel between the region and Fort de France, a pier has 
been built at Place Bertin near the hotel, and regular semi-weekly 
steamboat service with Fort de France began in June. The Rue de 
l’ Hopital also has been cleared, giving access to the headquarters of the 
police, established in the massive ruins of the old bank building, and the 
Rue Victor Hugo has been cleared southward to give unobstructed 
connection with the road to Le Carbet and beyond. 

On May 1, we embarked in a canoe for the mouth of the Riviere 
Blanche to camp in its gorge, down which came the first as well as all 
the rest of the long series of incandescent dust-laden steam-clouds that 
burst from the great crater and cone for more than three years. Estab- 
lishing camp on a little sand plain about two miles from the coast and 
twelve hundred feet above the sea, I turned my attention first to the 
neighboring fumaroles or steam vents that extended in an irregular line 
a quarter of a mile or more toward the crater. The vents nearest the 
crater registered a temperature of 581 degrees Fahrenheit, while 50 


ST. PIERRE, MARTINIQUE. GENERAL VIEW OF RUINS. MAY, 1908 


Looking south-southwest. 


ST. PIERRE, MARTINIQUE. 


The prominent ruin in the foreground is part of the 
military hospital. 


ve} 


RUE VICTOR HUGO, LOOKING SOUTHWARD. MAY 


ST. PIERRE, MARTINIQUE RUINS OF THE THEATRE. MAY 908 


MT. PELE, MARTINIQUE. THE WEST SIDE OF THE VOLCANO IN MAY, 1908 
The line of knolls in the middle ground is the fumarole area of the Riviere 
Claire. The camp site is about 1200 feet above the sea. 
37 


II 
. 
} 
= 


MARTINIQUE EXPEDITION 39 


yards from our tents were fumaroles that were just right for use in cook- 
ing and we employed one for the purpose. Our camp was a “ dry” one, 
since we were four or five miles from the nearest source of fresh water. 

The western and southwestern sides of the mountain present a scene 
of utter desolation. ‘lhe sloping plain formed by the débris-filled gorge 
of the Riviere Blanche is thickly strewn with bowlders and angular rock- 
fragments of all sizes, with here and there a little patch of sand; but not a 
sign of life, not even a blade of grass or so much as an ant, is visible 
anywhere. ‘The surrounding hillsides were scored so often and so 
deeply by terrific blasts from the crater that they too are barren of 
vegetation. As one goes away, however, from this zone of greatest 
activity, moss, grass and other vegetation gradually appear in protected 
and otherwise favorable spots, while upon the other sides of the moun- 
tain where the scoring did not take place the slopes are green to the very 
summit, and large vegetation is rapidly making its way back into the 
devastated area. 

Five days was enough for my work on the southwest side of the 
mountain, and then we moved camp to the basin of the Lac des Palmistes, 
the old summit plateau of Mt. Pelé, about 4,000 feet above the sea. 
Here, in the midst of clouds and buffeted by the heavy trade winds, we 
set up our tents for another stay of five days, with the idea of being able 
to improve every moment while the summit might be free from clouds, 
for the top of Mt. Pelé is densely veiled more than nine-tenths of the time. 
The recent eruption of the voleano was remarkable partly through the 
formation in the old crater of a vast new cone of solid rock (not débris) 
surmounted by a wonderful needle, or spine. The new feature was 
formed by lava which welled up through the vent, but which was in 
such a viscous condition that it solidified as it came and therefore rose 
into the air instead of running down hill. Minor explosions blew away 
the southwest and northwest quarters of the top of this cone leaving the 
great spine as a residue. At its maximum development in May, 1903, 
the point of this spine was 5304 feet above the level of the sea. 

The mass, however, was brittle and was rifted in every direction 
through strains due to contraction. It could not maintain its position 
and therefore fell to pieces. One may see the great fragments, fifty 
to sixty feet across, now lying at the base of the new cone in the spiral 
valley between it and the wall of the old crater. Nearly 900 feet of 
the mountain top thus fell away, and the present summit is 4,444 feet 


40) THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


above sea level, or only sixteen feet higher than the old Morne Lacroix 
that once formed the highest part of the mountain, but which was largely 
destroyed by the eruption. 

It is not a difficult matter now to climb the north side of the new cone, 
but its slope is 37 to 40 degrees from the horizontal, so that the rock 
fragments composing it are so loose that a slight jar starts them down 
hill, rendering foothold uncertain and the advance of a party dangerous 
to the lower members of it. In the top of the new cone, there are great 
fissures within which the temperature is high. In a branch of one of 
them my electric pyrometer gave a reading of 515 degrees Celsius, 
or 959 degrees Fahrenheit. After a shower, steam issues abundantly 
from the numerous fumaroles of the cone, but between times there is 
said to be no cloud of vapor, and as far as known no ash has been thrown 
out since the summer of 1905. ‘The activity of the voleano has been 
gradually though intermittently decreasing since the great outburst of 
August 30, 1902, which was the most severe of the whole series, and 
there seems to be no present indication of another eruption. 

EpmMuNpD Otis Hovey. 


THE INDIANS OF CALIFORNIA. 


HE Department of Anthropology has arranged a new exhibit 
in the series illustrating the chief culture types of North Amer- 
ica. ‘The present exhibit, that of the Indians of California, 

makes the third of the series now in place, the other two, those of the 
Eskimo and the Indians of the Plains, respectively, having been previ- 
ously opened to the public. ‘The new exhibit is to be found in the West 
Hall of North American Types (No. 102 of the Ground Floor). 

While the Indians of California are somewhat uniform in their habits 
and customs, they may nevertheless be divided into three groups: (1) 
Those of central California, characteristic of the type and represented 
in this exhibit by the Maidu. (2) Several tribes in northern California, 
represented in the exhibit by the Yurok. ‘These, while having most of 
the characteristics peculiar to the Indians of California, have also cus- 
toms and habits borrowed from Indian tribes farther north. For 
instance, the Yurok and several other northern tribes lived in rectangular 
houses with gable roofs, a style borrowed from the houses of Oregon and 
Washington. (3) Tribes in the southern part of California, represented 


MT. PELE MARTINIQUE. SUMMIT OF NEW CONE LOOKING S. 60° W 
The camp is on the site of the Lac des Palmistes, about 4,000 feet above tide. The 
remains of Morne Lacroix are seen at the right just above the tent. May, 1908. 


MT. PELE. THE SPINE OR OBELISK IN MARCH, 1903 
From practically the same spot as the picture above. The spine rose 5,304 feet 
above the sea, or 860 feet higher than the top of the present cone. 
41 


CALIBORNIA INDIANS 43° 


in this exhibit by the Mission Indians. These took over many practices 
from the Pueblo and other Indians of the southwestern United States, 
the making of pottery, an art that was unknown among other Cali- 
fornian Indians, being an example of this. 

While the above division can be made, we must understand that 
the distinctions are not absolute; in fact, the inter-relations of the 
three main culture types are shown by the existence of mixed types. 
The Shasta, represented in this exhibit, stand perhaps midway between 
the central and northern Californian types, emphasizing the fact that 
after all no hard and fast classification is possible where tribes occupy 
adjacent geographical areas. 

One of the most characteristic features of Californian Indian life is 
the dependence upon vegetable food, the acorn in particular. Almost 
every people, whatever the degree of culture, has some food article 
which takes the place of bread and which is in reality the “staff of life.” 
In California, a kind of bread is made of acorn meal. The various 
stages of this acorn industry are illustrated by a series of small models 
to show the gathering of the acorn, its grinding, its leaching by means 
of hot water, and its drying. In the northern part of California, where 
salmon are found, fishing is an important industry. A case is being 
fitted up to illustrate the native methods of catching and treating this 
fish. 

From the artistic point of view, one of the most prominent facts 
concerning these Californian Indians is their skill in the manufacture 
of baskets. While basketry is fairly well represented in the present 
exhibit, it has been given special treatment in the hall above this, on the 
second floor of the Museum, where will be found a collection of baskets 
from several parts of California as well as from other regions in North 
America. 


Dr. Henry E. Crampton has been appointed Curator of the Depart- 
ment of Invertebrate Zodlogy in the Museum to fill the place made 
vacant by the resignation of Dr. William Morton Wheeler. Dr. Cramp- 
ton has published extensively and is now making researches in experi- 
mental biology, under a grant provided by the Carnegie Institution. 
He will retain an official connection with Columbia University, where 
he has served as lecturer and tutor, instructor, adjunct professor and 
_ professor. 


44 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


SCHOOL CHILDREN AT THE TUBERCULOSIS EXHIBITION. 


HE two photographs on the opposite page show lines of school 
children entering the north and south entrances of the Museum. 
Between January 4 and 15 (ten school days) the Museum 

received within its doors six thousand children daily. Ushered, a thou- 
sand at a time, into the auditorium, they were given facts concerning 
tuberculosis and personal hygiene preventing it, and directions for study 
of the International Tuberculosis Exhibition. When dismissed from the 
auditorium, giving place to a second set of a thousand, they were guided 
through the exhibition, to watch the light that went out every two minutes 
thirty-six seconds showing how often someone dies of tuberculosis in the 
United States, to see dark, dirty rooms contrasted with light and clean 
ones, to examine many inviting tents for out-of-door living — one very 
amusing to them because it allowed a person to sleep with his body in the 
house and his head out of the window. Then from the exhibition the 
long lines filed into the Bird Group Halls and on to other parts of the 
Museum. There can be no doubt that the suspension of their school 
work and the unusual expedition, combined with the serious force of the 
impression received after reaching the Museum, brought before them 
with unwonted importance not only the social evil, tuberculosis, but 
also many matters of personal cleanliness and home sanitation. 
* * # 

The two weeks’ educative work above referred to illustrates one of 
the large ways in which the Museum serves the people above and 
beyond its more specific work in science. ‘That the Museum is prac- 
ticable for direct use in lesser ways also is continually demonstrated. 
Xecently inquiry came for a most resonant wood to be used in the 
construction of violins. Tests were made in the Forestry Hall, and 
Douglas spruce was chosen after opportunity for examination of five 
hundred North American woods. Later another inquirer sought wood 
absolutely non-resonant for use at the heart of a soundless typewriter. 
His tests in the Forestry Hall resulted in the choice of palmetto for his 
purpose. Another instance concerns Peruvian mummy cloths. Prob- 
ably more than a thousand art students have visited the Museum within 
the past six years to copy patterns of these cloths or to study their color- 
ing. Many of these students have become successful designers, and 


as a result numbers of our modern wall papers, rugs and other house- 


NTRANCES OF 


PUBLIC SCHOOL CHILDREN APPROACHING THE ORTH AND SOUTH E 
THE MUSEUM TO VISIT THE INTERNATIONAL TUBERCULOSIS EXHIBITION 


The average number was 6,000 per day for two weeks. 


45 


NEWS NOTES 47 


furnishing goods show some sign of the color combinations and of the 
fish, bird and cat patterns peculiar to Peruvian mummy cloth. Reports 
of such instances of direct influence on the art and industries of the 
country might be multiplied indefinitely, sometimes the need entailing 
information about precicus corals, or some tree advisable for planting 
in a commercial venture, or sometimes having to do with materials for 
an artist’s sketch of a Sioux maiden, design of grotesque fish or quaint 
and unusual models for pottery and glass. 


MUSEUM NEWS NOTES. 


HE Museum is fortunate in having secured the John William 
Waters collection of ethnological objects from Fiji. The 
collection comprises about 1800 specimens, including house- 

hold utensils and implements of war and the chase, made of stone, 
turtle shell and wood. Mr. Waters lived for forty years on the island, 
and his knowledge of the people and their customs enabled him to bring 
together this remarkable collection, the value of which is enhanced by 
the fact that it represents the life of the Fijians before they had become 
acquainted with iron and its uses. 


THe following members have been elected since the last issue of the 
Journal: Life Members, Messrs. HueH Hit, J. S. MoraGan, Jr., and 
Henry S. Morcan, Misses JANE N. Morean and F. 'T’. Morean and 
Mmnes. J. Prerrponr Morcan, Jr., and Davirs Coxe; Annual Mem- 
bers, Messrs. A. Perry Osporn, A. F. Trorescuer, A. G. VETTER, 
P. S. Trainor, JAcoB OLESHEIMER, WM. EpMoND CuRTIS, JAMES 
W. GreENE, R. J. SCHAEFER, GEORGE E. CHATILLON, E. C. KLIpstTEIN, 
B. G. Meyer, A. C. BEcHSTEIN, WasHINGTON L. CoopER, FREDERICK 
A. Lipsey, CHoarites H. Weicuiz, C. B. Issam, Epwarp H. FiLoyp- 
JONES, JESSE Lantz and ALanson P. LatHrop, Dr. CHARLES K. 
Brippon, GENERAL Horace Porter, Misses Louise D. vAN BEUREN 
and E. Maser Criark and Mrs. JAMEs A. RUMRILL. 


Dr. Frank E. Lurz has been appointed an assistant curator in the 
Museum. Dr. Lutz has been an investigator in the Carnegie Institu- 
tion at Cold Spring Harbor and has published a score or more of 
papers on the general subjects of Inheritance and Variation. 


48 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


Mr. ALEXANDER PETRUNKEVITCH, an authority on American 
spiders, has become officially connected with the Museum in the capacity 
of Honorary Curator of Arachnida. ‘This appointment was made by 
the Board of Trustees in appreciation of the invaluable service which 
Mr. Petrunkevitch has rendered the institution for several years through 
correspondence, exchange and the general enrichment of the collections. 


LECTURE ANNOUNCEMENTS. 


MEMBERS’ COURSE. 


The second course of lectures to members of the Museum and their 
friends will begin February 25 and will be devoted to the Conservation of 
Natural Resources. Details will be announced in a special circular. 


LEGAL HOLIDAY COURSE. 
Washington’s Birthday, February 22, 1909, at 3.15 o'clock P. M. 
No tickets required. 


““Some of the Food and Game Fishes of the Eastern United States.— 
Habits and Methods of Capture.” By Roy W. MINER. 


Fully illustrated with stereopticon views. 


COLUMBIA. UNIVERSITY. COURSE: 
JESUP LECTURES. 


Given in coéperation with Columbia University. 
Wednesday, February 3, at 8:15 o'clock Pp. M. 


The last of a course of ten lectures on light by PRoressor RicHarp C. 
Macriaurin of Columbia University. 


“Some relations between light and electricity.” 
A COURSE IN BIOLOGY. 


Arranged by the Biology Departments of the Normal College and the 
High Schools of Manhattan. Illustrated with stereopticon views. 


LECTURES 49 


Thursday afternoons at 3:30 o'clock. 


January 14.— ‘American Forests and Their Uses.” By GrorGe H. SHEr- 
Woop. 

February 18.— “Our Atlantic Fisheries.’ By Dr. Hermon C. Bumpus. 

March 18.— “Public Health.” By Dr. THomas M. Daruineron. 

April 15.— “‘Natural History of Animals.” By Dr. Henry E. 
CRAMPTON. 


DARWIN MEMORIAL CELEBRATION. 


HELD in coéperation with the New York Academy of Sciences. 
Friday, February 12, 3:30 o’clock Pp. M. 


Addresses will be delivered as follows: 

Presentation to the Museum of a bronze bust of Darwin by CHARLES 
FinNEY Cox, President of the Academy. 

Acceptance on behalf of the Trustees of the Museum by Henry Fatr- 
FIELD Osporn, President of the Museum. 

“Darwin and Geology,” by JoHN JAMES STEVENSON. 

“Darwin and Botany,” by NaTHANIEL Lorp Britton. 

“Darwin and Zoélogy,”’ by Hermon Carey Bumpvs. 


PEOPLE’S COURSE. 


GIVEN in coéperation with the City Department of Education. — Illus- 
trated with stereopticon views. 


Tuesday evenings at 8 o'clock. 


February 2.— Ian C. Hannan, “Japan’s Transformation.” 

February 9.— Ian C. Hannan, “America as an Asiatic Power.” 

February 16.— Mrs. Lucta Ames Meap, “ World Organization.” 

February 23.— Isya JosepuH, Ph.D., ‘“‘ Mohammed and Mohammedanism.”’ 
(Illustrated with costumes.) 


Saturday evenings at 8 o’clock. 


February 6.— H. A. Smitu, “National Forest Policy.” 

February 13.— Overton W. Price, “Conservation of Natural Resources.” 
February 20.— Proressor H. E. Grecory, ‘The Life History of a Lake.” 
February 27.— Cyrus C. Apams, “Earthquakes.” 


Children are admitted to these lectures only on presentation of Museum 
Members’ tickets. 


D0 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


MEETINGS OF SOCIETIES. 


Public meetings of the New York Academy of Sciences and its Affiliated 
Societies are held at the Museum according to the following schedule: 

On Monday evenings, The New York Academy of Sciences: 

First Mondays, Section of Geology and Mineralogy. 

Second Mondays, Section of Biology. 

Third Mondays, Section of Astronomy, Physics and Chemistry. 
Fourth Mondays, Section of Anthropology and Psychology. 

On Tuesday evenings, as announced: 

The Linnzean Society of New York, The New York Entomological 
Society and the Torrey Botanical Club. 
On Wednesday evenings, as announced: 
The New York Mineralogical Club. 
On Friday evenings, as announced: 
The New York Microscopical Society. 

The programmes of the meetings of the respective organizations are 
published in the weekly Bulletin of the New York Academy of Sciences and 
sent to the members of the several societies. Members of the Museum on 
making request of the Director will be provided with the Bulletin as issued. 


The American [luseum Journal 


Epmunp Oris Hovey, Editor. 
FRANK M. CHAPMAN, | ; 
Louis P. GRATACAP, Advisory Board. 
WILLIAM K. GREGORY, ) 


Subscription, One Dollar per year. Fifteen Cents per copy. 
A subscription to the JouRNAL is included in the membership fees of all classes of Members of 
the Museum. 


“Subscriptions should be addressed to The American Museum Journal, 30 Boylston St., Cam- 
bridge, Mass., or 77th St. and Central Park West, New York City. 


Entered as second-class matter January 12, 1907, at the Post-office at Boston, Mass. 
Act of Congress, July 16, 1894, 


= 
ams. ae 
ra! : 
< 


pe se 


ye 


THE MEMORIAL BUST OF CHARLES DARWIN. 


Presented by the New York Academy of Sciences, February 12, 1909. 


52 


The American Museum Journal 


Vou. IX MARCH, 1909 No. 3 


THE DARWIN CELEBRATION. 


HE one hundredth anniversary of the birth of Charles Robert 
Darwin and the fiftieth anniversary of the publication of 
“The Origin of Species” were celebrated by the New York 
Academy of Sciences on February twelfth at the American Museum of 
Natural History. ‘The occasion was made memorable by the unveiling 
of a bronze bust of Darwin, the Academy’s gift to the Museum; also by 
the dedication of the Synoptic Hall of the Museum as ‘The Darwin Hall 
of Invertebrate Zoélogy,” with the unveiling of bronze tablets thus in- 
scribed at either side of the entrance from the Hall of Forestry. The 
bust was presented by the Academy’s president, Charles Finney Cox, 
and was accepted on behalf of the trustees of the Museum by President 
Henry Fairfield Osborn. 

The bust is pronounced by those who knew Darwin personally, and 
by his sons in England, who have seen photographs of the clay model, 
the best portrait in the round of the great naturalist ever made. It is 
the work of William Couper, sculptured from photographs taken when 
Darwin was fifty years old, at the time of the publication of ‘The Origin 
of Species.”” President Osborn’s acceptance of the bust, as a valuable 
work of art and as an expression of appreciation by the New York 
Academy of both the technical and the directly educational work of the 
Museum, gives this impressive likeness of Darwin permanent place in 
the Darwin Hall of Invertebrate Zodlogy. Here it will stand to testify 
to Charles Darwin’s method of scientific study, namely, a humble and 
direct approach to nature, in self-reliance and with independence of 
thinking. ‘The speakers of the afternoon, representing Geology, Botany 
and Zoology, and each claiming Darwin as the inspiration to freedom of 
thought in the given science, were Professors John James Stevenson, 
Nathaniel Lord Britton and Hermon Carey Bumpus. 

But a few years ago, even to consider the question of evolution was 
held to be irrational and immoral, not only by the world at large, but also 
by the intellectual world, with the exception of a small body of scientists. 


53 


o4 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


The change has come since the appearance of ‘*’The Origin of Species” 


in 1859, and outside of the scientific centers at Philadelphia, Boston, 
Washington, New Haven and New York, it has seemed to come slowly; 
but the effect has been cumulative, and to-day thinkers in all lines accept 
the fact of evolution. In the first ten years after 1859, many of the older 
scientists ignored or fought the doctrine bitterly. Even Agassiz remained 


FRONT VIEW OF DARWIN BUST. 


on the side of the creation of each species as we find it. Asa Gray, how- 
ever, who knew Darwin personally and who had published a review of 
“The Origin of Species”? before a copy reached America, stood firmly 
not only for the theory of evolution, but also for that which Darwinism 


signifies, the theory of Natural Selection as the working process of evolu- 


THE DARWIN CELEBRATION a 


~ 


tion. He inspired the younger men in the Boston. scientific center, 
Shaler, Verrill, Packard, Morse, Hyatt, Allen and Scudder, and through 
their influence enthusiasm for Darwinism grew until a climax was 
reached in 1876. Since that date every biological worker in the country 
has found his research an item to strengthen belief in evolution, and 


PROFILE VIEW OF DARWIN BUST. 


also, it is true, often to expose some weakness or mend some flaw in the 
doctrine of Natural Selection. 

Darwin, however, did not consider his work faultiess, final or com- 
plete. In his day the generai theory of evoiution was already well 
established in many scientists’ minds, due to the work of anatomists 
such as Lamarck and Cuvier. Darwin marshalled the facts that the 


56 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


world could then give, to formulate clearly and boldly a possible explana- 
tion of the method by which evolution had produced existing life forms. 
From the geometric increase in numbers due to the normal rate of repro- 
duction of plants and animals, there resulted a struggle for existence, a 
three-fold struggle (1) with the environment, which not only brought 
the animal the ordinary exigencies of life, but also perhaps presented 
suddenly wholly new problems due to some geological change during 
the earth’s history, (2) with members of the same species in search of 
homes and food and (3) with direct enemies. Since all forms vary at 
birth, some were less well fitted for the struggle than others; they died 
for lack of food or were killed by enemies; those better fitted survived. 
Thus the best fitted for life in a given region became the parents of 
the next generation, and, if the environmental conditions remained 
unchanged for many generations, heredity brought about a_ better 
adapted race, a “‘nature selected”’ race, and, what is the important and 
contested point, a new variety or species, that is, a race different from 
the ancestral one. ‘Thus, according to Darwinism, new species come 
about through slow, minute and cumulative changes. One of the 
strongest pieces of work done since Darwin’s time, that of Hugo de 
Vries, proves that species may come into existence abruptly also, by 
large changes or ‘‘ mutations,” de Vries holding that the mutation theory 
supplements Natural Selection but does not supplant it. 

Whether, however, Darwinism lives in the future, or fails under the 
critical scrutiny of the army of working scientists and in the light of a 
vast ageregation of new facts, Darwin’s position of eminence cannot be 
assailed. He stands for supreme service to mankind in that he forced 
into the world of organized knowledge love of truth and abhorrence of 
slavery to tradition. He was a great seer in a scientific world where 
practically all was new ground. He was a “naturalist,” one of the few 
deserving the name, with masterly grasp of all known facts in the various 
branches of natural science. Since his time each of these branches, 
botany, zodlogy, geology, has grown until it seems that no one mind can 
comprehend the details of even one of them. ‘The result is that to-day 
every man is working on his chosen problem, and often the field of that 
problem is extremely limited, though it involves weighty principles. 

Will there come a second Darwin, again to grasp all nature in clear 
mental vision? His task would be the same as was Darwin’s, though 


far more difficult because of the larger body of knowledge,— to accept 


© 
“I 


NEWPHABITAT GROUPS 


and organize all accumuiated information, while at the same time hold- 
ing his own opinions and formulating his own theories. ‘The work of 
the new Darwin would marshall to the front or banish to oblivion the 
many tangied theories of the present, and all so clearly and convincingly 
that there would be forced upon him who reads a repetition of the effect 
of “The Origin of Species,” the conviction that, after ali, the task was 
an easy one, for there couid be no other conclusion. 


An important feature of the celebration is the special exhibition in 
the Haii of Forestry and the new Darwin Hall comprising carefuily 
selected specimens and groups of specimens bearing upon the Darwinian 
theory of Evolution through Natural Selection; also a valuable collec- 
tion of Darwiniana consisting of letters, writings and portraits of Charles 
Darwin, as well as a series of photographs of Darwin’s contemporaries. 
The exhibition is open free to the public and will remain in place till 
March 12. 


NEW HABITAT GROUPS OF NORTH AMERICAN BIRDS. 


HE high degree of realism and artistic effect achieved in the 
installation of the Habitat Groups of North American Birds 
is unique in Museum exhibition. Begun in 1898 with the 

Bird Rock Group of the Gulf of St. Lawrence, and now nearing comple- 
tion, the series has entailed a large amount of travel and study on the 
part of Mr. Frank M. Chapman, Curator of Ornithology, and inval- 
uable assistance on the part of the Museum’s taxidermists and artists. 
Conceive the ingenuity and labor involved in imitating, accurately 
as to locality, flawlessly as to workmanship, the snow or water, rocks 
and vegetation of from sixty to one hundred sixty square feet of a given 
region; then so to blend the real foreground with a painted background 
that, quite as in nature, the eye passes from the flowers and birds near 
at hand, to meadows that stretch to the horizon or to mountains and sky. 
The east side of the Bird Group Hall has been previously opened to 
the pubiic. The west side was opened formally to Members of the 
Museum on February 26 to mark the completion of six new groups, 
a demonstration of the method of construction being given by the 
Cuthbert Rookery Group, only partly finished at that time. On the 
following day the gallery was thrown open to the general public. 


‘Suey qaoquezy Aq spalg “][PJStOH{ Von.AgT kq punoisypvg 
‘JQUSA AVO NO SUIS YVM-~O-NYW ONY S3aIs008 


8¢ 


‘SuBy yaoqioyy Aq spug "]]WIPT sopaeg Aq punoswSyorg 


‘ANO10O9 GYuId ANV1 HLVWVY1y V 6g 


‘sowtonT “y “YT Aq yoyoys B WI0I smsunyy preg Aq punoisyoreg 
HV “LT Aq yore j Sutouny [Te Aq P youd 
09 


‘S3IMOOY NVIGVNVO SHL NI 34lq-aula ANIdTV-SILOYV 


NEW HABITAT GROUPS 61 


To view the scene of the first of these new groups we must make the 
long journey to the Bahamas and there search out Cay Verde. ‘This is 
a small coral islet with no fresh water, and with the dark blue of great 
sea depths sharply separated from the light water of its shallow banks. 
The islet is of peculiar interest since it lies in the line of migration, and 
being the only landing place in a large expanse of water, receives calls 
from many migrating birds. ‘Two species, the Booby and the Man o’ 
War bird, nest there in large numbers in March, the Boobies on the 
ground, the Man o’ War birds in the sea grape and prickly pear cactus 
of the islet. Boobies are particularly tame when on the nests. This is 
due in part to the fact that they have had no opportunity to learn fear of 
man, but in addition it probably results from the strength of their 
parental instinct, which so controls their fear that they do not leave their 
nests when an intruder walks among them and makes intimate acquain- 
tance with family after family. 

The male Man o’ War bird is ornamented with a large throat-pouch 
of vivid red, which, inflated like a toy balloon, makes the bird conspicu- 
ous whatever its environment. This ornamentation, actually disad- 
vantageous in the struggle for existence, furnishes an illustration for 
Darwin’s Sexual Selection theory. ‘To-day, all recognize the matter 
of ornamentation among animals as one of the most difficult of biological 
problems, whether tentatively accounting for it on this theory of the 
female’s choice of the most attractive, or as a direct physiological and 
structural result of the male’s excessive energy, or by yet other theories. 

If we move to the second of the new groups, we are transported 
thousands of miles across the continent and north to the California- 
Oregon boundary line, where the shallow water of Klamath Lake con- 
tains many islands of rushes and is surrounded by treeless hiils with Mt. 
Shasta in the distance. It is a picturesque place, but much of the region 
will be drained by a government reclamation project and converted into 
orchards and fields of alfalfa. ‘The Klamath Lake group shows Cormo- 
rants and Gulls, also Caspian Terns; but interest centers in the White 
Pelicans, immense birds with wing expanse of from eight to nine feet. 
There are interesting studies of flying Pelicans, and in the foreground 
one young bird is illustrating its amusing method of fishing down its 
parent’s throat. One adult shows the bill-knob of the nuptial season. 
It will be a matter of regret if the demands of civilization push this bird 
to extinction. Unlike many birds, to which advance in civilization 


62 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


means merely more food and fewer enemies, the Pelican is too specialized 
for survival; it can adapt itself only to insular life and an abundance of 
fish. It must be saved through the creation of government reservations 
for the purpose. An important step toward the protection of western 
water-fowl was taken by President Roosevelt in August, 1908, when he 
set aside the Lower Klamath Lake and Lake Malheur Reservations. 

The third group carries us to the Canadian Rockies at Ptarmigan 
Lakes. In the foreground are White-tailed Ptarmigans in mixed white 
and brown plumage, for it is the height of the Alpine Spring (July 15) 
and the birds’ white plumage of Winter is giving place to the summer 
coat. A nest of five spotted eggs is set among gray rocks and lichens, 
only a few feet from the border of an unmelted snowfield, yet surrounded 
by the star-like flowers of Dryas, by heather in bloom and by anemones 
two inches across. One Ptarmigan is shown with six downy chicks in 
spirited attitudes. ‘The apparent fragility but real endurance of this 
life is enhanced by what is to be seen on lifting the eyes from the ground, 
a circle of austere snow-covered mountain’ peaks and, far below, the 
ice and blue water of an opening lake. 

The Ptarmigan is a boreal type. It is found as far south as New 
Mexico, but only at high altitudes, the species possibly having survived 
in these Arctic-Alpine regions when left stranded there by the retreating 
ice of the Glacial Period. Ptarmigans not only present one of the most 
striking cases of coloration like the environment of the season, nor only 
an instance of gradation of color from above downward to counteract the 
shadow gradation from below upward and produce the effect of unsub- 
stantiality, but they also have correlated with this color protection, the 
instinct to remain motionless in the face of the enemy. 

The fourth group, showing the Sage Grouse, keeps us in the West, 
descending from Alpine regions to the high sage-brush plains of Wyo- 
ming. ‘The Sage Grouse is the largest of North American game birds 
with the exception of the Wild Turkey. The group illustrates some of 
the remarkable performances of the birds at the mating season. 

The remaining two groups, representing the Western Grebe and 
the Wild Goose, show the rolling treeless plains of Western Canada, 
at Crane Lake, Saskatchewan. ‘The Grebe group illustrates instincts 
such as always prove a lure afield to the bird student. One parent bird 
is swimming in stately fashion, while, peeping from the warm cradle 


between her back and wings, four eager and contented young birds are 


‘Bueyq qwoquoyy Aq spur “][oVIET sopreg Aq punoasyorg 
“ONINOAM NI ASNOYD 3OVS £9 


GREBES (UPPER FIGURE) AND WILD GOOSE (LOWER FIGURE) ON CRANE LAKE 
SASKATCHEWAN 


3ackgrounds by Hobart Nichols. Birds by Herbert Lang. 


RA 


ANNUAL MEETING OF THE TRUSTEES 65 


taking a sail with her; another parent bird is covering her nest of eggs 
preparatory to leaving it; everywhere the birds swim with their long 
necks erect so that the perpendicular lines of black and white resemble 
the surrounding reeds and reflections. ‘The Western Grebe is slaughtered 
mercilessly by plume hunters, the birds’ snow-white breasts appearing 
in market in capes and muffs and on hats. 

The Museum acknowledges its large indebtedness for this series 
of Bird Habitat Groups to the generosity of several of its members, but 
particularly to the following: Mr. John L. Cadwalader and to Mrs. 
Morris K. Jesup, Mrs. Philip Schuyler, Mrs. John B. Trevor, Mrs. 
Robert Winthrop, Mr. F. Augustus Schermerhorn, Mr. H. B. Hollins, 
Mr. Henry Clay Pierce, Mr. Henry W. Poor, Mr. Charles Lanier and 
Mr. Courtenay Brandreth. 


THE ANNUAL MEETING OF THE TRUSTEES. 


T the Annual Meeting of the Board of Trustees of. the Museum, 

A held on Monday, February 8, the following officers were elected 

for the ensuing year: HeNry FarRFIELD Osporn, President; 

J. Prerront MoraGan, First Vice-President; CLEVELAND H. Dopcer, 

Second Vice-President; J. HamppEeN Ross, Secretary, and CHARLES 

Lanter, Treasurer. The following abstract of the president’s annual 
report will be of interest to the Members. 

In point of growth the past year has been the most notable in the 
history of the institution. Partly aided by the Jesup bequest, the total 
expenditures were $275,419, or $25,000 more than the previous year. 
Of this the city contributed $159,930.62 and the Museum $115,488.38. 
In the past eight years the Museum has expended directly $932,008 on 
its explorations and collections. ‘The estimated total value of the col- 
lections secured during this period by exploration, by purchase and by 
gift to the Museum is more than $2,000,000. For every dollar which 
has been expended by the city, more than a dollar has been added to the 
enlargement of the collections. 

The present endowment fund, including the bequest of the late 
President Jesup, is $2,048,156.61. To keep pace with the very rapid 
growth of the city and the demands it is making for public scientific 
education, an endowment fund of $5,000,000 is needed. In every 


66 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


part of the world the advance of agriculture and commerce and the 
spread of fire arms is rendering more scarce the objects of natural history 
of all kinds, including the works of the primitive races of men. It is 
deemed vitally important to push the explorations of the Museum in all 
parts of the world, while it is still possible to secure these fast vanishing 
works of nature and of primitive man. During the year 1908 and at the 
present time the Museum’s explorations extend to the Mackenzie River 
and the shores of Beaufort Sea, to Alaska, Vancouver, Alberta and 
Saskatchewan, the west coast of Hudson Bay and western Labrador; 
in the United States parties have been spread in Wyoming, Montana, 
Idaho, North Dakota, Nebraska, Colorado and Florida, also in Centrai 
America, and in the south to Nicaragua, the West Indies and Bahama 
Islands; in Asia special agents are working in Kashmir, China and 
Corea; among the islands of the Pacific the Museum is working in the 
Philippines, the Solomon Islands, Tahiti, New Zealand, the South Shet- 
land Islands and Kerguelen Island. 

Popular education has been given a stronger impulse than ever 
before. ‘The Museum was open free to the public every day of the year 
and on 179 evenings. ‘The gross attendance last year was 1,043,562, in 
large part due to the exceptional interest in the International Tuber- 
culosis Exhibition. ‘The attendance at public afternoon and evening 
lectures reached a total of 82,718. ‘The number of children visiting the 
Museum in lecture classes was 10,325. The number of children who 
were especially guided through the Tuberculosis Exhibition and who 
listened to lectures on simple means of prevention of this disease was 
41,627. "These children came from all the high schools of Greater New 
York and from many distant towns and cities. In the schools of the 
city 575,801 children were reached by the system of the circulating nature 
study collections. 

During the coming year the principal new exhibitions which will be 
developed are, in particular, the Children’s Museum, the Museum for 
the Blind, the Philippine Exhibition and the Congo Exhibition presented 
by King Leopold of Belgium. ‘The last is the most complete collection 
outside of that which is to be seen in the Congo Museum near Brussels. 
As a result of the Tuberculosis Exhibition immediate steps will be taken 
to make a special exhibition of the life and habits of the smaller organ- 


isms in relation to health and disease. 


STEFANSSON-ANDERSON ARCTIC EXPEDITION 67 


THE STEFANSSON-ANDERSON ARCTIC EXPEDITION. 


ATE in February, a welcome letter was received from Mr. 
Vihljalmi Stefansson, who, together with Dr. R. M. Anderson, 
was sent by the Museum last summer to make ethnological, 

geograpical and biological studies along the arctic coast of North America 
in the vicinity of the mouth of the Mackenzie River. Mr. Stefansson 
writes as follows: 


“Cape HaLkett, ALASKA, Sept. 25th, 1908. 

“On my way east along the coast I have just come upon Capt. William 
Mogg’s vessel, the “‘Olga,” frozen in the ice off shore at Halkett. [Long. 
152° W.] The captain will abandon his ship next Tuesday. * * * * * 
“T have not my diary with me — it is at our camp on shore and I am at 


Capt. Mogg’s ship three miles off shore in the ice — so I cannot give exact 
dates, but we left Point Barrow about August 29th or 30th. We had head 
winds and foggy weather and finally froze in [at] Smith Bay September 6th — 
very bad luck; some years boating is good till October Ist or after. We 
could do nothing but prepare safe caches on shore for our stuff until the ice 
was strong enough for sled travel September 18th, when we started east. 
We soon came to weaker ice, however, and had to delay and go slowly, so 
we are only this far by now, but hope for better traveling. 

“Dr. Anderson I suppose to be safe either at Barter Island or inland 
from there, looking for deer and mountain sheep. I hope we shall be down 
to him in some 10 days from now. All we shall bring, however, is tobacco 
and matches, for we had only four dogs with us, and ‘succeeded in making 
only an indifferent sled out of driftwood. If we fail in hunting and fishing 
to the eastward we shall probably — some of us at least — retreat upon our 
cache in Smith’s Bay and be able to turn a penny trapping while we eat up 
the flour, ete—for it is an excellent fox country, though there are no 
people, because there are no food animals. 

“T expect I shall get to Herschel Island in time to write you by the police 
mail, and you should get the letter about as soon as this one, while I should 
be able to give in it more information as to ourselves. Seeing, however, that 
one of our whaleboats is frozen in so far west, I hope, among other things, 
that we can get together a good collection — perhaps several hundred skulls 
— of bones from the ancient graveyards along the sandspit between Point 
Tangent and Point Barrow. I saw over a hundred (on top the ground) in a 
walk through one of them when we were ashore in a calm coming east. We 
shall also almost certainly be able to do some good digging on the island just 


68 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


east of the Colville Mouth from which I last year got a few specimens for 
the Peabody Museum, * * * * * As to getting to Prince Albert Land 
or Coronation Gulf, I think there is no reasonable doubt of it for next year 
— ‘barring accidents”? and such unparalleled hard luck as everybody has 
had up here this year. 

‘Near Point Tangent a trading schooner passed us going east and I got 
them to take 27 sacks of flour and some other stuff for Dr. Anderson, but 
Capt. Mogg tells me she probably did not get within some 60 miles of Barter 
Island — certainly not farther than Flaxman and probably not so far. That 
will be well enough for us, for the nearer the Colville the better. 

“T met the other day an Eskimo who used to live in the Colville. From 
him I got a map.which should enable me to locate at least three families 
of the Colville group this winter — so the Colville plans are all right, so 
far, except their expensiveness, as previously confessed from Point Barrow. 


RECENT PURCHASES OF FOSSIL VERTEBRATES. 


HE Department of Vertebrate Paleontology has recently pur- 
chased from Mr. Charles H. Sternberg, the well known col- 
lector, a number of important fossils. Chief of these is a unique 

specimen — a “‘mummied” Dinosaur, as President Osborn has aptly called 
it. It is a nearly complete skeleton of the ‘Trachodon or Duck-billed 
Dinosaur, in which not only the bones but also the greater part of the 
skin of the head, body and limbs is preserved intact. As found in a soft 
sandstone stratum near Lance Creek, Wyoming, the skeleton lay on 
its back, the head turned to one side, the fore limbs stretched out, the 
hind limbs doubled up close to the body. Over head, neck and limbs 
lies the thin curtain of skin, shrunk down tight upon the bones and 
sunken in over most of the body cavity below the ribs. 

At first glance, the skin seems to have irregular rows of small spots 
over the surface, the spots being about the size of a half dollar or less. 
On closer examination, each spot is seen to be made up of a number of 
little polygonal plates, like the pieces of a mosaic, with innumerable 
smaller plates filling the interspaces between the spots. ‘There are no 
overlapping scales such as cover most modern reptiles, nor anything like 
the smooth or hairy skin of mammals or the feathered skin of birds. 


The dinosaur skin is sui generis,— completely unlike that of any modern 


RECENT PURCHASES OF FOSSIL VERTEBRATES 69 


animal. <A part of the tail of the same species, now on exhibition in the 
Dinosaur Hall, shows a considerable area of skin, much like that of 
this skeleton, but with larger plates and no distinct pattern of spots. 
Traces of the skin are preserved in several other kinds of extinct reptiles, 
but nothing has been found that compares with this in its perfect 
preservation. 

To all appearances, the animal must have died on some dry, sandy 
spot exposed to the sun, so that the carcass dried and shrank to a natural 
mummy. ‘Then it must have been suddenly buried by a flood of sand 
from a freshet, so rapidly and deeply that the skin had no chance to 
soften and decay, but was preserved and _ petrified with the bones. 
This occurred three million years ago, on a moderate estimate of geologic 
time. We think of the mummies of Egypt, three or four thousand years 
old, as being of respectable antiquity. Still more venerable are the 
mammoths which have been found buried in the frozen tundras of 
Siberia and Alaska, and their outward appearance thus preserved to our 
day. But even the mammoths, tens of thousands of years old though 
they be, are mere creatures of yesterday, modern upstarts, compared 
with the hoary antiquity of this dinosaur mummy. 

It will be a matter of several months’ work to complete the preparation 
of this specimen for public exhibition, but, when finished, it will do more 
than any mere skeleton or pictured restoration to impress upon us the 
reality of the ancient world of the Dinosaurs. 

Two other specimens purchased from Mr. Sternberg are marine 
reptiles from the Kansas chalk beds, a little older than the formation in 
which the Trachodon was found. One is a skeleton of the marine 
turtle Toxochelys, the other a fine skull of the Mosasaurian or swimming 
lizard Clidastes. There are also two specimens of comparatively recent 
geological age, one a fine skull of the extinct long-horned bison, six feet 
from tip to tip of the horns, and a lower jaw of the Imperial Mammoth,— 
both from the Pleistocene of Kansas. ‘lwo huge tortoises from the 
Miocene beds of Kansas and the skull of a smail rodent related to the 
beaver, but of burrowing habit, are likewise included in the collection. 

Mr. Sternberg is a genuine enthusiast in searching for these memorials 
of the former history of the world we live in, and it is a satisfaction no less 
to himself than to the American Museum to see these fine specimens 
placed where they will be seen and appreciated by thousands of visitors 
each year. He has already contributed to our collection some notable 
specimens and many fossils of much scientific interest. M. 


70 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


MUSEUM NEWS NOTES. 


HE following members have been elected since the last issue of 
the Journal: Patron, Mr. W. Kk. VANDERBILT; Life Members, 
Messrs. NorMANn B.-REamM, Joun S. KENNEDY, ALEXANDER 

WALKER and JoHN J. WintiaMs and Mrs. E. A. Suaven; Annual 
Members, Messrs. Firz Roy Carrineron, Epwin Parsons, PERCY 
R. Pyne, 2d, RicHarp Sutro, D. S. Ramsay, F. S. SmrrHers, ALFRED 
G. VANDERBILT, GEORGE HamitTon Deran, Wituiam T. HILues, 
CHARLES E, Seitz, A. H. Wray, ApoLepH RIESENBERG, L. WILLIAM 
Horr, James [. Barr, Wituiam B. HorNBLOWER and CHARLEs FE. 
Parsons, Docrors HERMANN M. Biaes and Epaar S. BARNEY, Hon. 
Hueu J. Granr and Mes. C. C. Aucutncioss, THoMAS KIrKPATRICK, 
HELEN C. Ropsins and J. A. VANDERPOEL. 


THe Museum is preparing a Philippine Exhibit for the United 
States War Department. It is intended to cover the ethnology of the 
Islands and also to give especial attention to Philippine agricultural and 
industrial conditions since 1898, the date of American occupation. ‘The 
exhibit will be set up at the Museum and then forwarded to Seattle, 
where it is to be displayed at the Alaska-Yukon-Pacific Exposition. 


Proressor Aaron L. TREADWELL, of Vassar College, has been 
appointed Honorary Curator of Annulates. 


SCIENTIFIC PUBLICATIONS IN 1908. 


HE scientific publications of the Museum in 1908 comprised Volume 

XXIV and Volume XXV, Part I, of the Butiterin, Volume X, 

Part II, and Volume XIV, Part II, of the Memorrs and Volume I, 

Parts IV, V and VI and Volume II, Part I of the new series of ANTHRO- 
POLOGICAL PAPERS. 

The articles contained in these various publications are technical in 
character, but many of them have general as well as scientific interest, and 
their titles are given in the following list. ‘They indicate in part, the scope 
of the activity of the Museum staff in research in several departments of 
natural science. ‘The articles are published separately and, like the complete 


volume, may be obtained from the librarian except as indicated. 


SCIEN®IFIC PUBLICATIONS 


THE BULLETIN, Votume XXIV. 


(Thirty-three plates and 167 text figures.) 


Art. I.— A List of the Genera and Subgenera of North American Birds, 
with their Types, According to Article 30 of the Interna- 
tional Code of Zoédlogical Nomenclature. By J. A. ALLEN 

Art. II.— Notes and Observations on Carboniferous Fossils and Semi- 
fossil Shells, Brought Home by Members of the Peary Ex- 
pedition of 1905-1906. a R. P. WHITFIELD. (Plates 
CL IV ie j " ; : : 

ie clees des Byala) eee 


Tee (Plate v) . 5 ; ; 2 Z ; : 
Art. I1V.— The Fossil Flora of Florissant, Colorado. By T. D. A. 
CocKERELL. (Plates VI-X.) : j : : 
Art. V.— Pennant’s “Indian Zoélogy.” By J. A. ALLEN A 
Art. VI.— The Ants of Porto Rico and the Virgin Islands. By W1Luiam 
Morton WHEELER. (Plates XI—XII.) 
Art. VII.— The Ants of Jamaica. By Witt1am Morton WHEELER 
Art. VIII.— Ants from Moorea, Society Islands. By W1iu1am Morton 
WHEELER : : : i : F : 
Art. IX.— Ants from the Azores. By Witu1am Morton WHEELER 
Art. X.— Notes upon the External and Internal Anatomy of Balena 
glacialis Bonn. By Roy C. ANpREws. (Six text figures.) 
Art. XI.— A Four-horned Pelycosaurian from the Permian of Texas. 
By W. D. Marruew. (One text figure.) 
Art. XII.— The Ankylosauride, a New Family of Armored ‘Teaweawns 
from the Uppper Cretaceous. By Barnum Brown. 
(Twenty text figures.) : 
Arr. XIII.— Description of a New Species of Menvelaton on Gantechans 
Province, New Zealand. By Roy C. ANDREws. as 
XIII, and five text figures.) : 
Art. XIV.— Notes on Two Porpoises Captured on a ova into Ae 
Pacific Ocean. By JoHN TREADWELL NicuHous. (Plate 
XIV, and three text figures.) : ; : 
Art. XV.— A Revision of the American Eocene Horses. By WALTER 
GRANGER. (Plates XV—XVIII, and five text figures.) 
Art. XVI.— New Fossil Mammals from the Fayim Oligocene, Egypt. 
By Henry FairFreLp Osporn. (Six text figures.) . 
Art. X VII.— Two Fossil Phoride from the Miocene Shales of Florissant, 
Colorado. By CHartEes T. Bruges. (Two text figures.) 
Art. XVIII.— The North Atlantic Right Whale and its near Allies. By 
J. A. ALLEN. (Plates XIX—XXIV, and one text figure.) 
Art. XIX.— A Review of the Manakins of the Genus Chiroxiphia. By 
W. DeWirr Mitter. (Plate X XV, colored.) 
Art. XX. Honey Ants, with a Revision of the American Myrmecocystt. 
By Wiuuram Morron WHEELER. gta text 
figures. ) . : : 
Art. XXI.— The Ants of nieces: New Mewes and i izona. By WILLIAM 
Morton WHEELER. (Plates XX VI-XXVII.) . 


PAGE 


187 


345 


399 


72 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


Art. XXII.— The Peary Caribou (Rangifer pearyt Allen). By J. A. ALLEN. 
(Twelve text figures.) : ; : : 
Arr. XXIII.— Notes on Solenodon paradoxus Brande: By J. A. ALLEN. 
(Plates XX VITI-X XXIII, and nine text figures.) 
Art. XXIV.— A Fossil Larrid Wasp. By 8. A. RoHwER : 
Arr. XX V.— On the Tenthredinoidea of the Florissant Shales. ae S. A. 
RouweEr. (One text figure.) : : : 
Art. XX VI.— ee on the Skull of Lysorophus ienninaine Cope. By E. 
. Case. (Four text figures.) 
ART XOXCVy I oho of Blastomeryx and Elvigseny at the Arana 
Cervide. By W. D. Marruew. (Fifteen text figures.) 
Art. XXVIII.— Myriopoda from Porto Rico and Culebra. By Frurepo SIL- 
vestri. (Eleven text figures.) : : : : : 
ArT. XXIX.— Mammalogical Notes. I-VI. By J. A. Auuen. (Four 
text figures.) : 
Art. XXX.— The Tertiary Menthredtnoides of the Epon ‘or 1908 é 
Florissant, Colo. By S. A. Ronwer. (One text figure.) 
Arr. XX XIJ.— A Fossil Mellinid Wasp. By S. A. RoHWER 
Art. XX XII.— New or Little Known Titanotheres from the Hocene and 
Oligocene. By Henry FarrrieLp Osporn.  (Twenty- 
one text figures.) 
Arr. XX XIII.— The Ants of Casco Bay, mith Observations on - Oo eee of 
Formica sanguinea Latreille. By Witu1am Morron 
WHEELER : : : ; : 3 
Art. XX XIV.— Mammals from Nicaragua. By J. A. ALLEN. (Twelve text 
figures. ) 


THE BULLETIN, Votume XXV. 


599 


619 


647 


Catalogue of the Type and Figured Specimens of Fossil Vertebrates in the 
£ 5 £ } 


American Museum of Natural History. 


Part I.— Fishes. By L. Hussaxor. (Plates I-VI, and 49 text figures.) 1-103 


ANTHROPOLOGICAL PAPERS, Vouume I. 


Part IV.— Ethnology of the Gros Ventre. By A. L. Krorser. (Plates 

VITI-XIII, and 44 text figures.) . : : : 

Part V.— The Hard Palate in Normal and Feeble-minded Gairdeale 

By WaLrer CHANNING and CLARK WisstER. (Plates XITV— 

XXII, 8 text figures and 19 tables) : , : : 

Part VI.— Iroquois Silverwork. By M. R. Harrineron. (Plates 
XXITI-XXIX, and 2 text figures.) 


ANTHROPOLOGICAL PAPERS, Vouume II. 


Parr I.— Mythology of the Blackfoot Indians. By CLARK WissLER and 


141 


D. C. Duvauu : 4 . : 2 ; : : é 1-164 


LECTURES 73 


MEMOIRS, VoutumeE X. 


Part IJ.— Material Culture and Social Organization of the Koryak. By 
W. JocHEetson. (Plates xiv—xl, and 194 text figures.) . 383-811 


MEMOIRS, VotumeE XIV. 


P art JJ.— Haida Texts. By JoHN R. Swanton . F : : . 271-802 


LECTURE ANNOUNCEMENTS. 


MEMBER’S COURSE. 


THurRspAyY evenings at 8:15 o’clock. Doors open at 7: 45 P. M. 

The second course of illustrated lectures for the season 1908-1909 to 
Members of the Museum and persons holding complimentary tickets given 
them by Members will be given in March and April according to the follow- 


ing programme: 


March 4.— “Birds in Their Relation to Man.” By Mr. Frank M. CHap- 
MAN, Curator of Ornithology in the American Museum of 

Natural History. 
What the Bird does for the State. The bird and the forester; the bird and the 


fruit-grower; the bird and the farmer; the bird and the citizen; the bird and the 
nature-lover. 

What the State does for the Bird. Bird destruction for pleasure and for profit; 
influence of increasing population on bird-life. 

What the State should do for the Bird. Bird conservation by law and by creat- 
ing favorable environmental conditions. 


March 11.— ‘‘The Conservation of Our Rivers and Lakes.” By Mr. 
CuHar.es H. Townsenp, Director of the New York Aqua- 
rium. 


Mr. Townsend will speak on the importance of our fresh waters for fisheries, 
town water supply, water power, irrigation, navigation and recreation; the dangers 
which threaten them on account of pollution and deforestation; the remedies which 
may be applied through sewage disposal, fish culture, impounding of waters, protec- 
tion of the watersheds and the development of navigable waterways. 


March 18.— ‘‘The Conservation of Natural Scenery in America.” By 
Mr. J. Horack McFartanp, President of the American 
Civie Association for a Better and More Beautiful America. 


The address will deal with the value of natural scenery in its effect on the human 
mind, and with the danger of inconsiderately destroying natural beauty in that 


74 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


change of scenery which comes about from exploitation of our American resources. 
Mr. MeFarland will speak of the Grand Canyon of Arizona, of the Yosemite National 
Park, of the Falls of Niagara, of the Panama Canal, and of other development and 
conservation in which we have paid no attention to the beauty of our natural scenery. 


March 25.— ‘‘Conservation from the Palisades to the Adirondacks.” By 
Mr. Epwarp HaGamMan Hatt, Secretary of the American 
Scenic and Historic Preservation Society. 

According to the old style of reckoning, March 25, 1909, will be the 300th Anni- 
versary of the departure of Henry Hudson from Amsterdam on the voyage which 
brought him to the Hudson River. This fact gives especial propriety to the subject 
of conservation of the natural resources and landscape beauties of the famous river 
which rises in the Adirondacks and flows past the Palisades to the sea. 


April 1— ‘The Passing of Our Great Wild Animals and Means taken to 
Restore Them.” By Dr. WititAm 'T. Hornapay, Director 
of the New York Zoological Park. 

Dr. Hornaday is in touch with the majority of the game regions of the world, and 
for thirty years has carefully watched the decrease of wild life. He will point out 
that everywhere the larger mammals are being killed much more rapidly than they 
breed, and that to-day the only hope for the preservation of many important species 
is absolute protection in game preserves. A few illustrations will be shown of an 
ideal game preserve very recently created in British Columbia for the sheep, goat, elk, 
mule-deer and grizzly bear. 


PUPILS’ COURSE. 


Tnese illustrated lectures are open to the pupils of the pubhe schools 
when accompanied by their teachers and to the children of Members of the 
Museum on the presentation of Membership tickets. 

Lectures begin at 4 P. M. 
Mch,. Mch. 


Monday, 8 29.—‘‘New York City in Colonial Days.” By R. W. 
MINER. 
Wednesday, 10 31— “Japan and Her People.” By Louis Hussakor. 
Apr. 
Friday, 12 16— “The Panama Canal.” By E. O. Hovey. 


Monday, 15 19.—‘“‘Famous Rivers of the World.” By WatLrEerR 
GRANGER. 
Wednesday, 17 21.— ‘Natural Wonders of Our Country.” By R. W. 


MINER. 

Friday, 19 23.— ‘‘American Forests and their Uses.” By G. H. 
SHERWOOD. 

Monday, 22 26.— ‘Mediterranean Countries, Ancient and Modern.”’ 


“By WALTER GRANGER. 


MEETINGS OF SOCIETIES 79 


Wednesday, 24 28—‘“‘The American Indian of To-day.” By H. I. 


SMITH. 
Friday, 26 30— “Travels in the Western States.” By Barnum 
Brown. 


LECTURES ON BIOLOGY. 


ARRANGED by the Biology Departments of the Normal College and the 
High Schools of Manhattan. Illustrated with stereopticon views. 
Thursday afternoons at 3:30 o'clock. 
Two lectures remain to be given. 
March 18.— “Public Health.’ By Dr. THomas M. Darurineton. 
April 15.— ‘‘ Natural History of Animals.” By Dr. Henry E. Crampton. 


PEOPLE’S COURSE. 


GIVEN in coéperation with the City Department of Education. 

Tuesday evenings at 8 o’clock. Doors open at 7:30. 

Three lectures by PRoressor A. D. F. Hamuin of Columbia University 
on “The Architecture of Great Cities.” Illustrated with stereopticon views. 
Mareh 2.— “Rome.” 

March 9.— “Constantinople.” 

March 16.— “Venice.” 

March 23.— ‘History of Architecture as seen in New York Buildings.” 
By Mr. JoserpH M. TILpEN. 

Three lectures by Proressor A. D. F. Hamiin on “The Architecture 

of Great Cities.” Illustrated with stereopticon views. 

March 30.— “Paris.” 

April 6— “London.” 

April 13— ‘New York.” 

April 20.— “Florence.” By Mr. Francis M. StricKLanp. 
April 27.— “Berlin.” By Mr. Henry Zick. 

Saturday evenings at 8 o’clock. Doors open at 7:30. 

March 6, 13, 20 and 27.—A course of four lectures by Mr. O. F. Lewis 
on “ Modern Methods of Charitable Help.” 

April 3.— “Child Labor.” By Mr. Owen Lovesoy. 

April 10.— “The Children’s Court.” By Mr. E. Kk. Couttrer. 

April 17.—Subject and lecturer to be announced. 

April 24.— “The City Beautiful.” By Mr. A. A. StouGHTon. 


Children are not admitted to the lectures of the People’s Course, except 
on presentation of a Museum Member’s Card. 


76 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


MEETINGS OF SOCIETIES. 


Public meetings of the New York Academy of Sciences and its Affiliated 
Societies are held at the Museum according to the following schedule: 


On Monday evenings, The New York Academy of Sciences: 
First Mondays, Section of Geology and Mineralogy. 
Second Mondays, Section of Biology. 
Third Mondays, Section of Astronomy, Physics and Chemistry. 
Fourth Mondays, Section of Anthropology and Psychology. 


On Tuesday evenings, as announced: 
The Linnean Society of New York, The New York Entomological 
Society and the Torrey Botanical Club. 


On Wednesday evenings, as announced: 
The New York Mineralogical Club. 


On Friday evenings, as announced: 
The New York Microscopical Society. 


The programmes of the meetings of the respective organizations are 
published in the weekly Bulletin of the New York Academy of Sciences and 
sent to the members of the several societies. Members of the Museum on 
making request of the Director will be provided with the Bulletin as issued. 


The American [Museum Journal 


Epmunp Otis Hovey, £ditor. 
FRANK M. CHAPMAN, 
Louis P. GRATACAP, Advisory Board. 
WILLIAM K. GREGORY, 


Subscription, One Dollar per year. Fifteen Cents per copy. 
A subscription to the JourNAt is included in the membership fees of all classes of Members of 
the Museum. 
Subscriptions should be addressed to The American Museum Journal, 30 Boylston St., Cam- 
bridge, Mass., or 77th St. and Central Park West, New York City. 


Entered as second-class matter January 12, 1907, at the Post-office at Boston, Mass. 
Act of Congress, July 16, 1894. 


No. 
No. 


MUSEUM LEAFLETS v7 


Guide Leaflets published by the 
AMERICAN MUSEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY. 
For Sale at the Museum. 


(Issued as supplements to The American Museum Journal.) 


1— THE BIRD ROCK GROUP. By F. M. Cuapman, Associate Curator 
of Mammalogy and Ornithology. October, 1901. 10 cents. 

2.— THE SAGINAW VALLEY COLLECTION. By H. I. Samiru, Assistant 
Curator of Archeology. December, 1901. 10 cents. 

3.— THE HALL OF FOSSIL VERTEBRATES. By W. D. Marruew, 
Ph. D., Assistant Curator of Vertebrate Paleontology. January, 1902. 
Out of print. 

4— THE COLLECTION OF MINERALS. By Louis P. Graracap, A. M., 
Curator of Mineralogy. February, 1902. Revised edition, May, 1904. 
Price, 10 cents. 

5.— NORTH AMERICAN RUMINANTS. By J.A.ALuEeN, Ph.D. Curator 
of Mammalogy and Ornithology. March, 1902. Revised edition, 
February, 1904. Price, 10 cents. 

6.— THE ANCIENT BASKET MAKERS OF SOUTHEASTERN UTAH. 
By Grorce H. Pepper, Assistant in Anthropology. April, 1902. 
Price, 10 cents. 

7.— THE BUTTERFLIES OF THE VICINITY OF NEW YORK CITY. 
By Witu1AM BrevuTENMULLER, Curator of Entomology. May, 1902. 
Price, 15 cents. 

8.— THE SEQUOIA. A Historical Review of Biological Science. By 
GrorGE H. SHERWooD, A. M., Assistant Curator. November, 1902. 
Price, 10 cents. 

9.— THE EVOLUTION OF THE HORSE. By W. D. Marruew, Ph. D., 
Associate Curator of Vertebrate Paleontology. January, 1903. Sec- 
ond edition, May, 1905. Price, 10 cents. 


. 10.— THE HAWK-MOTHS OF THE VICINITY OF NEW YORK CITY. 


By Witu1am BrvuTenMUtLeR, Curator of Entomology. February, 
1903. Price, 10 cents. 


: 11. — THE MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS OF THE INCAS. By C. W. Mean, 


Assistant in Archeology. July, 1903. Price, 10 cents. 


. 12— THE COLLECTION OF FOSSIL VERTEBRATES. By W. D. Mar 


THEW, Ph. D., Associate Curator of Vertebrate Paleontology. Octo- 
ber, 1903. Price, 10 cents. 


. 13.— A GENERAL GUIDE TO THE AMERICAN MUSEUM OF NATURAL 


HISTORY. January, 1904. Out of print. 


. 14— BIRDS’ NESTS AND EGGS. By Frank M. CHapman. Associate 


Curator of Mammalogy and Ornithology. April, 1904. Reprinted, 
February, 1905. Price, 10 cents. 

15.— PRIMITIVE ART. July, 1904. “Price, 15 cents. 

16.— THE INSECT-GALLS OF THE VICINITY OF NEW YORK CITY. 
By W1111aAM BEeuTENMOLLER, Curator of Entomology. October, 1904. 
Price, 15 cents. 


“I 
wm 


AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


(Reprinted from The American Museum Journal.) 


. 17— THE ‘FOSSIL CARNIVORES, MARSUPIALS AND SMALL MAM- 


MALS IN THE AMERICAN MUSEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY. 
By W. D. Marruew, Ph. D., Associate Curator of Vertebrate Palzon- 
tology. January, 1905. Price, 15 cents. 


. 18—THE MOUNTED SKELETON OF BRONTOSAURUS. By W. D. 


Matruew, Ph. D., Associate Curator of Vertebrate Paleontology. 
April, 1905. Out of print. 


. 19— THE REPTILES OF THE VICINITY OF NEW YORK CITY. By 


Raymonp L, Dirmars, Curator of Reptiles, New York Zodlogical Park. 
July, 1905. Price, 15 cents. 


. 20— THE BATRACHIANS OF THE VICINITY OF NEW YORK CITY. 


By Raymonp L. Dirmars, Curator of Reptiles, New York Zodlogical 
Park. October, 1905. Price, 15 cents. 


. 21—THE DEVELOPMENT OF A MOLLUSK. By B. E. Dauteren, 


D.M.D. January, 1906. Price, 10 cents. 


_ 22. THE BIRDS OF THE VICINITY OF NEW YORK CITY. By Franx 


M. Cuapman, Associate Curator of Mammalogy and Ornithology. 
April-July, 1906. Priee, 15 cents. 


. 23.— THE SPONGE ALCOVE. By Roy W. Mrner, Assistant Curator of 


Invertebrate Zodlogy. October, 1906. Price, 10 cents. 


(Published as a separate series.) 


. 24.— PERUVIAN MUMMIES. By CuHarues W. Mean, Department of Eth- 


nology. March, 1907. Price, 10 cents. 


. 25— PIONEERS OF AMERICAN SCIENCE. Memorials of the naturalists 


whose busts are in the Foyer of the Museum. April, 1907. Price, 15 
cents, 


. 26— THE METEORITES IN THE FOYER OF THE AMERICAN MUSEUM 


OF NATURAL HISTORY. By Epmunp Oris Hovey, Ph.D., 
Associate Curator of Geology. December, 1907. Price 10 cents. 


. 27— THE MALARIA MOSQUITO. By B. E. Dantcren, D.M.D.  Assis- 


tant Curator of Invertebrate Zodlogy. April, 1908. Price, 15 cents. 


. 283.— THE HABITAT GROUPS OF NORTH AMERICAN BIRDS. By 


Frank M. CuapMan, Curator of Ornithology. February, 1909. Price, 
15 cents. 


ANDAMAN ISLANDER SHOOTING FISH 


80 


The American Museum Journal 


Vou. IX APRIL, 1909 No. 4 


A COLLECTION FROM THE ANDAMAN ISLANDS. 


HE Museum has lately acquired a considerable ethnological 

collection from the Andaman Islands which is of more than 

common interest. ‘These islands, which until a comparatively 
recent date were almost a terra incognita, are still practically unknown to 
the general reader for the reason that the greater part of the literature 
that has appeared concerning them has been in the form of papers pub- 
lished by scientific societies, and has not been easily accessible to the 
public. For this reason a few words about the islands and their inhabi- 
tants may not be out of place before entering on a description of the 
more notable objects in the collection. 

The Andamans form a narrow chain of islands, nowhere exceed- 
ing twenty miles in width, extending nearly north and south in the 
Bay of Bengal. ‘The three main islands of the group, North, Middle and 
South Andaman, together with some small islands, are known as Great 
Andaman. ‘To the south of these lies Little Andaman. ‘The British 
established a penal settlement on South Andaman in 1789, but three 
years later removed it to North Andaman. In February, 1796, this 
colony was abanduned and the prisoners removed to Penang, while the 
free settlers and the troops were conveyed back to Bengal. From this 
date the Andamans remained unoccupied by aliens for sixty-two years. 
The British again formed a penal settlement on South Andaman in 1858, 
which has since been maintained for East Indian criminals. 

The Andamanese belong to the Negrito race. ‘They are small but 
well formed people with short frizzled hair, and with skin ranging in 
color from dark copper to sooty black. ‘The following table, prepared 
by Mr. E. H. Man, gives a clearer idea of the stature and weight of 
these people than could be gained by any lengthy description. 

Maximum height of males measured, 5 ft., 44 in. 


ce iz9 ce females ce 4 “ce 114 ce 
Minimum ‘“ “ males oi Se ae 
re! Sigens® i *% females - Aa 4 


81 


82 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


Mr. Man’s results give as the average height of the men 4 feet, 10} 
inches, and of the women 4 feet, 74 inches, while their average weight 
is 98} pounds and 934 pounds, respectively. 

It would probably be impossible, as Mr. C. Boden Kloss remarks, 
to find a people of purer descent, because ever since they peopled the 
islands in the Stone Age they have remained secluded from the outer 
world. ‘To this isolation, furthermore, is due the uniformity so marked 
in their physical and mental characteristics. 

Many were the fabulous stories told of these islanders in early times. 
Ptolemy is supposed to have referred to the Andamanese when he de- 
scribes a people as ‘‘anthropophagi whose heads grew beneath their 
shoulders.”’ It was also said that they had tails like horses. As re- 
gards the charge of cannibalism, not a particle of evidence has been 
discovered of such a practice among the Andamanese, even in remote 
times. "The belief that their heads grew from below their shoulders 
and that they had tails like horses, may be traced to their custom of 
wearing the skulls of departed relatives suspended by a strap about the 
neck, and a tail-like bunch of pandanus leaves attached to their belts 
behind. 

Clothes, as we understand the word, were unknown among the early 
Andamanese. Circlets about the neck, arms and legs and a waist- 
band with a pendant bunch of leaves, shells, beads or other objects 
were generally worn, but even these were dispensed with in some lo- 
calities. Some time after the establishment of the penal settlement at 
Port Blair, the aborigines in the vicinity were required, by law, to wear 
a sort of frock, but the idea in the minds of the islanders, concerning 
the purpose of this regulation is well illustrated by an amusing incident 
related by Dr. G. E. Dobson, who visited the Andamans in 1872 for 
the purpose of collecting zodlogical specimens. He says, “We were re- 
ceived by the wife of the chief, who had hastily donned the frock pro- 
vided by the Government to receive visitors in, but very soon afterwards 
perceiving that no ladies were in our boat, she got rid of that unneces- 
sary encumbrance, and presented herself in nature’s garb, adorned by a 
single leaf, a garter tied below one knee, and a necklace composed of 
the finger and toe-bones of her ancestors.” ‘Tattooing is very gen- 
erally practiced throughout the islands. ‘The instrument formerly in 
use for incising the designs was a flake of quartz, but since the advent 
of the whites, a piece of glass has become the favorite tool. 


+ 


Foss 


- 


AN ANDAMANESE MARRIAGE CEREMONY. 


83 


‘Qv3d0 A3HL Y¥O4 1LO3SdS3u 


> 


) 


SN3YOL SV NYOM SANO8 GNV STINXS G3aevd3aud 


ANDAMANESE ORNAMENTS AND IMPLEMENTS. 


8 


5 


senneg eee 


BASKETS, MATS AND HOUSEHOLD IMPLEMENTS. 


86 


COLLECTION FROM THE ANDAMAN ISLANDS 87 


Since the establishment of the penal settlement at Port Blair, on 
South Andaman, the race, as is shown by government statistics, has 
been rapidly approaching extinction. 


Description of Illustrations and Specimens. 


The illustration on page 80 shows a man shooting fish, a pursuit in 
which the natives are very expert. As he stands in the edge of the water 
with drawn bow, every line of his supple body is full of grace. Note the 
peculiar shape of the bow in his hand, which is generally made of a kind 
of wood known in the islands as “Chai” (Alphonsea ventricosa). The 
arrows used for shooting fish are made of a reed-like variety of bamboo 
(Bambusa nana) and have a very short foreshaft of wood, to which is bound 
an iron point and one or more barbs of iron. 

In the upper figure on page 83 are illustrated the customs in vogue 
at meeting and parting. Unlike most peoples, the Andamanese testify their 
joy at meeting by excessive weeping. When relatives meet after an ab- 
sence of a few weeks, they sit together with their arms around each other’s 
necks and indulge in loud wailings until nearly exhausted. At parting, 
the guest takes the hand of his host and blows on it. The compliment 
being returned, the guest takes his leave, shouting out invitations and prom- 
ises of future meetings until out of earshot. 

The marriage ceremony is shown in the lower figure of page 83. This 
consists in the chief of the tribe leading the bashful groom up to the equally 
bashful bride, and seating him in her lap, the prospective wife being in 
the meantime held in position by the women of the tribe. The chief 
then gives the young couple some advice as to their future conduct, and 
the ceremony is ended. 

The illustration on page 84 shows objects connected with some of the 
most curious customs of the Andamanese. Figs. 1 and 5 show prepared 
human skulls, already referred to, which are worn as a token of respect 
for lost members of the family. These are carefully cleaned and painted; 
after which pendants with shells or fringe are attached, and a strap is put 
on by which they are suspended around the neck of the wearer. ‘There 
is no obligation to wear this sign of mourning for any great length of time, 
and it is passed from one to another of the relatives. Figs. 2 and 4 are 
human jaws which are prepared and worn in the same way and for the 
same purpose as the skulls just described. Fig. 3 shows a band of hu- 
man bones with pendant fringe and shells. This is a fetish, and is worn 
by friends of a sick person, as a cure. When a person is suffering pain, the 
fetish is frequently placed over the affected part. 


88 AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


Several objects, mostly ornaments, are grouped in the illustration form- 
ing page 85. Fig. 1 is a palm leaf, used as a sleeping mat, and as a pro- 
tection from sun and rain. Figs. 2 and 3 are waist-bands. Fig. 4 is a 
fringe of cane leaves, attached to a stick. This is suspended from trees 
where death has occurred. Fig. 5 is a sling for carrying infants. Figs. 6, 
7, 8, 9 and 12 represent bands with bones, shells and fringes, worn around 
the neck or arms by both sexes. Fig. 10 is a waist-belt made of the leaves 
of the young screw pine (Pandanus andamanensium), the bunch of leaves 
being worn behind. ‘This is the ornament that is supposed to have given 
rise, in former times, to the idea that the natives had tails like horses. Fig. 
11 is a waist-belt of shells (Dentaliwm octagonum). Fig. 13 is a torch of 
resin, wrapped in palm leaves, used when fishing, traveling or dancing by 
night. Fig. 14 represents a sounding board or drum. It is supported at 
an angle by a stick driven into the ground, as shown on page 89, and is 
sounded by striking with the foot or a spear. 

On page 86 a group of household articles is depicted, such as bamboo 
buckets, baskets, mats, tongs and other things. Many of the native baskets 
are beautifully ornamented by weaving into them strands of an orchid root 
(Dendrobium sp.). The root is split lengthwise, and the inner substance is 
scraped away with a Cyrena shell. The skin is then cleaned and dried, 
when it turns brilliant metallic yellow in color. 

The upper figure on page 89 shows the manner of capturing a turtle. 
The spear used has a bamboo shaft 18 feet or more in length, and a long 
stout line, to which is attached a barbed iron point. (See Fig. 2 on page 
90). This point fits loosely into the end of the shaft. When the point 
enters the turtle, the shaft separates from it and floats upon the water. ‘The 
man grasps the spear with both hands about midway of its length and 
springs with it into the water, thus adding the force of his weight to that 
of the blow. 

The Andamanese dance is illustrated in the lower figure on page 89. 
The dance is usually accompanied by a song and chorus, the composer 
acting as leader, and beating the sounding board or drum. Another view 
of the drum is given in Fig. 14 on page 85. All join in the chorus, the 
women marking the rhythm by clapping the hands or striking their crossed 
legs. 

Some of the implements used in hunting and fishing are shown on page 
90. The use of most of them is self-evident, but a few require special 
mention. Fig. 2 is a turtle spear like that shown in use on page 89. The 
arrows used in shooting the wild pig (Figs. 3 and 3a) are worthy of notice. 
The iron point, with its barb, fits loosely into the hollow end of the shaft, 
to which it is attached by a cord about eight inches in length. When the 


SPEARING A TURTLE 
AN ANDAMANESE DANCE. 
bal 


IMPLEMENTS OF WAR AND THE CHASE 


90 


OLDEST LAND REPTILES OF NORTH AMERICA 9] 

: 

pig is struck the arrow-head is pulled out, and the shaft, trailing along on 

| the ground quickly becomes entangled in the brush, making the capture of 

| the animal easy. ‘The sticks (Figs. 9 and 9a) with the crook on one end 
are used for capturing crabs among the rocks. Fig. 11 is a wooden fish 
spear. It only remains to notice the two very curious sigmoid bows shown 


id 
. et oe ee | ae 
) in Figs. 7 and 8. he former is used by the tribes of North Andaman; 
| the latter by those of South and Middle Andaman. 

| 


CHARLES W. MEap. 


te 


4 
3 
4 
ae 
ae 


FIG. |. SPINE-BACKED LIZARD DIMETRODON 


From the Permian of Texas. Skeleton discovered by Dr. E. C. Case in 1906. 


THE OLDEST LAND REPTILES OF NORTH AMERICA. 


IGHTEEN years ago, in 1891, the American Museum began 
to gather together its collections of the extinct quadrupeds of 
the Age of Mammals, the ancestors and predecessors of the living 

quadrupeds. Six years later, the scope of the work was enlarged so as 
to include the animals of the Age of Reptiles, which preceded the Age 


92 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


of Mammals, more especially the Dinosaurs, those gigantic, long-legged 
land reptiles, as strange to our eyes as though from another planet. 
Finally, within the last few years, the Museum has begun the representa- 
tion of the vertebrate life of the Age of Amphibians, which preceded the 
Age of Reptiles and includes the Carboniferous and Permian Periods of 
geology. With this era we pass into a world as remote from the world 
of the Dinosaurs as that is from our own. Its dominant land animals 
were amphibians, remotely related to the modern salamanders, and 
peculiar types of primitive reptiles wholly different from the reptiles of 
the Dinosaur era and from any living kinds. Less gigantic than the 
Dinosaurs or the great quadrupeds of the Age of Mammals, they are 


FIG. 2. ARMORED AMPHIBIAN ERYOPS. SKULL AND JAWS. 


Cope Permian Collection, presented by Morris K. Jesup. 


often most grotesque and peculiar. ‘They are the first of land vertebrates, 
and in their clumsy and awkward proportions and construction, they 
impress one at every point with their imperfect adaptation to terrestrial 
life. ‘The great vertebrate phylum was then but beginning to adapt 
itself to the more active life of the land, with its opportunities for evolu- 
tion into higher types and more varied and complex modes of life than 
were afforded by an aquatic habitat. Probably most of these primitive 
land vertebrates were more or less amphibious; some we know were so. 
But with the assumption of a terrestrial environment came the opportun- 
ity for a more active life and continually higher development, as we see 


it in the successive geological periods down to the present time. 


OLDEST LAND REPTILES OF NORTH AMERICA 93 


The purpose of this notice is to call attention to what has been and 
is being done by the American Museum towards exhibiting this ancient 
and wonderful Permian fauna which flourished during the later part of 
the Age of Amphibians. ‘he first step was taken some years ago, in 
the purchase, through the generosity of the late President Morris Kk. 
Jesup, of the Cope Collection of Fossil Reptiles, which included the 
largest and finest series of Permian fossil vertebrates in the world. ‘The 
specimens are chiefly from 
Northern ‘Texas, the only re- 
gion in which these rare fossils 
have been found in any consid- 
erable number. Professor Cope 
early realized the importance of 
the finds first made there in 
1878, and had employed col- 
lectors there for many years. 
Owing to the difficulty and ex- 
pense of preparation, the speci- 
mens had been very little 
worked up for scientific study 
and still less for exhibition. 

In addition to presenting 
the collection to the Museum, 
Mr. Jesup provided a special 
preparation fund which has 


made it possible to keep two 
skilled preparators at work on 
this and other parts of the Cope FIG. 3. ARMORED AMPHIBIAN DIPLOCAULUS. 
collection for several years past. Cope Permian Collection, presented by 
As a result of their labors, the Morris K. Jesup. 

principal specimens of the 

Cope Permian Collection have been extracted from the flinty concre- 
tionary matrix in which they occur, and a considerable number have 
already been placed on exhibition in the southeast corner of the 
Dinosaur Hall. ‘The series includes a more or less composite skeleton of 
the Naosaurus or Ship-lizard (a photograph of which has appeared in 
a previous number of the JouRNAL), parts of the skeletons and skulls 
of other Spine-backed Lizards, a large number of skulls and two skeletons 


94 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


of the Armored Amphibians, Eryops (Fig. 2), Diplocaulus (Figs. 3, 4), 
Cricotus (Fig. 5), and others, and a series of skulls and other parts of 
the Solid-skulled Reptiles or Cotylosaurians. 


It soon became evident that this wonderful fauna would well repay 


FIG. 4. SKULL OF ARMORED AMPHIBIAN 
DIPLOCAULUS. 


Cope Permian Collection, presented by 
Morris K. Jesup. 


an energetic search for additional 
and more complete specimens, 
therefore in 1902 the Museum 
sent Mr. C. H. Sternberg, and in 
1906 and 1908 Dr. E. C. Case, 
into the Texas fossil field. ‘These 
expeditions made valuable addi- 
tions to the Permian collections. 
In particular, Dr. Case succeeded 
in 1906 in obtaining skeletons of 
the Spine-Backed Lizard Dime- 
trodon (Fig. 1) and the large solid- 
skulled (Cotylosaurian) — reptile 
Diadectes, much more complete 
than any previously known. ‘The 


first specimen has been placed on exhibition as a panel mount, the other 


is now under preparation. ‘he most important specimen obtained by 


Dr. Case last year was a fine skull of Diadectes. By persistent and 


FIG. 5. SKELETONS OF THE ARMORED AMPHIBIAN CRICOTUS. 


Cope Permian Collection, presented by Morris K. Jesup. 


. u . . . , Lad 
thorough exploration of this and other Permian fossil fields we may ex- 


pect to obtain a large series of skeletons of these strangest and least 


known of all our fossil vertebrates. 


The scientific value of these specimens can hardly be over rated. 


A GROUP QF PECULIAR MOLLUSKS 95 


Very little is known, even to scientific men, about Permian vertebrates. 
There are not half a dozen scientific men in this country who have any 
considerable first-hand knowledge of them, or half a dozen museums in 
the world that possess any considerable collections, and nowhere else 
have the specimens been so carefully prepared for study and exhibition 
as in the American Museum. ‘The skulls and skeletons recently pre- 
pared here have not yet been thoroughly studied, but they will supply 
most important evidence regarding the early history of the land verte- 
brates, the manner, the conditions, and the causes of their development, 
their relations to the modern reptiles, amphibians and mammals. Upon 
the imperfect evidence hitherto available have been built various theories 
and hypotheses of relationship and development, which will have to be 
revised and modified in many cases, in view of the new evidence already 
at hand. 
W. D. MatrHew. 


A GROUP OF PECULIAR MOLLUSKS. 


R. A. pE Costa Gomez has presented to the Department of 
Conchology an interesting group of shells of the mollusk Ver- 
micularia? nigricans Dall (old nomenclature Vermetus varians 

D’Orb., var. irregularis D’Orb.). The specimen is a tightly coiled 
mass of tubes, a gorgon-like maze of tortuous pipes which look so much 
like the cases of the annelid genus Serpula that they appear rather 
incongruously referred to mollusks. 

These anomalous mollusks were separated by Cuvier in 1830, and 
by him erected into an order. They are true prosobranchs, though in 
their shelly covering they have widely departed from any conventional 
shell design. The shells are usually attached to other shells or to corals, 
or they live in sponges, or again, as in this example, they unite to form 
large colonies. ‘They are unisexual, oviparous, or viviparous, and the 
eggs are often found in the tubes. The animals are dark purple-brown 
in color with reddish dots. This species makes the so-called “worm 
rock” of West Florida. The masses of tubes are sometimes dangerous, 
like coral reefs, to boats in shallow water. Dall has observed patches 20 
or 30 feet in diameter with the top nearly level and barely dry at ordi- 
nary low water. 


A GROUP OF PECULIAR MOLLUSK SHELLS. 


(Vermicularia? nigricans Dall.) 


96 


NEWS NOTES 97 


The specimen is interestingly varied in color, the tubes ranging from 

oe 7 Sage) 
hyaline whites to soft sienna browns. Gasse’s description of Serpula 
applies very well to these shells, “‘great and small heaps of contorted 


tubes, that look as if a batch of tobacco pipes had become agglutinated 


VERMICULARIA? NIGRICANS DALL. (x 2) 


Two small shells from the group figured on p. 96. 


+) 


together and strangely twisted in the baking.” ‘The shell begins in a 
close striated spine, the whorls of which relax as the tube is prolonged, 
the jlater growth becoming continually more erect. The specimen is 


from Clear Water Bay, Dunedin, Florida. 


ba PAG. 


MUSEUM NEWS NOTES. 


INCE the last issue of the JourNAL the following persons have 
been elected members of the Museum: Life Members, Mr. 
CHARLES LyMAN BrINSMADE and Mrs. JoHN E. Parsons; 

Annual Members, Messrs. Epwarp B. AMEND, J. SANFORD BARNES, 
Jr., D. M. Barrincer, S. R. Berrron, E. D. Brrp, Horatio J. 
Brewer, C. T. Courcu, Huspert Cruuis, EVERETT Co_By, EDWARD 
Livinaston Coster, LAWRENCE GODKIN, GEORGE L. HARRISON, JR., 
Hancke HENCKEN, THEODORE LyMaAN, H. FatrRFIELD OSBORN, JR., 
H. F. Osporn SANGER, RaLtpH SANGER and G. W. WiLpER; MMeEs. 
Hamitton Fisu Kean, H. Farrrretp Ossporn, M. Grace RICHARDSON, 
RaLpH SANGER and Epwarp THomas; Misses GERTRUDE L. Hoyt, 
BEATRIX JONES, Kaurz-EULENBURG and JOSEPHINE A. OSBORN. 


THe Museum has recently acquired through purchase from Mr. 
G. R. Cassedy, of Cafion City, Colo., an iron meteorite that will form 
a valuable addition to the series of meteorites in the Foyer of the 


98 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


Museum. ‘The specimen, which weighs 682 pounds, was found Novem- 
ber 11, 1907, in Fremont County, Colorado, about 20 miles southwest 
of Cripple Creek. A complete description of the meteorite is reserved 
for a later issue of the JOURNAL. 


THE thirteenth annual meeting of the Audubon Society of the State 
of New York, was held at the American Museum of Natural History at 
3:30 p. M., March 18, 1909. The president of the society, Professor 
Henry Fairfield Osborn, presided. ‘The report of Miss Emma H. Lock- 
wood, secretary-treasurer of the society, showed that the activities of 
the organization in protecting the birds of the State and in supplying 
material for the use of teachers and others, was limited only by availa- 
ble funds. Mr. William Dutcher, the president of the National Asso- 
ciation of Audubon Societies and chairman of the New York societies’ 
Committees on Legislation, presented a report on current legislative 
matters with particular reference to a bill now before the New York 
Legislature, the passage of which would practically prohibit the sale of 
the plumage of all New York State birds for millinery purposes. Mr. 
Dutcher asked all the members of the Society to urge their representa- 
tives at Albany to support this bill. Following Mr. Dutcher’s report, 
Mr. Louis Agassiz Fuertes, the well-known bird artist, made an address 
on birds and their music, which he illustrated with chalk sketches of the 
birds and whistled imitations of their songs. In connection with this 
meeting there was an exhibition of paintings of birds by Mr. Fuertes, 
which continued during the succeeding week. 


LECTURE ANNOUNCEMNNTS. 


MEMBER’S COURSE. 


THURSDAY eyenings at 8:15 o'clock. Doors open at 7:45 p. mM. One 
lecture remains to be given. 
April 1.— “The passing of Our Great Wild Animals and Means taken to 
Restore Vhem.” By Dr. Wititam TV. Hornapay, Director 
of the New York Zoélogical Park. 


Illustrated with lantern slides. 


LECTURES 99 


PUPILS’ COURSE. 


THEsE illustrated lectures are open to the pupils of the public schools 
when accompanied by their teachers and to the children of Members of the 
Museum on the presentation of Membership tickets. 

Lectures begin at 4 P. M. 


Friday, April 16.— “The Panama Canal.” By E. O. Hovey. 
Monday, April 19.— ‘Famous Rivers of the World.” By Waurer 


GRANGER. 

Wednesday, April 21.— “Natural Wonders of our Country.’ By R. W. 
MINER. 

Friday, April 23.— “American Forests and their Uses.” By G. H. 
SHERWOOD. 

Monday, April 26.— “Mediterranean Countries, Ancient and Modern.” 


By WALTER GRANGER. 

Wednesday, April 28.— ‘‘The American Indian of To-day.” By H. I. 
SMITH. 

Friday, April 30.— “Travels in the Western States.’ By Barnum 
Brown. 


LECTURES ON BIOLOGY. 


ARRANGED by the Biology Departments of the Normal College and the 
High Schools of Manhattan. Illustrated with stereopticon views. 


Thursday afternoons at 3:30 o'clock. 
One lecture remains to be given. 


April 15.— “Natural History of Animals.” By Dr. Henry E. Crampton. 


PEOPLE’S COURSE. 


GIVEN in coéperation with the City Department of Education. 
Tuesday evenings at 8’oclock. Doors open at 7:30. 
‘Two lectures by Professor A. D. F. Hamury on ‘The Architecture of 
Great Cities.’ Illustrated with stereopticon views. 
April 6.— “London.” 
April 13.— “‘New York.” 
April 20.— “Florence, Cradle of the Renaissance.” By Mr. Francis M. 
STRICKLAND. 
April 27.— “Berlin, and Military Life in Germany.” By Dr. Henry Zicx. 


100 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


Saturday evenings at 8 o’clock. Doors open at 7:30. 


April 3.— ‘Child Labor in America.” By Mr. Owen R. Lovesoy. 

April 10.— ‘‘The Children’s Court.” By Mr. Ernest K. Counter. 

April 17.— Subject and lecturer to be announced. 

April 24.— ‘The City Beautiful, or the Planning and Embellishment of 
Cities.” By Mr. Arruur A. STOUGHTON. 


MEETINGS OF SOCIETIES. 


Public meetings of the New York Academy of Sciences and its Affiliated 
Societies are held at the Museum according to the following schedule: 


On Monday evenings, The New York Academy of Sciences: 
First Mondays, Section of Geology and Mineralogy. 
Second Mondays, Section of Biology. 
Third Mondays, Section of Astronomy, Physics and Chemistry. 
Fourth Mondays, Section of Anthropology and Psychology. 


On ‘Tuesday evenings, as announced: 
v role) 
The Linnean Society of New York, The New York Entomological 
Society and the ‘Torrey Botanical Club. 


On Wednesdays, as announced: 
The Horticultural Society of New York. 
The New York Mineralogical Club. 


On Friday evenings, as announced: 
The New York Microscopical Society. 

The programmes of the meetings of the respective organizations are 
published in the weekly Bulletin of the New York Academy of Sciences and 
sent to the members of the several societies. Members of the Museum on 
making request of the Director will be provided with the Bulletin as issued. 


The American [luseum Journal 


Epmunp Oris. Hovey, Editor. 
FRANK M. CHAPMAN, | 
Louis P. GRATACAP, Advisory Board. 
WILLIAM K, GREGORY, ) 


Subscription, One Dollar per year. Fifteen Cents per copy. 
A subscription to the JourNnat is included in the membership fees of all classes of Members of 
the Museum. 
Subscriptions should be addressed to The American Museum Journal, 30 Boylston St., Cam- 
bridge, Mass., or 77th St. and Central Park West, New York City. 


Entered as second-class matter January 12, 1907, at the Post-office at Boston, Mass. 
Act of Congress, July 16, 1894. 


No. 
No. 


Guide Leaflets published by the 
AMERICAN MUSEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY. 
For Sale at the Museum. 


(Issued as supplements to The American Museum Journal.) 


1— THE BIRD ROCK GROUP. By F. M. Cuapman, Associate Curator 
of Mammalogy and Ornithology. October, 1901. Price, 10 cents, 

2.— THE SAGINAW VALLEY COLLECTION. By H. I. Smiru, Assistant 
Curator of Archeology. December, 1901. Price, 10 cents. 

3.— THE HALL OF FOSSIL VERTEBRATES. By W. D. Marruew, 
Ph. D., Assistant Curator of Vertebrate Paleontology. January, 1902. 
Out of print. : 

4— THE COLLECTION OF MINERALS. By Lovis P. Graracap, A. M., 
Curator of Mineralogy. February, 1902. Revised edition, May, 1904. 
Price, 10 cents. 

5.— NORTH AMERICAN RUMINANTS. By J. A. Auten, Ph.D. Curator 
of Mammalogy and Ornithology. March, 1902. Revised edition, 
February, 1904. Price, 10 cents. 

6.— THE ANCIENT BASKET MAKERS OF SOUTHEASTERN UTAH. 
By Grorce H. Pepper, Assistant in Anthropology. April, 1902. 
Price, 10 cents. 

7.— THE BUTTERFLIES OF THE VICINITY OF NEW YORK CITY. 
By Witu1Am BrevuTENMULLER, Curator of Entomology. May, 1902. 
Price, 15 cents. 

8.— THE SEQUOIA. A Historical Review of Biological Science. By 
GrorGE H. SHERWoop, A. M., Assistant Curator. November, 1902. 
Price, 10 cents. 

9.— THE EVOLUTION OF THE HORSE. By W. D. Martruew, Ph. D., 
Associate Curator of Vertebrate Paleontology. January, 1903. Sec- 
ond edition, May, 1905. Price, 10 cents. 


. 10— THE HAWK-MOTHS OF THE VICINITY OF NEW YORK CITY. 


By Witu1am BeuTrenmMiuuter, Curator of Entomology. February, 
1903. Price, 10 cents. 


. 11— THE MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS OF THE INCAS. By C. W. Mean, 


Assistant in Archeology. July, 1903. Price, 10 cents. 


. 12— THE COLLECTION OF FOSSIL VERTEBRATES. By W. D. Mar- 


THEW, Ph. D., Associate Curator of Vertebrate Paleontology. Octo- 
ber, 1903. Price, 10 cents. 


. 13.— A GENERAL GUIDE TO THE AMERICAN MUSEUM OF NATURAL 


HISTORY. January, 1904. Out of print. 


. 14— BIRDS’ NESTS AND EGGS. By Frank M. CuHapman. Associate 


Curator of Mammalogy and Ornithology. April, 1904. Reprinted, 
February, 1905. Price, 10 cents. 

15.— PRIMITIVE ART. July, 1904. Price, 15 cents. 

16.— THE INSECT-GALLS OF THE VICINITY OF NEW YORK CITY. 
By Wriu1am BeuTenMiLter, Curator of Entomology. October, 1904. 
Price, 15 cents. 


No. 


No. 


No. 


(Reprinted from The American Museum Journal.) 


.17— THE FOSSIL CARNIVORES, MARSUPIALS AND SMALL MAM- 


MALS IN THE AMERICAN MUSEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY. 
By W. D. Marruew, Ph. D., Associate Curator of Vertebrate Palzeon- 
tology. January, 1905. Price, 15 cents. 


. 18.— THE MOUNTED SKELETON OF BRONTOSAURUS. By W. D 


Marruew, Ph. D., Associate Curator of Vertebrate Paleontology. 
April, 1905. Out of print. 


. 19— THE REPTILES OF THE VICINITY OF NEW YORK CITY. By 


Raymonp L. Dirmars, Curator of Reptiles, New York Zoélogical Park. 
July, 1905. Price, 15 cents. 


. 20.— THE BATRACHIANS OF THE VICINITY OF NEW YORK CITY. 


By Raymonp L. Dirmars, Curator of Reptiles, New York Zodlogical 
Park. October, 1905. Price, 15 cents. 


. 21—THE DEVELOPMENT OF A MOLLUSK. By B. E. Danueren, 


D.M.D. January, 1906. Price, 10 cents. 


. 22.— THE BIRDS OF THE VICINITY OF NEW YORK CITY. By Franx 


M. CHapMan, Associate Curator of Mammalogy and Ornithology. 
April-July, 1906. Prise, 15 cents. 


. 23.— THE SPONGE ALCOVE. By Roy W. Miner, Assistant Curator. of 


Invertebrate Zodlogy. October, 1906. Price, 10 cents. 


(Published as a separate series.) 


. 24 PERUVIAN MUMMIES. By Cuarues W. Mean, Department of Eth- 


nology. March, 1907. Price, 10 cents. 


. 25.— PIONEERS OF AMERICAN SCIENCE. Memorials of the naturalists 


whose busts are in the Foyer of the Museum. April, 1907. Price, 15 
cents. 

26.— THE METEORITES IN THE FOYER OF THE AMERICAN MUSEUM 
OF NATURAL HISTORY. By Epmunp Otis Hovey, Ph.D., 
Associate Curator of Geology. December, 1907. Price, 10 cents. 

27. THE MALARIA MOSQUITO. By B.E. Dantcren, D.M.D.  Assis- 
tant Curator of Invertebrate Zodlogy. April, 1908. Price, 15 cents. 

28.—THE HABITAT GROUPS OF NORTH AMERICAN BIRDS. By 
Frank M. Cuapman, Curator of Ornithology. February, 1909. Price, 
15 cents. 


(‘90T ‘d ses uoldiiosep Joy) ‘suUEYLE oY} UI Jood [e100 & JO asp sy} MOTeq Uses oq AvUI Sv YONS AjIUNUIUIOD [BUITUB Wy 


‘'dNOYS LVLIGVH ANIYVW MAN V cOT 


The American Museum Journal 


No. 5 


MAY, 1909 


THE SERIES OF PROTOZOAN MODELS. 


HE minute one-celled organisms known as Protozoa form a 
group of immense importance both from a biological and an 
economic standpoint. Swarming in countless millions in both 

fresh and salt water, and at times even in the bodies of other animals, 
they are the most abundant and most widely distributed of all life. 
Many of the smaller marine and fresh water creatures depend upon 
them for food, and among them may also be found some of the most 
important disease-causing parasites. The calcareous and _ siliceous 
skeletons of others settle to the sea bottom by thousands as the animals 
die, to collect in layers often many feet in thickness. The calcareous 
skeletons sometimes become compacted into solid rock, and thus are of 
great geological importance, many extensive cliffs of lime-stone and 
chalk having been formed in this way. The siliceous skeletons form 
the so-called ‘‘Radiolarian ooze,” which is the source of the ‘‘ Barbados 
earth” used in manufactures for polishing and grinding, and which 
forms no inconsiderable part of the island of Barbados. ‘Though this 
vast world of creatures is so important and surrounds us on every side, 
penetrating, as it were, all the interspaces between the larger forms of 
life, yet it is invisible to our eyes, and were it not for the compound 
microscope, we should be absolutely ignorant of it, except in its effects. 

The Museum is at present completing its series of greatly enlarged 
models of the typical Protozoa, and one of the most striking of these has 
recently been finished for exhibition. It is shown in the accompany- 
ing illustrations (pages 104 and 105). This Protozoan (Auwloceros ele- 
gans Hackel) belongs to the group Radiolaria, so called because of the 
radiating siliceous or glassy skeleton which characterizes these forms. 
Sometimes these are of great complexity and beauty, and though the 
Protozoa as a whole are the simplest in structure of all animals, being 
composed of but a single cell, certain forms among the Radiolaria attain 
considerable complexity of intracellular structure, as may be seen in the 
figure. 

103 


104 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


In the middle of the animal is the oval nucleus, which is the essential 
center of its life activities, and which is itself extremely complex both in 
structure and in function. It is inclosed in a transparent double-walled 
“central capsule,” in this species red in color, containing a portion of the 
living protoplasmic cell-substance (endoplasm) which is continuous 
with the surrounding outer protoplasm (ectoplasm) through openings 
at the summits of the three conical projections. ‘The central capsule 
is partly imbedded in a mass of granular pigmented substance (the 


THE PROTOZOAN, AULOCEROS ELEGANS HACKEL 


Glass model, greatly enlarged. Made by H. Miiller under the direction of R. W. Miner. 


MODEL OF AULOCEROS ELEGANS HACKEL 


View to show internal anatomy. 


pheodium — dark green in this species), which surrounds and apparently 
issues from the upper opening of the capsule. It is probably of con- 
siderable physiological value to the organism and may be either asso- 
ciated with nutrition or a product of an excretory nature retained within 
the body for some secondary reason. ‘The real explanation of its func- 
tion, however, is still uncertain. 

The true protoplasmic living-substance outside the capsule is dis- 
tributed for the most part in the form of a network, which secretes and 
is imbedded in a jelly-like structureless matrix. ‘This matrix is crowded 
with bubble-like, liquid-filled hollows (alveoles), which are so numerous 
that they reduce the animal substance to very narrow limits and give 
a foam-like appearance to this part of the structure. (In the glass 


105 


106 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


model each alveole is represented by a separately blown glass sphere.) 
Radiating outward from the central capsule may be seen the supporting 
glassy skeleton of the creature, each ray in this species separate, and 
branching antler-like at the tip. Particular notice should be taken of 
the delicate radiating filamentary projections of the animal body be- 
tween the rays of the skeletal structure. ‘These are the “pseudopods,” 
prolongations of the living protoplasmic network which reach out in all 
directions and act somewhat as tentacles, seizing upon the minute ani- 
mals which form the prey of the creature, and drawing them down 
within the body to be digested and absorbed. ‘This ingestion may take 
place at any point of the surface, since there is no mouth and no definite 
stomach. ‘The pseudopods are used also for locomotion. 

In other related species all parts of the skeleton are welded rigidly 
together, often forming complicated and beautiful patterns, as in the 
genus Gorgonetta, the skeleton of which is represented by a model now 
on exhibition in the Museum (page 107). 


Roy W. MIneEr. 


A NEW MARINE HABITAT GROUP. 


HE illustration on page 102 represents a group recently installed 
by the Department of Invertebrate Zodlogy. This group 
shows an animal community such as may often be found in the 

Bahamas not far below the exposed edge of a coral reef. It includes 
Brittle-stars, Sea Cucumbers, Cake-urchins and Sea-urchins, especially 
Diadema setosum, two fine specimens of which are represented bristling 
with long spines, like hedge-hogs. Coiled in and out through the crevices 
of the coral-rock is the brownish body of a Synapta, studded with knobs 
and displaying around its circular mouth-opening an expanded ring of 
plume-like tentacles. Conspicuous at one side of the group is the flower- 
like Pink-tipped Sea Anemone (Condylactis gigantea Weinland), which 
nestles at the base of a coral growth and is partly concealed by the brown 
slimy surface of an incrusting sponge. Above this rises the delicate 
fern-like colony of a Stinging Coral (Millepora alcicornis) together with 
a fragile, paper-like species (Millepora plicata), while other sponges 
and corals project here and there from the sand. ‘The material for the 
group was collected in 1908 by Dr. B. E. Dahlgren and Mr. H. Miiller 
off Andros Island in the Bahamas, and was for the most part prepared 
by the former in the Museum. 


mid 


, Sg i, 
Cl 


GLASS MODEL OF SKELETON OF PROTOZOAN, GORGONETTA MIRABILIS HACKEL. 


Very greatly enlarged. Prepared by H. Miiller. 


107 


THE GOBLIN 


SHARK 


MODEL OF THE GOBLIN SHARK. 


LIFE-SIZE model of a very rare and 
remarkable Shark from Japanese 
waters, a photograph of which is 

shown on this page, has recently been 
finished for exhibition in the Museum. 
The model well represents some of the ani- 
mal’s peculiar anatomical features, the 
most striking of which is the “‘rostrum,” 
a paddle-shaped affair, richly supplied with 
blood-vessels and nerves, which projects 
forward from above the mouth and is 
probably used to feel about on the sea- 
bottom for prey. The long tapering body 
with extremely powerful’ tail indicates an 
adaptation for great speed. In life the 
shark is somewhat translucent and presents 
a peculiarly ghost-like appearance as it 
darts through the water. The alcoholic 
specimen from which the model was made is 
in the Museum collection and has been con- 
stituted the type of a new species (Scapano- 
rhynchus jordant) recently described in the 
Museum ‘Bulletin’? by Dr. L. Hussakof. 
The model was prepared by Mr. Dwight 
Franklin, under the direction of Mr. R. W. 


Miner, and is four feet five inches long. 


Dr. L. Hussaxor, Assistant Curator of 
Fossil Fishes, went to Europe in April to 
make a study of the icthyological collections 
of the leading museums. he last few 
weeks of his stay will be spent at the zodlog- 
ical station at Naples. 


108 


STEFANSSON-ANDERSON ARCTIC EXPEDITION 109 
NEWS FROM THE MUSEUM’S ARCTIC EXPLORERS. 


ARLY in April letters written the middle of October were re- 

5 ceived with news from the Museum’s Arctic Alaska expedition. 

The letters come from Flaxman Island, situated in the Arctic 

Ocean off the northern coast of Alaska and about midway between Mac- 

kenzie Bay and Point Barrow, and record the union of Mr. Stefansson 

and Dr. Anderson, who followed different routes after leaving Herschel 
Island in August. 

The route taken by Mr. Stefansson was in part shown in the Novem- 
ber, 1908, JourNaL, and later facts were given in the March, 1909, 
number quoted from a letter written late last September. The expedi- 
tion proceeded westward as far as Point Barrow; then on a return trip 
toward Flaxman was frozen in at Smith Bay, west of Cape Halkett, 
cached goods there, made a sled and continued slowly eastward. Dr. 
Anderson and his party cruised along the coast westward from Herschel 
Island until September 6, when their whaleboat was frozen in west of 
Barter Island and the men with their seventeen dogs had to proceed with 
sleds, feeding ‘“‘on the country.” 

It is a satisfaction to know of the well-being of all members of this 
polar expedition up to October 19, 1908, when the Arctic winter was well 
started, and this feeling is intensified by a message that has come since 
the letters arrived. A telegram received by way of Seattle April 8, which 
was dispatched from Nome, Alaska, on April 6 and was originally 

dated at Point Barrow February 14, reads as follows: ‘Telegram of 
- December fourth received. Well. Winter camp lower Colville. 
Game scarce. Nobody starving. Plans unchanged. Expect meet 
Whalers Baillie [Island]. Stefansson.”’ 

Realistic accounts of the happenings of the weeks en route to Flaxman 
Island are given in the following quotations: 


FLAXMAN ISLAND, ALASKA, 
October 15, 1908. 


* > «We have made the trip from the delta of an unnamed river 
about 50 miles east from Point Barrow eastward to Flaxman Island, start- 
ing Friday, September 18, and arriving here Monday, October 12. Our trip 
was unusually slow for several reasons. I delayed some three days to visit 


‘Q]JIAJOD JAMO] 9Y} UO UVeq Svy duIed J8]}UIM BY, “19q0}0Q UL 
pUuUL|S] UBWIXE]T 4B Joo 07 soynod yudTeyIp Sumnsind soysed omy ul ysnsny Ul puLvjsy [EYoSsoF] Jo] Uortpedxy Uosiepuy-UOssuBJaIg oY], 


“VASVIV O1LOYV 40 dV OTT 


Ce sf eects 


10) 
jess 
Vee 
~A A129. 
4 Ka all} 
2 es 
> 
+ 
= 
N 
a 
Xx 
> 
c—— 
saved \ \\ , 
mete HLA Repyinirs! 
~2__ IRIN 
og td Aayraagl 
ce Ss 
“psiqayy > 
"91224; 0} Ree : ing) 
ynwot | } 


We ( 
Wd quagury — 


Mosseg sy 


2el all 8hl 9G 


i i i 


OL 


7 


STEFANSSON-ANBERSON ARCTIC EXPEDITION 111 


the Schooner ‘‘ Olga” beset in the ice off Cape Halkett as a letter from there 
has already informed you;! we lost about five days at various rivers, either 
through waiting for them to freeze over or in taking stuff across their deltas 
in half-loads; we employed about five days in hunting, skinning and cach- 
ing (on high wooden platforms) seal and deer. We got one seal and twelve 
deer. Of the deer, I saved five specimens for Dr. Anderson. ‘Three of 
these were killed in the Colville delta, and two a little east of it — three 
fine bucks, one old female, one young female (female and young with horns 
an old buck was in 


in velvet). The deer show different stages of pelage 
summer color still, while the doe was fully changed and the others ranged 
between. We also secured some specimens of mice, weasels and birds. 

At Flaxman Island we found Dr. Anderson and the three natives, all 
well and Dr. Anderson reasonably satisfied with the fall months, though 
he had had a rather complete change from whitemen’s diet and had been 
compelled at one time to eat up his mouse bait (5 lbs. of rolled oats). His 
party had lived on squirrels and seal oil for a time, and later, on deer, fish 
and grouse. 

Off Point Tangent I put some of our supplies and some we were carrying 
for Leffingwell aboard the schooner “ Rosie H.”’, whose captain, Fritz Wolki, 
promised to take Leffingwell’s stuff to Flaxman and mine as far as he could 
go. He was frozen in here, so we have here the following stores: 27 sacks 
flour, 100 Ibs. triscuit, 60 Ibs. pilot bread, 80 lbs. bacon, 20 gallons coal oil, 
4 tanks alcohol; this besides some of our ammunition, which we brought 
from the east. 

These stores are, of course, by no means sufficient for our maintenance, 
nor are they, even if taken with our stuff in Smith Bay, where our boats were 
frozen in. We shall, therefore, leave here as soon as Dr. Anderson and I 
get our letters written — probably next Monday — and go looking for game. 
Dr. Anderson wants to try getting some specimens of sheep, so he with two 
natives will go to the mountains by way of the Kugruak (on maps “* Kvgura”’) 
River, while the rest of us go west to near Beechey Point. Here we already 
have 8 deer cached and hope to get more, while some of us will try to get 
seal outside the Thetis Islands, which are off shore just east of the Colville. 
If threatened with starvation, Dr. Anderson will come back to Ilaxman 
and get the flour from the ‘ Rosie H.’’, while if we fail to get game, we shall 
go westward to Smith Bay where our boats are. Just now we are getting 
some seal here at Flaxman— from one to three per day —bvt it is our 
opinion that these will not last, for the floe ice is very heavy off shore and all 
open places will soon freeze. Most of even those natives who habitually 


1 Published in this JouRNAL for March, 1909, p. 67. 


112 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


live at Flaxman are going elsewhere for the winter. Our special anxiety 
is for the dogs, I now have eleven and our natives twelve more, inclusive of 
three pups. If the dogs should die, we should be severely handicapped for 
next year. 

I should have liked to go to Herschel Island now and up to Ft. Macpher- 
son (a two months’ round trip) to meet the winter mail and reply to any 
letters you may send by it, but as Capt. Wolki will gladly carry our letters 
to Herschel and as this is the best season to accumulate a little game and fish 
(before the sun leaves us), I have decided not to pay attention to anything 
but the problem of making a living. 

If we can subsist near the Colville, as we shall try to do, we shall inci- 
dentally see a good many of the Colville people probably; if things go 
exceedingly well, I may even be able to get far enough inland to see most 
of them. When the days get long I want to make a trip to Baillie Island [off 
Cape Bathurst] and with open water I expect to visit the Colville people 
when they gather for trade at the delta village of Nirglik [Nigaluk, on the 
map], while we shall also probably be able to do the much-desired digging 
on Pingok (the big island off Beechey Point). These are the hopes and 
plans for the spring. 

It is the intention of Captain Wolki of the “‘ Rosie H.”’ to winter in Banks 
Land next year. He says he will take us and our gear down there and 
(weather permitting) will land us where he lands, or elsewhere if we desire. 
He will wait some time for some of his own incoming supplies at Baillie 
Island, and will take aboard there anything we have for transportation. 
We shall therefore gradually take our stuff to his ship this winter and either 
precede or follow him with our boats to Baillie Island — according to the 
season and circumstances. ‘Then we shall go to Banks Land, or elsewhere, 
as seems best. From information secured by natives who were with Cap- 
tain Mogg in Victoria Land last year, we now know there are people on 
Banks Land, though none have ever been seen there either by the early 
English explorers or by whalers coasting along the west shore. 


A second letter written by Mr. Stefansson two days later considers 
their need of ammunition and like supplies, and closes with the reassuring 
sentence: “You have, of course, no reason to worry about us; we are 
pretty well off.” 

Many interesting facts concerning the zodlogical work of the expedi- 
tion are given in a letter from Dr. Anderson under date of October 14; 
while definite information as to plans for the immediate future are 
stated not only in the letter proper, but also in a postscript under date 
of October 19. 


STEFANSSON-ANDERSON ARCTIC EXPEDITION 113 


FLAXMAN ISLAND, Arctic OcEAN, ALASKA, 
October 14, 1908. 


* * ** * T started west with three natives in a whale-boat and a large 
skin canoe or umiak about 25 feet long, with the intention of cruising along 
the coast to Flaxman Island to meet Stefansson early in September. We 
had seventeen dogs and ourselves to feed “‘on the country,” as we started 
with about one sack of flour, four or five pounds of bacon, a little tea and 
coffee and about fifty pounds of dried fish. We had several gill nets and 
were obliged to stop and fish a good deal at various places. Fishing was 
only fairly good along the coast; we caught from ten to forty whitefish 
nearly every day and a few salmon trout, but could not get very many ahead. 

We saw seven caribou and killed one Avgust 18, at Demarcation Point, 
the international boundary. Our whaleboat was frozen in at a reef a little 
west of Barter Island, Alaska, on September 5, about fifteen days earlier 
than usually happens. We succeeded in drawing it up to an apparently 
safe place on the reef by means of block and tackle which we had with us, 
cached one chest of specimens and part of our goods with the boat and 
broke ice and dragged the skin boat over the sandbars to the mainland at 
the mouth of Okpilak River, taking part of our supplies with us. 

We killed a good many squirrels here (Spermophilus parryz) which helped 
out our commissariat and made a few “‘skins’* also. As we had only two 
or three days’ provisions on hand, and as the ice was too thin for sled travel, 
we made pack saddles for several of our dogs, and started September 9 
across the half-frozen tundra to the place where the Hula Hula River emerges 
from the mountains, and the swift water remains open much later than near 
the coast. The lower coast of both the Okpilak and Hula Hula froze over 
at the time the “young ice” formed in the sea lagoon. Snow fell on Septem- 
ber 10 and has remained on the ground ever since. 

At the fishing place on the Hula-Hula River we caught several hundred 
salmon trout (two species), many specimens being from six to eight pounds 
in weight. One day we caught 284. We also killed three caribou on Sep- 
tember 14, but my native inconsiderately ripped the hides off and ruined 
them for specimens while I was chasing the fourth individual of the herd. 
We remained up-country over two weeks, returned to the coast for our two 
sleds, hauled the fish and meat back to our camp on the coast, and started 
as soon as possible for Flaxman Island, the sleds pretty heavily loaded 
with most of our fish and meat. We arrived at Flaxman Island October 
4, after a rather hard trip along the coast, owing to rough frozen in blocks 
of ice in places and salt slush in others. 

We had seen only one family of natives camped at Barter Island and two 
sailing in a whale boat late in August, and they had told us that Leffingwell 


114 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


had left Flaxman Island and nobody was there now, as the natives’ were 
hunting in the mountains. Hence we did not know what we should have to 
do on arriving there, as it seemed probable that Stefansson had been frozen 
in also. On arriving at Flaxman Island, we found the whaler “‘ Rosie H.” 
of San Francisco frozen in and wintering here. Captain Fritz Wolki re- 
ported that he had passed Stefansson and Storkerson in Smith Bay with a 
sloop and a whaleboat * * * *. 

Our flour, bacon and all “civilized foods” had been exhausted by 
August 30, the coffee very soon afterward, and from that time until we 
reached Flaxman, October 4, we were strictly on a meat and fish diet. We 
succeeded in pulling through without going hungry at any time, but a man 
misses the bread after a few weeks. 

* > Tn sending out part of our supplies from New York, I think it 
would be desirable and economical to send at least part of the lighter mate- 
rials packed in substantial tin-lined chests which could be used for packing 
and transporting specimens in the North. ‘The three collecting chests that I 
took out with me are filled with specimens (bird and mammal skins) and 
cached, one at Herschel Island and two near Barter Island, and I shall try 
to send the specimens out next summer. If I get no more chests, I shall 
have to send out these small skins in what wooden packing boxes I can find 
or patch together, and take chances of having them damaged by rats, mice 
or dampness in a long whaling voyage before reaching San Francisco. 

* kk TE the natives know that a man wants rare or unusual specimens, 
they often bring them in, and expect a present of some kind, or at least the 
ordinary fur trader’s prices. For example, there is a species of badger found 
near the mountains a few miles from this coast, rather rarely, and what few 
the natives bring in are sold for about one dollar apiece. We may or may 
not be able to catch a specimen ourselves next spring. | have seen a native 
fur coat made of badger skins, and the fur is much denser and softer than 
the southern badger, which appears to reach its northern limit on the Atha- 
basca River, around Pelican Rapids. 

It is probable that we shall pass most of the winter and spring in 
the neighborhood of Smith Bay, near our “grub pile,” spending part of the 
time a little farther east around the mouth of the Colville River. 

Stefansson will probably start west very soon, while I go into the moun- 
tains near here with one of our natives, up either the Hula Hula or Kugura 
River, and try to get some mountain sheep before the snow gets too deep. 
This part of the Endicott Range is said to be the best mountain sheep 
country left in Alaska, and the natives kill a good many at all seasons of the 
year. We met one native near Barter Island in August, who had just re- 
turned from the mountains, after killing twenty sheep. The caribou are 


STEFANSSON-ANDERSON ARCTIC EXPEDITION 115 


killed in considerable numbers all along this coast and are said to be working 
westward in greater numbers every year to the Colville River region and up 
towards Point Barrow. ‘The natives say that the deer here are smaller 
than those east of the Mackenzie River. I have a very dark August specimen 
taken at Demarcation Point, on the Canadian side, Yukon Territory. I 
have a fair series of the two species of ptarmigan found here, all in the 
mottled transition plumage, a few small mammals, including a peculiar 
shrew from the Hula-Hula (at least different from any I have seen before). 
I made a good many bird skins along the coast in August and September. 

Captain Wolki of the “Rosie H.” is something of an ornithologist, and 
has collected bird skins and eggs in the Arctic Ocean for many years. * * * 
He knows the species very well and is apparently a very close observer. 
He has a house on the Horton River, Franklin Bay, east of Baillie Island, 
where he lived and traded for four years. He says he has a collection of 
skins there now, including among others pomarine and long-tailed jaegers, 
golden eagle, hawks, and gulls. He has taken great numbers. of eggs of the 
snow geese there, also whistling swan, American white-fronted goose, and 
black brant, in fact, nearly all the northern species except Ross’s snow goose 
and yellow-billed loon. He says he saw one white pelican at the mouth of 
Mackenzie River and six spoonbill ducks taken at Horton River, both spe- 
cies being unknown to the natives. The Eskimo, by the way, distinguish 
between the different species better than most white men, and have names 
for nearly all the species. 

October 19. Mr. Stefansson left for the west to night with Billy Akpek 
and his wife and expects to spend some time deer-hunting around the 
Colville. I shall start east to-morrow with Ilavinerk and his wife in com- 
pany with Capt. Wolki’s outfit, bound for Herschel Island. We shall ascend 
the Hula-Hula River just west of Barter Island for a few weeks hunting 
for mountain sheep, together with any other specimens we can get in the 
mountains. We shall stay until we get a good series of specimens, or get 
starved out, then retreat to Flaxman Island and go westward from there. 


PRESIDENT Henry F. Osporn will attend the Darwin Memorial 
celebration at Cambridge University, England, June 22-24, as the 
delegate of the American Philosophical Society. Director H. C. Bumpus 
will attend the same celebration as the delegate of the Museum and 
then will go to Geneva, Switzerland, to represent the New York 
Academy of Sciences at the 350th anniversary, July 7-10, of the 
founding of the university there. 


u19},8d & I OATS 04 
jou9}s B 19A0 op YIM Surqqna ‘Aroqynu zaded yo yreq souUt oy} WOT “YO[P BATPVU Ay} *;, ede} ,, oyvur suvilty oq, 


"NYSLLVd TIONSLS 9TT 


"HLOTO NVIPI4 


A COLLECTION FROM THE SOUTH SEAS D7. 


THE FIJIAN COLLECTION. 
r SHE Museum has recently secured, as a gift from Mrs. Morris K. 


Jesup, a valuable collection from the South Seas. This acces- 

sion, containing more than two thousand specimens, comes 
largely from the Fiji Islands and amply represents most features of the 
culture of the native inhabitants. 

The Fijians, while resembling the Melanesians in physique, speak 
a language related to that of the Polynesians; also they share many 
cultural traits with the Polynesian inhabitants of Tonga and Samoa, 
with whom they have been in intimate contact for a long period. For 
instance, like their eastern neighbors, the Fijians drink kava, a stupe- 
fying beverage prepared from the roots of the plant Piper methysticum; 
and the new collection contains an imposing array of the bowls used 
in the process of kava making. Both preparation and drinking are 
accompanied by a great deal of ceremony. Young men, in public 
assembly, chew portions of the roots, then deposit them in the bowl, 
which is afterwards filled with water. Next a special official is entrusted 
with the task of straining the liquid, while hundreds of spectators watch 
his movements, imitate his postures and join in a choral chant. When 
the kava is ready for use, a prayer is recited by a herald, and the king, 
after pouring out a libation, drinks from a cup made from the half of 
a cocoanut. ‘To be served after the sovereign is a great honor usually 
awarded for some distinguished personal service. A curious custom 
connected with the kava ceremony is the voicing of a toast after each 
draught. The drinker may express a wish for favorable winds, for 
plenty of fish or an abundant crop, or may set forth some other hope 
depending on his profession. Frequently, this ceremony is followed by 
a feast of yams, taro, figs and nuts. 

One of the most notable achievements of the South Sea aborigines 
is the ornamentation of their tapa or native cloth, and here again the 
collection furnishes interesting evidence of both material and method. 
Tapa is manufactured from the inner bark of the paper mulberry, 
strips of which are beaten with a mallet and joined together with arrow- 
root paste to make the necessary size. Pattern-boards or stencils are 
constructed from large palm leaves, the designs consisting of coarse 
fibers or twigs sewed on to the leaf foundation. The cloth is placed 
over the stencil and rubbed with a dye until the pattern of the orna- 


118 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


mentation is transferred. Fijian specimens, both of the finished product 
and of the stencils employed in its decoration, are shown in the illus- 
tration on page 116. 

Other objects typical of the South Sea area generally, such as adzes, 
fly switches and tattooing implements are also adequately represented 
in the collection. There are numerous throwing-clubs, short sticks 
terminating in a knob, formerly carried in the girdle and used as the 
instrument of assassination. The collection contains a very large series 
of clubs of varying shape; some are obviously recent productions fash- 
ioned in imitation of guns. Many of these weapons have a carved 
decoration, which usually takes the form of a zigzag pattern of some 
kind. Part of them are wrapped with cordage, others with a checker 
plaiting. A weapon differentiating the Fijians from their eastern neigh- 
bors is the bow, which occurs in Polynesia merely in the form of a toy. 
A small assortment of Fiji earthenware (page 121) is of considerable 
interest, as all of the Polynesian tribes lack pottery and are obliged to 
prepare their food by baking or roasting. 

One of the most valuable specimens is the model of a bure, or tem- 
ple. ‘This building was usually erected on a platform or mound, ren- 
dered accessible by a notched plank. From this eminence the bure 
rose to the height of about thirty feet. As nails were entirely unknown 
to the Fijians prior to European contact, they fastened together the 
posts and rafters by means of sinnet, the native cordage, prepared from 
the dried fibers of the cocoanut husk. In the construction of a temple, 
an immense quantity of sinnet was used for decorative purposes, so 
that from a distance the whole house seemed to be built of braided 
cord. Before lowering the corner posts into their holes, the Fijians 
offered human sacrifices to propitiate the deity of the temple; sometimes 
men were placed standing in each post hole and buried alive by the 
side of the post. The setting up of the first pair of rafters was solem- 
nized with a cannibal feast, and a similar celebration took place as soon 
as the building was completed. The human bodies were baked in ovens. 
The forks or dishes used in eating human flesh were strictly “taboo,” 
that is they were religiously reserved for this purpose under penalty of 
death. The Museum collection contains several of these cannibal forks 
and flesh-racks (page 121). Although serving as a council-chamber, a 
place for entertaining friendly visitors, and even as a sleeping-place for 


the most eminent residents of the village, the principal function of the 


‘saradg —QT-6 ‘Sqnjo uny— TT pues ‘sqnyo Surmoryy, — 2-9 “sqnyo Jo sed&y snore A — ZT pue ‘eo 


‘SuvadS GNV SAN19 NVIrls 611 


a ae 


ee Ste 
ie hie 


ae: 


ee 


° 


aia 


= 
coat) 
Gs 


aes 


= 
ne 
7 


elated sn ate eee 


+ 

f 

f 
? 


= apt 


bis pee BS 


ie? dh. ; 
THs nf 
Pee 


MODEL OF BURE OR TEMPLE. 
Nails being unknown, cordage was used to fasten together posts and rafters. 


120 


A COLLECTIQN FROM THE SOUTH SEAS 121 


bure was for religious ceremonies. Here votive offerings of food and 
whale’s teeth were presented to the deity. Here also the native priest fell 
into a trance, during which he held communion with supernatural powers, 
whose decision on the question at issue was afterwards announced to the 
populace. 

While the temple illustrated the architectural skill of the Fijians, 
which is superior to that of all other Oceanians excepting the Maori 
of New Zealand, their craftsmanship in other directions is shown by 
the variety of their neck-rests and the attractive open-work decoration 
of their combs. (See plate on page 122.) Oil and food dishes of wood 
are of rather crude execution, but interesting in shape. Very artistic 
effects are produced in the breast-plates of shell bone, which are tastefully 
decorated with inlaid patterns. 

The objects illustrated here and other material selected from the 
collection have been installed temporarily in a wall case in the northeast 
corner of the Siberian Hall (No. 101) on the ground floor. 

Rosert H. Lowe. 


7 8 


CANNIBAL FLESH HANGERS (! AND 3), CANNIBAL FORK (2), FIJIAN 
POTTERY (4 TO 6), KAVA BOWL AND CUPS (7 AND 8). 


‘(OI-6) Meta av0d pue yuo ‘oy u[d-ysvarq (8) quod yaomuado “(1-9) SOYsIp wapoom ‘(G—z 


G-Z) S}ser yoou ‘(T) ain 9SON 
‘dIHSNVWSLavUD NVI-ia 40 SATdNVS 


a’ AVA Aver 
a'a'a'S'a' alae’ 


OBITUARY OF DR. JONES 123 


DR. WILLIAM JONES. 


T is our sad duty to record the death of Dr. William Jones, a distin- 
guished ethnologist who for several years was connected with this 
Museum, but who for some months had been on a collecting ex- 

pedition for the Field Museum of Natural History, Chicago, among the 
less civilized tribes of the Philippine Islands. While near Monbato, 
Luzon, he was attacked by a party of savages on March 28, his thirty- 
sixth birthday, receiving wounds from which he died on the same day. 
This is truly a great loss to ethnology, since Dr. Jones was well equipped 
for work among the Algonkin Indian tribes of North America and had 
at the time of his death a wealth of unfinished work, most of which is now 
beyond recovery. 

His college career began as a student at Harvard where he received 
the A. B. degree in 1900. Then he took up the study of anthropology 
at Columbia University, where he received the degree of Doctor of Phil- 
osophy in 1904. He was University Fellow 1900-1902 and Assistant 
in Anthropology 1902-1903. From 1904-1906 he was a Research 
Assistant for the Carnegie Institution. While at Columbia University, 
Dr. Jones made several expeditions for this Museum, returning with 
collections and data from the Ojibway, Sauk and Fox Indians. 
These collections are quite complete, those from the various divisions 
of the Ojibway containing a large series of birch bark charts and song 
records used in religious societies peculiar to these and related tribes. 
His chief work, however, was a study of the various Algonkin dialects 
spoken by the Ojibway, Fox and Kickapoo. Born of a mixed blood 
Sauk mother and reared by his maternal grandmother, he acquired one 
Algonkin dialect and gained an insight into Indian life not otherwise 
easily obtained. His published works include a volume of myths under 
the title, “Fox Texts,” issued by the American Ethnological Society; 
a general discussion of Ojibway culture, published by the Department 
of Education, Toronto, Ont.; and “The Algonkin Manitou,” in the 
Journal of American Folk-Lore. As these represented but a small part 
of the data collected by him, now buried in his notes, it is no adequate 
measure of his work. He had a knowledge and grasp of the ethnological 
problems centering around the central Algonkin tribes, all his own, and 
it was his intention after a short journey to the Philippines, again to 
take up the Algonkin problem as his life work. 


124 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


Aside from scientific worth and attainments, Dr. Jones had a char- 
acter and personality that endeared him to many in all walks of life. 
He was unassuming and modest, yet withal sincere and governed by a 
high sense of honor and duty. He had a rare sense of balance and 
proportion that enabled him to meet with sympathy every upright man 
on his own horizon. Perhaps this is why he had so many friends in such 
varied walks of life. 

CLARK WISSLER. 


THE EARTH AND THE SUN. 


N exhibit making clear the cause of day and night, of the differ- 
ences of local time and of the succession of the seasons is shown - 
in the accompanying photograph. A four-foot globe, standing 

for the earth, is regulated to rotate on its axis and to revolve in its orbit 
around the sun. ‘he circular railing inclosing the exhibit and con- 
spicuously marked with the months and days of the year indicates the 
orbit; a strong beam from an electric stereopticon represents the light 
and heat from the sun. 

When the visitor approaches this exhibit, he sees no motion except 
the regular swinging of the pendulum of the clock-work that causes the 
globe’s rotation. A short period of watching, however, convinces him 
that the globe is moving with the passage of the minutes to bring places 
most directly in the rays of the sun into the full light of noon time, regions 
west of these into morning hours, regions east toward the time for the 


‘ , 


‘setting of the sun.” ‘The shadow of a line (in front of the lens of the 
stereopticon) is cast on the globe from pole to pole to mark the noon 
hour for the different localities, as one after another, from east to west, 
they reach and pass it; while the time for New York City is recorded 
continually, as the fifteen-minute sub-divisions on the equator of the 
globe approach and leave behind this same line shadow. 

The location of the earth in its orbit at any day of the year and the 
inclination of the earth’s axis are represented as they occur in the heavens. 
This exhibit differs from that of the Solar System in the Foyer in that 
little attention is given to proportional distances and dimensions. It is 
located, at present, in the Central Hall of the Second Floor, awaiting the 
construction of a Hall of Cosmology. 


(‘FOZ ON) “AOO], puodeg ‘qeET [eayueg 


‘SNOSVAS 3O SOSNVHO SHL OGNV LHDIN GNV AVG 40 3SNVO SHL SLVYLSNOWA]G OL T300ON 


126 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


THE PHILIPPINE EXHIBITION. 


HE Philippine Hall is dismantled and the Philippine Exhibit 
prepared at the request of the United States War Department, 
has disappeared from the Museum to reappear in Seattle on 

the opening day of the Alaska-Yukon-Pacific Exposition. There, 
given the same form that it had here, the same unity of idea, the same 
harmony of color and decorative effects, it will remain in the Philippine 
Building of the Exposition from June 1 until October 16, after which it 
will return to be given permanent installation in the Museum. 

It is but little more than ten years ago that the Filipinos were in 
insurrection against Spanish rule. "They had known nothing of freedom 
for nearly four hundred years, while this period of paternal government 
had civilized them and made them feel equipped for freedom. Not 
only had they no voice in the government, they had practically as little 
control over Philippine trade. Their tobacco industry was a State 
monopoly; their foreign commerce catered to Spanish interests and the 
merchants of Seville. As to education, there was but one teacher to 
every four thousand of population. ‘The Filipinos had not even a me- 
dium of communication with Spanish authority, for the agents of the 
church in whose hands rested the management of schools, had kept the 
Spanish language out of the curriculum in order to retain their power as 
intermediaries between the people and the government. 

Then came American occupation in December, 1898; and, despite 
the best efforts of the American government, the story of the Filipinos 
in the years immediately following remained in many respects a sorry 
one. With lack of understanding of English, with no knowledge of 
America as a conquering nation, it was difficult indeed for even the most 
enlightened of the tribes to look upon the American military governor 
and the American army as friends instead of enemies. Guerilla warfare 
was added to the ravages of the previous war and continued until 1902. 
Rice fields were left to cogon grass and weeds; robber bands multiplied. 
In addition, typhoons damaged the hemp plantations; the locust plague 
destroyed crops; a ‘‘rinderpest”’ killed off the draft cattle; while cholera 
and various tropical diseases brought dread results to the Filipinos 
themselves. 

Slowly out of the blackness of these years came trust in the American 


government and a radical change in conditions. Children and teachers 


‘(ydeaSojoyd ut yYystt 4B SUIMOYsS) Sosvo oy} 9AOQE [[BY oy 
Surpunozms sowuoredsuvsy JO soos aJoN “UOIIsodxpy oyToRg-UOyN A-BYSLTY IY} OF peddrys pue peyord ue ‘ummosnyy oy} ye dn yog 


“LIGIHXS SNIiddIWIHd J3HL SO M3IA 1VYAN3S LG 


'dNOYD LOYOS| 861 


THE PHEIPPINE EXHIBITION 129 


alike were glad to be taught English by the soldiers, who entered the 
schools at once and carried on the work until the arrival of one thousand 
teachers from the United States in 1900. The Filipinos also found 
themselves in possession of a share in the government, not only in the 
cities and provinces where two-thirds of the officials were elected by the 
people’s vote, but also in the central government, three Filipinos and 
four Americans comprising the Philippine Commission. ‘They gained 
practical ideas at the government experimental farms where they flocked 
in hundreds to see modern machinery and methods applied to the 
growing of Philippine crops. Each man learned that he could cut 
lumber free of charge from the public forests to build a substantial house 
and a boat. Many hundreds of Filipinos gained work and good wages 
in the construction of the new roads and railroads. Many an inland 
farmer found routes opened by which he could market his produce. 
The lepers and their friends realized that the homes provided at the 
Culion Island Leper Colony were better than any they had ever known. 
Prisoners from Manila appreciated the fact that they were made “colo- 
nists” on parole at Iwahig, with opportunity to work in the fields and 
earn the privilege of being joined by their families. 

When these facts are borne in mind, the Philippine Exhibit assumes 
new interest. It shows not only what the Filipinos were, and what 
Philippine agriculture and commerce were, under Spanish rule, but also 
what they are under American influence. It proclaims emphatically 
that progress has been the keynote of life in the Philippines in these ten 
years, despite calamities, and it suggests that in the future the prosperity 
of the Philippine people is to be limited only by the great productive 
capacity of the islands. 

The first section of the exhibit shows Negrito and Igorot huts with 
accompanying life-size figures represented in the work of making fire, 
carrying baskets of food, cleaning rice and weaving. ‘The second section 
leads from these most primitive tribes through the Moro and other lesser 
tribes to the Tagalog and Visayan groups, the most highly civilized of the 
Malayan Christian Filipinos. The cases are filled with metal work, 
with pottery and basketry and with beautiful cloths woven from hemp, 
pineapple fibre and silk; the pillars carry weapons of many kinds, 
fishing and hunting outfits, busts of natives, and relief maps showing 
the localities occupied in the islands by each tribe. 

Continually, however, the attention of the visitor is caught by the 


130 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


colored transparencies that surround the entire hall in a bamboo trellis 
above the cases and some distance from the walls. ‘The method here 
used of closely incorporating transparencies with the material part of an 
exhibit is an innova‘ion in. museum instailation and a most effective one, 
not only for the accurate telling of facts but in general artistic result as 
well. In perhaps no other way could the Filipino people and their 
activities have been made so vivid; but the pictures do more than bring 
the people definitely before the eye, they give to a certain extent the 
atmosphere of the islands; they show the beauty of Philippine forests 
and rivers, the picturesqueness of the rice terraces that cover the moun- 
tain slopes, the difficulties of the mountain trails, and the sweep of 
typhoons over palms and sea. 

There are many other decorative effects which also tend to give 
unity and meaning to the exhibition. Fish nets and hemp fibre connect 
the pillars to shut off a middle aisle, an open space except for seats con- 
structed of Philippine woods and bamboo and of the stocks formerly 
in use in the market places of Manila. At the center of the hall a ro- 
tunda is made of large Philippine palm trunks around which are stacked 
Filipino guns, surrendered during that six months after President 
McKinley’s reélection in 1900 when more men gave up their guns in 
the islands than during any similar period in the history of war. 
Swung conspicuously in the center of this rotunda is one of the most 
charming features of the exhibit, a strange outrigger boat so typical of 
the small craft in the far east, containing a Moro youth, paddle in hand. 

The third and fourth sections of the exhibit illustrate the Philippines 
under American influence, the former covering agricultural and com- 
mercial life, the latter, educational and political. Here it is that such 
significant facts as the following are concretely set forth: 

Philippine coal promises to be sufficient in the future for the 
needs of the islands. 

Philippine forests contain 665 kinds of trees and cover 48,112,920 
acres. ‘This fact is emphasized by a wainscoting of Philippine woods 
surrounding the entire exhibition hall, representing the largest and 
most authoritative collection in the world. 

There were 428 miles of standard gauge railroad in operation at 
the close of 1908, and four years more will give the islands a total 


gauge track 


of 1000 miles, whereas only about 120 miles of narrow g 


existed at the close of Spanish rule. 


NEWS NOTES 131 


Under the Americans 3506 primary schools have been opened, 
which number added to the 726 existing in Spanish times gives a 
total of 4,232 at present in the islands. 

The cultivation of rice has latterly increased to such an extent 
that in 1907 there had to be brought into the islands from foreign 
countries only about one-third of the amount imported in 1903. 

The Philippines are a commercial center for half the population 
of the globe. The total amount of produce sent out from the 
islands in 1907 was $33,097,867, and the total amount imported 
was $30,453,810, as compared respectively with $14,846,582 and 
$19,192,986 in 1899. 

The most important fact developed in the Philippine Exhibit, out- 
side of the increased prosperity of the islands, is that under American 
influence the Filipinos are eagerly taking the steps offered toward self- 
government and self support: that there is administration of justice in 
the islands and the people are engaged in peaceful pursuits, that the 
United States is not expending any money to assist the Philippine goy- 
ernment or the Filipinos except in so far as the appropriations for Army 
and Navy are in part expended in the islands. 

One other fact, however, is certain to stand out clearly before every 
thinking visitor to the Philippine Building at Seattle, which is, that the 
American record in the Philippines is one of which the world will be 
proud, when this record takes its place in the history of nations. 


MUSEUM NEWS NOTES. 
SES the last issue of the JournaL the following persons have 


been elected members of the Museum: Life Members, MEssrs. 

FREDERICK T. vAN BEUREN, Karu Hutrer, NATHANIEL T. 
Kipper, CHar es B. PENROSE and GreorGE D. Pratr; Mes. OLIVER 
G. JENNINGS, JoHN INNES Kane and SAMUEL LAWRENCE, and MiIssEs 
P. C. Sworps and ANNE THomson; Annual Members, Mgssrs. J. R. 
BraDey, CuHas. W. Burroucus, Louis C. CLark, Wm. CRAWFORD, 
Rost. H. Ener, Henry P. Farrpanks, Grorce R. Feartnc, Harry 
L. Ferauson, ARNOLD Hacug, H. H. Hotiistrer, Marc Kiaw, ALFRED 
G. Mayer, Henry Mercatre, Casimir DE R. Moore, WIituiam E. 
NicHots, GrorGceE E. Potitocx, THomas R. Procror, H. CAstmir DE 
Rua, A. W. Rosstrer, THos. RowLanpD, CHARLES W. SaBsin, HENRY 


132 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


W. SHOEMAKER, F. M. SmirH, Howarp VAN SINDEREN, FREDERICK 
C. Waucorr, Horatio WALKER and WILFRED J. WorcEsTER; MMeEs. 
W. RaTHBONE Bacon, Ouiver H. P. Betmont, M. M. van BEeuREN, 
SAMUEL P. BLacpEN, NaTHALIE Bonner, P. H. Burier, Livian Gi- 
LETTE Cook, CLARENCE W. DoLan, THomas Ewina, JR., OGDEN H. 
Hammonp, H. M. Harriman, J.C. HAaveMeYER, G. G. Haven, RicHarD 
Marcu Hor, H. K. Knapp, Lewis Cass Lepyarp, Paut Morron, B. 
C. Rigas, Gkorcr M. Turrie and ANNA WoERISHOFFER, and MissEs 
Mary Benson, Marcarer E. Gare, Avice E. Srrone and EwWERETTA 
C. WHITNEY. 


PRESIDENT Osporn has recently been elected one of the twenty-five 
foreign members of the Zodlogical Society of London and an Honorary 
Member of the Royal Academy of Sweden. 


Proressor H. E. Crampron, Curator of Invertebrate Zodlogy 
leaves New York early in May for an absence of eight months on an 
expedition to the South Seas for the purpose of continuing his important 
studies on the variation and distribution of terrestrial snails, a work 
which he began in 1906 for this Museum and continued in 1907 and 
1908 under a grant from the Carnegie Institution. Professor Crampton 
will devote most of his time to the Society Islands, the Cook Islands, 
the North Island of New Zealand, Samoa and Hawaii. 


A RECENT letter from Mr. William B. Richardson, collecting for the 
Museum in Nicaragua, announces the shipment of a large collection of 
birds and mammals made during the last six months at points ranging 
in altitudes from 700 to 5,000 feet. Among the mammals are many 


species not included in his previous shipments. 

Dr. ALEXANDER PerRuNKEVITCH, Honorary Curator of Arachnida, 
will spend July and August collecting arachnida and other forms of 
insect life in Texas, Mexico and Guatemala. 

PusLic meetings of the New York Academy of Sciences and its 
Affhated Societies will be held at the Museum as usual during May. 


The American [luseum Journal 


Entered as second-class matter January 12, 1907, at the Post-office at Boston, Mass. 
Act of Congress, July 16, 1894. 


The American Museum Journal 


Vou. IX OCTOBER, 1909 No. 6 


THE ENRICHMENT OF OUR COLLECTIONS FROM ARCTIC 
AMERICA. 


UR members will be interested in the following telegrams which 
were exchanged immediately upon Commander Robert E. 
Peary’s getting in touch again with the civilized world. 


Indian Harbor via Cape Ray, N. F. 
September 6, 1909. 


AMERICAN MusEuM oF NaturaL History, 77th Street 
and Central Park West, New York City. 
The Pole is ours. Am bringing large amount material for Museum. 
PEARY. 


New York City, September 7, 1909. 
Commander Rosert E. PrEary, 
| Steamer “Roosevelt,” 
Sydney, Cape Breton, N.S. 

American Museum profoundly moved. Am delighted with your triumph 
at tlast. Mrs. Jesup joins me in congratulations. Your flag and route 
posted on our polar map this morning. 

OSBORN. 


At the time that this number of the Journal goes to press the eminent 
explorer has not yet arrived in New York, and the material which is 
awaited with so much interest is still on its way to the city. Our late presi- 
dent, Mr. Jesup, was deeply interested in Mr. Peary’s success, being an 
original member of the Peary Arctic Club and a generous contributor 
toward its objects. Largely through Mr. Jesup’s interest and influence 
Mr. Peary and the Peary Arctic Club have provided the Museum from 
previous expeditions with much ethnological material illustrating the 
Eskimo of the Smith Sound region, including summer and winter cloth- 
ing for men, women and children, personal ornaments, carvings, games 
and toys, lamps and other household utensils and furniture, sledges, 


133 


134 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


dogs and_ harness, bow drills for making fire and for boring, knives 
and other tools, bows and arrows and guns of European manufacture 
but native repair, kyaks or boats, together with drags, floats, harpoons, 
lances, spears and fishing lines. Some of this material together with a 
ereat floor map showing routes has been placed on exhibition on the 
eround floor of the new west wing. In the line of zodlogy, among other 
things Mr. Peary has brought back to the Museum important series 
of mammals, particularly musk oxen and caribou. The most valu- 
able single specimens resulting from the Peary expeditions are the three 
iron meteorites from Cape York which were brought from the Arctic 
regions in 1897 and are now on exhibition in the Foyer. The largest 
of these weighs 364 tons and is known as ‘‘Ahnighito,” the others are 


“The Woman” (6,000 pounds) and “The Dog” (897 pounds). 


MUSEUM NEWS NOTES. 


N account of the part that the Museum is taking in the Hudson- 
Fulton Celebration, the current number of the JOURNAL is 
devoted to the special Guide Leaflet which has been prepared 

to accompany the exhibition pertaining to the Indians of Manhattan 
Island and vicinity installed at the west end of the Hall of the Plains 
Indians (No. 102 of the ground floor). ‘This exhibition is permanent in 
character and is further illustrated by the volume on the Indians of New 
York State which has been prepared under Dr. Clark Wissler, Curator 
of Anthropology, as editor and issued by the Museum in its series of 
“ Anthropological Papers.” The Guide Leaflet in separate form may 
be obtained at the entrance to the Museum or on application to the 
librarian, and copies of the larger work may be obtained from the 
librarian. 


Tue cetacean gallery on the third floor of the East Wing (Hall No. 
306) was opened again to the public early in September, after bemg 
closed for some months on account of changes which were in progress. 
A broad frieze representing the ocean now extends around the room and 
forms an appropriate background for the marine mammals which are its 
chief exhibits. At the west end of the hall is a series of models repre- 
senting a school of dolphins at play in the water, while at the east end of 


NEWS NOTES 135 


the hall a school of porpoises is similarly installed. The models were 
prepared at the Museum from casts, drawings and photographs of actual 
specimens, and the frieze was painted by Mr. Albert Operti. 


PRESIDENT OSBORN attended the Darwin Memorial exercises at 
Christ College, Cambridge, during the latter part of June and was the 
spokesman of the scientists and scientific institutions of America in 
giving to the University of Cambridge a replica of the Couper bust of 
Darwin that was donated to the Museum last February by the New 
York Academy of Sciences. 


THE series of paintings illustrating the North Polar regions which 
has been made by the artist, Mr. F. A. Stokes, has been completed and 
forms the background of the entire Eskimo exhibit at the northern end 
of the north hall of the ground floor. These paintings will be made the 
subject of a special illustrated article in an early number of the JouRNAL. 


PROFESSOR BasHFroRD DEAN, Curator of Ichthyology and Herpetol- 
ogy, spent the months of June and July in Europe, where he visited the 
museums of Paris and London. Professor Dean has recently been 
made a Correspondent of the Natural History Museum of Paris. 


A RESTORATION of the jaws of the great shark Carcharodon angusti- 
dens which inhabited the waters of the American Atlantic Ocean during 
Eocene Tertiary time has been prepared under the direction of Professor 
Dean and mounted at the entrance to the fossil fish alcove at the south- 
east corner of the fourth floor. This restoration, which is 8 feet, 10 
inches across and has a spread of 5 feet, 8 inches, gives one a striking 
idea of the enormous size and fierce aspect which these ancient sharks 
must have possessed. 


Mr. R. C. ANpREws of the Department of Mammalogy left New York 
on August 25 for Manila to join the U. 8. Fish Commission ship “ Al- 
batross”’ for a cruise of eight or ten months in the Pacific Ocean, particu- 
larly among the islands along the western border from Borneo to central 
Japan. Mr. Andrews goes under an appointment by the U. S. Fish 
Commission, 


Proressor Henry E. Crampton, Curator of Invertebrate Zodlogy, 


156 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


who is continuing his extensive studies on the variation and distribution 
of terrestrial snails in the islands of the south Pacific is now in Samoa, 
after spending ten weeks in the Society Islands and about a month in 
New Zealand. Under date of July 18 he wrote from ‘Tahiti saying that 
the survey of the islands of ‘Tahiti and Moorea had then been completed 
with gratifying results, since several new varietal forms had been dis- 
covered, connecting types and localities previously unrelated. The 
ethnological results of the expedition were satisfactory also, on account 
of friendly reception from the old chiefs of the native tribes and through 
the occurrence of a great annual feast that brought together many groups 
of people from different districts. 


Durine the summer word came from Mr. V. Stefansson under date 
of February 8 giving a brief résumé of his trip westward from Flaxman 
Island along the coast to Wainwright Inlet, which is a week’s journey, 
say about one hundred miles, southwest of Point Barrow and back again 
to Cape Smythe near Point Barrow, where he spent a large part of the 
winter, while the sun was below the horizon. Not much can be done 
during the dark days of winter, but Mr. Stefansson improved the time 
at Cape Smythe, where he was the guest of Mr. Charles Brower, Director 
of the Cape Smythe Whaling and ‘Trading Company’s station, by making 
physical measurements of the Point Barrow Eskimo, compiling notes 
on their dialect and transcribing their folk-lore tales, in all of which much 
valuable assistance was received from Rev. H. R. Marsh, M. D., Presby- 
terian missionary and physician of the U.S. Bureau of Education, and 
Mr. C. W. Hawksworth, the resident school master. At the time of 
writing, Mr. Stefansson was planning to leave Point Barrow the latter 
part of February to go eastward to Cape Bathurst and beyond and was 
expecting to send a report from MacPherson near the mouth of the 
Mackenzie about the middle of July. 


Messrs. Herpert LanG and JAMES CHapin of the Department of 
Mammalogy sailed from New York May 8 for Antwerp, whence they 
proceeded on June 3 for the upper Congo district for the purpose of 
making a zodlogical survey of the basin of the Congo for the benefit of 
this Museum. ‘The Belgian authorities have provided every facility 
possible for the assistance of the expedition in attaining its objects and 
Messrs. Lang and Chapin with their outfit reached Matadi in the Belgian 


NEWS NOTES 137 


Congo on June 24. ‘They are now at or in the vicinity of Stanleyville 
in the highlands of the upper part of the river. This place is healthful 
and will be made the headquarters from which to set out on periodical 
excursions into the surrounding country, until the purposes of the ex- 
pedition have been accomplished. Mr. Lang reports that there is a 
poverty of desirable animal life, particularly birds, in the vicinity of 
Boma and Matadi, the region being one of barren hills. The Stanley- 
ville region, however, abounds in game, and the necessary permission 
has been secured for collecting all forms of animal life, including the right 
to capture two specimens of the rare okapi, which seems to be a member 
of the giraffe family. King Leopold has previously shown his interest in 
the Museum by the donation of a large collection illustrating the Congo 
peoples; and now the Belgian government, in addition to the unusual 
privileges granted, has contributed largely toward defraying the expenses 
of the present expedition. 


Mr. C. E. AKELEy, the noted collector of African big game, left New 
York August 17 for British East Africa, where he will continue studies 
begun during former expeditions and will make collections for the 
American Museum. ‘The expedition will require two years, and, 
besides obtaining a group of elephants to be mounted here amid a 
reproduction of their natural habitat, will devote much time to making 
a complete photographic record of the people, fauna and flora. A moy- 
ing picture camera has been taken for the purpose of getting pictures of 
army ants on the march and other movements of animals. 


THREE important additions have been made to the collection of 
meteorites in the Foyer: the 682-pound iron to be known as Guffey, 
but as yet undescribed, the section of Gibeon (West Africa) which was 
secured by the Museum last year, as noted in the JourNaL for April, 
1908, and a 20-pound mass of the aérclite ‘‘ Modoc,” which is the largest 
piece of this fall that has been found and was acquired by the Museum 
in January of this year. 


THE upright cases in the gallery of the East Wing (third floor, No. 
306) are in process of rearrangement to illustrate in diagrammatic fashion 
evolution among living mammals and relationship with fossil forms. 
This is done by means of wedge-shaped cores within the cases around 


138 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


the bottom of which horizontal bands of color represent Cretaceous and 
the great subdivisions of Tertiary time, the space above the bands being 
devoted to the installation of mounted specimens illustrating the princi- 
pal subdivisions of mammals. Converging lines extend downward, 
meeting in the band standing for the geological period in which the zo06- 
logical group is known or supposed to have originated. Many difficulties 
surround this effort at graphically representing a natural classification, 
hence the present scheme can only be regarded as an experiment subject 
to modification. 


Ar the May meeting of the Board of Trustees two classes of member- 
ship were added to the Museum. Benefactors are persons contributing 
or bequeathing $50,000 in cash or securities, and Sustaining Members 
are those who contribute $25 annually to the funds of the institution. 


SINCE our last issue the following persons have been elected to mem- 
bership in the Museum: Parron, Mrs. ANDREW CARNEGIE; Fellows, 
Mrs. Henry O. Havemeyer, and Misses CAROLINE PHELPS STOKES 
and Oxrivia E. Pueitps Strokes; Honorary Fellow, Baron Lupovic 
Moncueur; Life Members, Doctors JoHN HENDLEY BARNHART 
and CarroLt Dunnam, Messrs. Witt1am G. Dr Wirt, Dante B. 
Frearina, J. Horace Harpine, FrepertcK DELANO HircH and ROBERT 
S. Woopwarp and Mrs. Epwarp S. Harkness; Sustaining Members, 
Mes. CLARENCE H. Mackay and M. Orme Witson; Annual Members, 
Messrs. GrorcE J. Bascom, NatHaNn D. Biti, CLirrorp V. Brokaw, 
FRANKLIN Q. Brown, GEORGE S. CLAPP, CLARENCE M. Criark, G. D. 
CocHRAN, J. CLARENCE Davies, DanieL EpGar, JoHN W. EpMONDs, 
L. C. Hanna, Gero. L. INcRanaAM, Witi1AM H. Ketiy, Davip KEPPEL, 
LeRoy McKm, Epwin O. Meyer, Rosert B. Meyer, A. PaGEn- 
STECHER, CHas. W. Parsons, G. RAMSPERGER, J. G. TIMOLAT, JOHN 
R. Torren, Etmer R. Vacror and W. A. WHITE, GEN. ALEXANDER 
SHaLer, Rev.-J. L. ZABRISKIE, A. ALEXANDER SmitH, M. D., Muss. 
JosepH S. AUERBACH, Ett BERNHEIM, URBAN H. Brovuautron, EDWIN 
M. Butkuey, Danie, C. Frencu, Witiiam E. Isexin, Winitiam M. 
Kinestanp, ANGELINE J. Krecu, S. Neustapt, Marion STORY, 
Ropert E. Wesrcorr, Ricoarp H. Wititams and Francis DANA 
WInstow and Misses Carouine Harriot, IRENE Lewisonn, Faire 
Moore, Marton Mort, Giapys F. Warersury, L. WHEELER and 
Dorotuy P. Watney. 


LECTURES 139 


LECTURE ANNOUNCEMENTS. 


MEMBERS’ COURSE. 


The first course of lectures for the season 1909-1910 to Members of the 
Museum and persons holding complimentary tickets given them by Mem- 
bers will be given in November and December. 


PUPILS’ COURSE. 


The lectures to Public School children will be resumed in October. 


PEOPLE’S COURSE. 


Given in coéperation with the City Department of Education. 
Tuesday evenings at 8:15 o'clock. Doors open at 7:30. 


October 5.— Mr. Cares S. Buttock, “Uncle Sam’s Farm.”  Illus- 
trated by stereopticon views. 

October 12.— Mr. Epwarp Russett Perry, ‘‘The Pacific Northwest.” 
Illustrated by stereopticon views. 

October 19— Mr. Homer C. Bristox, “Northern California.’ Tlus- 
trated by stereopticon views. 

October 26.— Mr. Homer C. Bristotu, “Southern California.” Illustrated 
by stereopticon views. 


Saturday evenings at 8:15 o’clock. Doors open at 7:30. 
Dr. Witi1aM L. Estasrooke, of the College of the City of New York,— 
the first of a course of eleven illustrated lectures on inorganic chemistry. 


October 9.— “Physical and Chemical Change.” 
October 16.— ‘‘Oxygen and Ozone.” 

October 23.— “Hydrogen and Hydrogen Peroxide.”’ 
October 30.— “‘ Water.” 


Children are not admitted to these lectures, except on presentation of a 
Museum Member’s Card. 


140 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


MEETINGS OF SOCIETIES. 


Public meetings of the New York Academy of Sciences and Affiliated 
Societies are held at the Museum according to the following schedule: 
On Monday evenings, The New York Academy of Sciences: 
First Mondays, Section of Geology and Mineralogy ; 
Second Mondays, Section of Biology; 
Third Mondays, Section of Astronomy, Physics and Chemistry; 
Fourth Mondays, Section of Anthropology and Psychology. 


On Tuesday evenings, as announced: 
The Linnean Society of New York; 
The New York Entomological Society; 
The Torrey Botanical Club. 


On Wednesdays, as announced: 
The Horticultural Society of New York; 
The New York Mineralogical Club. 


On Friday evenings, as announced: 


The New York Microscopical Society. 


The programmes of the meetings of the respective organizations are pub- 
lished in the weekly Bulletin of the New York Academy of Sciences and 
sent to the members of the several societies. Members of the Museum on 
making request of the Director will be provided with the Bulletin as issued. 


The Indians of Manhattan Island 
and Vicinity 


A GUIDE TO THE 


mUDSON-FUETION. EXHIBLE 


AT THE 


AMERICAN MUSEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY 


No. 29 of the Museum Guide Leaflet Series. 


1 5S 


FIG. |. INWOOD ROCK-SHELTER, MANHATTAN. 


FIG. 2. FINCH’S ROCK HOUSE 


THE INDIANS OF MANHATTAN ISLAND AND VICINITY. 


By ALANSON SKINNER, 


Department of Anthropology. 


Introduction. 


senting the Indians of New York has been arranged in the West 

Hall, on the ground floor of the Museum. ‘The low, or table cases, 
contain implements of stone, bone, shell and other materials, found on 
Manhattan Island and in and around Greater New York,— implements 
once used by the Indians occupying this region. In the upright cases will 
be found ethnological objects, many of which are still in use among the 
surviving Iroquois Indians of New York State. This guide, therefore, 
refers chiefly to the remains of Indians found upon Manhattan Island and 
adjacent shores, examples of which are shown in the table cases. The 
location of the various cases may be seen from the accompanying plan. 

In using this guide, the visitor is advised to turn north, as he enters the 
exhibit and take a general view of the cases in the order designated; then it 
is suggested that he follow the discussion (pp. 14-36) of the various kinds of 
specimens found near New York City as he makes a second examination of 
the exhibits in the table cases. 

The Hudson-Fulton exhibition is designed to show the life of the Indians 
of New York City and vicinity in prehistoric times, when primitive conditions 
were as yet unchanged by the advent of European settlers. The objects 
shown have been collected by Museum expeditions sent for the purpose of 
excavating the ancient village, camp and burial sites of the Indians in several 
localities within the area indicated, and the exhibits have been prepared 
from the remains thus secured. The remnants of the tribes that once 
occupied the primeval forests of Greater New York have so long been scat- 
tered and lost that almost nothing can be obtained from them now. 

Beginning with the northern half of the exhibit, the visitor will find the 
first section of the upright case (1)+ devoted to a few specimens showing 
some of the more perishable articles formerly in use among the Delaware 
and Mohegan Indians of this immediate vicinity. Most of these have been 
collected from the scattered remnants of these people, or else were obtained 
f:om old families who, since the disappearance of the natives, preserved 


\ S a part of the Hudson-Fulton celebration, a special exhibit repre- 


1See diagram on page 193. 


143 


144 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


articles of Indian manufacture in their homes as curiosities. ‘The other 
portions of this case exhibit the clothing and weapons of the Iroquois. 

The first table section (2A) is devoted to an exhibition, as comprehensive 
as possible, showing the life of the natives in prehistoric times by means of 
specimens obtained from the ancient village and camp sites. Here may be 
seen bones of the various animals, fish and shell-fish upon which the Indians 
depended for subsistence; fragments of nuts, corn, roots and other food 
products preserved by charring and obtained from ancient fireplaces, and 
such implements as arrow points of antler and stone, net-sinkers of stone 
and stone hoes for tilling the fields — all illustrative of primitive methods of 
hunting and agriculture. Implements exhibited in the same case show the 
preparation of animal and vegetable food with primitive utensils, while 
close by are tools used by the Indians in preparing skins. ‘The manufactures 
of the Indians are illustrated in the immediately adjacent section (2B). 
A progressive series of implements shows the making of an arrow point from 
a simple quartz pebble such as might be picked up anywhere on the shore, 
with the various stages leading to the finished point; the tools employed are 
also exhibited. Implements of stone for pecking, grooving and polishing; 
hatchets and axes; pottery fragments, and household utensils, such as 
hammers, axes, adzes and gouges, will be found at hand. 

In the other side of this table case (2B) there is an exhibit from Man- 
hattan Island, made up of specimens principally collected by Mr. Alexander 
C. Chenoweth in the rock-shelters and village sites at Inwood, showing as 
fully as possible the life of the prehistoric Manhattan Indians. The exhibit 
illustrating, by means of models, the manufacture of pottery is especially 
noteworthy. From the appearance of fragments now to be found on the 
sites of the ancient Indian villages of this vicinity and the methods of modern 
Indian pottery makers, we may safely conclude that most, if not all, of the 
earthenware manufactured in this locality was made by the “coil” process, 
which consisted of the following steps. The Indians first secured clay of a 
suitable quality, which was mixed with pounded shell or stones to make it 
tougher and more durable. It was then worked into long rolls, and the 
Indian, beginning at the bottom, worked the pot up by adding coil after coil, 
blending or smoothing the coils with a smooth stone until they did not show 
from either the interior or exterior surface. ‘The potter’s wheel was not 
known to the aborigines in the olden days. When the pot was completed, 
it was decorated by stamping or incising designs about the exterior of the rim. 

In the next table case (3A) are to be seen implements and remains from 
the shell heaps marking the long-forgotten Indian villages at Shinnecock 
Hills, Long Island. This exhibit, which is one of the most complete of its 
kind, gives a rather adequate picture of the ancient life of these people 


SKINNER, INDIANS OF MANHATTAN ISLAND 145 


and is especially valuable for the number and variety of primitive manu- 
factures shown. One of the most interesting of the sections demonstrates, 
by means of a series of specimens, the primitive methods of cutting bone and 
antler employed by these Indians. Bone was cut by notching or grooving 
it with a stone knife or flake and then breaking it at the groove. Antler 
was worked in the same way, but it is very probable that the Indians boiled 
antler in order to make it more pliable and easily cut. 

In the western side of this case (3B) there is a series of specimens 
collected from an ancient Indian village situated on the site of the Parade 
Ground at Van Cortlandt Park. In the adjacent section some specimens 
from Long Island in general are shown. 

The upright case (4A) at the end contains an exhibit from the Iroquois 
Indians of New York State, and the small wall case (6) on the side shows 
a section of a shell heap with a map showing the location of most of the 


Pe Pit Ash- bed 
tas Wy (abel ve w\ MAT) Serere RRO Ly ely 


ve eT a uu at ms ee is . urface Soil 
a ~ Ue . a a oe iti = ie Shells and 


\ \S\ 


FIG. 3. DIAGRAM OF A TYPICAL SHELL DEPOSIT. 


we 


Indian villages of Greater New York and vicinity, as well as photographs 
and labels describing the opening and excavation of the sites. Specimens 
typical of those found in the shell heaps are also exhibited. 

Of all the traces left by the aborigines along the New York seacoast, 
the most abundant and familiar are the shell heaps — the beds of refuse 
marking the sites of ancient villages, camps and isolated wigwams. Wher- 
ever the fresh water joins the salt and especially where open water for fishing, 
a creek with its clam beds and a spring for drinking come together in happy 
combination, there is generally to be found some such evidence of Indian 
occupation, unless, as is often the case, settlement and improvement have 
buried deep the shells or carted them away. 

The typical “shell heap” is not a heap at all, for leaf mold, the wash 
from neighboring high ground and often cultivation have made it level with 
its surroundings (Fig. 3). Very often, unless the land be plowed, no shells 
whatever show on the surface, and the only way of finding out the conditions 


146 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


of things below the sod is to test with a spade or a crowbar. If shells are 
present, their crunching soon gives notice of the fact. Sometimes shell 
heaps have been located by shells thrown from mole and woodchuck bur- 
rows, or by outcropping in gullies washed by the rain, or banks broken 
down by the surf. ‘They are generally located near some creek or bay on 
low but dry ground, preferably with an eastern or southern exposure, and, 
as before mentioned, not far from drinking water. Some have been found 
fronting on the open Sound, but such cases are rare. ‘These deposits con- 
sist of large quantities of decayed oyster, clam and other marine shells 
mixed with stained earth, with here and there ashes, charcoal and _ fire- 
broken stones to mark the spots where ancient camp fires blazed. Among 


/ LN < 


MW 


Black earth 


| ‘Black earth 


=<9= 
i: ———— 
rN 


jeaeh=8: 
js 7 : 
{AAT 


Sa iS 


Ss 


SSS SS 
. = == —— 
\ SS SS Z 
\Y eee \\ 
SN MAA \\ 


FG (GROSS sSECTION ORVATSHEEE Pili. 


the shells are usually scattered antlers of deer, fish bones, bones of animals 
and birds split for the marrow, quantities of pottery fragments, and broken 
implements, in short, the imperishable part of the camp refuse left by the 
Indians. Now and then, perfect implements and ornaments that had been 
carelessly lost in the rubbish or hidden for safe-keeping are discovered. 
Little did the Indian think, as he laid away his little hoard, that his handi- 
work would never see light again until he and his people had long been gone 
and forgotten. 

Shell heaps vary from a few inches to four feet in depth, and in area from 
all depending on the length of time 


a few square yards to several acres 
the settlement was occupied and the number of dwellings comprising it. 
Deep shell heaps are often divided into layers, the lowest of which are, of 


SKINNER, INDIANS OF MANHATTAN ISLAND 147 


course, the oldest. Under and near most of these deposits may be found 
scattered “pits” or fire holes, which are bowl-shaped depressions in the 
ground filled with layers of stained earth, shells and other refuse, with an 
occasional layer of ashes. Some pits are as large as ten feet wide by six 
feet deep, but the average is four feet deep by three feet wide. It is sup- 
posed that they were used as ovens or steaming holes and afterwards filled up 
with refuse (Fig. 4). Some contain human skeletons, which may have been 
interred in them during the winter season when grave digging was impossi- 


‘i 
2, ts 
ae 
elf gy 
Ge 2 aw , 
: CLs 


FIG. 5. MAP GiVING THE LOCATIONS OF SHELL DEPOSITS. 
Those marked + have been explored by the Museum, 


ble. Pits as a rule, contain more of interest than the ordinary shell layer. 
The closely packed regular masses of shells form a covering which tends to 
preserve bone implements, charred corn and such perishable articles from 
decay in a way that the looser shells of the general layers fail to do. 

Shell heaps, while abundant along the seacoast, are seldom found inland, 
except on salt creeks or other streams having access to salt water. They 
may be seen all along the east shore of the Hudson River at more or less 


148 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


frequent intervals up as far as Peekskill, and on Croton Point and between 
Nyack and Hook Mountain on the west shore they attain considerable size. 
There are a few small deposits, however, composed mainly of brook clams 
(Unio) situated on fresh water lakes in the interior of Westchester County. 
There are many shell heaps on Staten Island. Shell heaps occur or did 
occur on Constable Hook, New Jersey, and at intervals between there and 
Jersey City along the western shore of New York Bay. The accompanying 
map (Fig. 5) gives the location of the important known shell deposits of the 
vicinity of New York City. 


FIG. 6. GRAVE OF SKELETONS WITH ARROW POINTS. 


~On the opposite side (4B) of the upright case, the Iroquois exhibition is 
continued, but the last section is devoted to a small exhibit showing the 
manufacture of wampum by the Indians of Long Island with prehistoric 
implements and a number of specimens of wampum belts and strings col- 
lected from the Iroquois of New York and Canada. 

‘The wall case (5) at the western end of the room contains a group illus- 
trating the costumes of the Iroquois Indians of a period from about 1790 
to the present day. 

Beginning on the south side of the aisle, the easternmost upright case 


SKINNER, INDIANS OF MANHATTAN ISLAND 149 


(7) is devoted to the False Face Society of the Iroquois, while the table 
case (SA) immediately following contains objects from Westchester County 
and Staten Island. In these sections an interesting feature of aboriginal 
life is shown. Although most of the Indians of the vicinity of Greater New 
York did not place objects in the graves with their dead, some graves at 
Burial Ridge, Tottenville, Staten Island, when opened for the Museum in 
1895, were found to contain a great many interesting and valuable remains. 
With the skeleton of a child there was a great deposit of utensils, both fin- 
ished and unfinished ornaments, such as beads, pendants, and the like, a 
stone pipe and a number of other objects, while not far away the skeletons 
of three Indian warriors were exhumed (Fig. 6), in and among whose 
bones there were found, as shown in this section, twenty-three arrow points 
of stone, antler and bone (Fig. 7). 

This is an excellent exhibit indicating the use of the bow in Indian war- 
fare. The skeletons lay side by side with the legs flexed as shown in the 
illustration (Fig. 6). In the first skeleton, it was found that two points of 
antler and one of bone had pierced the body and lodged near the spinal col- 
umn. Another point of argillite had been driven between two ribs, forming 
a notch ineach. <A bone arrow point had struck the shoulder and was resting 
against the scapula. Among the bones of the right hand, an arrow point 
of antler was discovered, and there was a similar one near the left hand. 
Another antler point was lying in the sand just beneath the body and had, 
no doubt, dropped from it when the flesh wasted away. ‘The most inter- 
esting wound of all was one where an antler-tipped arrow had ploughed 
through one side of the body and fully one-third of the point had passed 
through one of the ribs, making a hole, where it remained, as smoothly as if 
drilled. The second body was also terribly injured. The left femur showed 
an elongated puncture near the lower end, probably made by an arrow 
point. Among the ribs was the tip of an antler point, and a yellow jasper 
one was among the ribs on the left side of the body. ‘Three other points 
were among the bones. ‘The third skeleton was likewise an example of old- 
time bow play. ‘There was an antler point among the ribs on the left side. 
The end of one of the fibule was shattered by a stone arrow point, and a 
second point had lodged between two ribs. Beneath the sternum was a 
flint point, and the right shoulder blade showed a fracture near the end, 
caused by a blow of some hand implement or an arrow. Near the base of 
the skull, the end of an antler arrow point was discovered, broken perhaps by 
its impact with the occiput. Two bone points were near the lower bones of 
the left leg. A second point was found upon search among the left ribs; 
under the vertebrae was the base of another antler point, and two broken 
points were found beneath the body. 


150 


FIG. 7. BONES PUNCTURED BY ARROW POINTS, FROM SKELETONS FOUND ON STATEN 
ISLAND. 


SKINNER, INDIANS OF MANHATTAN ISLAND | 151 


The position in which several of the points were found certainly speaks 
well for the great force which propelled them. ‘The long bows of the local 
Indians must indeed have been formidable weapons. ‘Taking into con- 
sideration the number of arrows which must have been imbedded in the 
bodies of the warriors, it is perhaps probable that the majority of the pro- 
jectiles were driven into the victims at close range after death. 

In the wall case (11) south of the exhibit will be found the model of a 
rock-shelter and typical objects found in such places. ‘These, as the;name 
implies, are protected spots in rocky ledges, where Indians once made more 
or less permanent places of abode. Many such shelters exist in the vicinity 
of New York, one or two having been discovered at Inwood, Manhattan 
(Fig. 1). The most important rock-shelter so far discovered is the so-called 


Yi yy, YA 
yy 


aS Betton | — e = & Ny /; /) 


Ce | 
LLL, 


FIG. 8. VERTICAL SECTION OF REFUSE IN FINCH’S ROCK HOUSE, ABOUT MIDWAY OF THE 
CAVE. 


Finch House (Fig. 2) reproduced in the model. The original is near Ar- 
' monk, Westchester County, New York. One point of special interest is the 
fact that the Finch shelter contained two layers bearing relics separated by 
sand as shown in the drawing (Fig. 8). As no pottery was found in the 
bottom layer, it has been inferred that we have here the remains of two 
different races of Indians, the older not yet advanced to the pottery-making 
stage. This conclusion, is, however, far from final, for the whole arrange- 
ment may be due to accident. 

The table case 8B contains objects selected from the Henry Booth 
collection illustrating the life of the Indians of the Upper Hudson. ‘They are 
especially interesting on account of the number of ceremonial “banner stones” 
found in that region, which are apparently not nearly so abundant any- 
where else in this vicinity. 


152 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


In the next table case the section 9A is devoted to the life history of some 
of the Iroquois tribes other than the Five Nations of western New York, 
and the following section (9B) shows, as well as possible, the culture of the 
Iroquois Indians of central New York and objects used by the Indians of 
New York State in general manufacture or obtained from the Europeans 
upon the advent of the settlers. In the upright case (10A) there is presented 
an exhibition of pottery vessels, all but one of which were found within the 
limits of Greater New York, and some implements from the Iroquois of the 
Mohawk Valley, besides material illustrating the societies of the Iroquois. 
On the other side, (10B), the entire case is filled with specimens from the 
Bolton and Calver collection from Manhattan Island, which will be more 
fully described below. 


The Types of Indian Relics found in and about New York City. 


Having now taken a general view of the exhibit, the visitor may be inter- 
ested in a study of the several kinds of relics found in this locality. As these 
types are somewhat different from those found in near-by regions, we con- 
clude that the Indians formerly living here had habits and customs different 
from those of their neighbors. For want of a better name, these long-extinct 
tribes have been called the New York Coastal Algonkin. ‘The term Algon- 
kin designates the language they spoke, while the adjective defines their 
habitat. 

In the term New York Coastal Algonkin, the writer includes the tribes 
along the coast from Tottenville, Staten Island, the extreme southern point 
of the state, to the Connecticut boundary on Long Island Sound, including 
to a certain extent the shores of New Jersey immediately adjacent to Staten 
and Manhattan Islands, the east bank of the Hudson River as far north as 
Yonkers, and exclusive of Long Island except the western end. From the 
examination of the remains of the New York Coastal Algonkin area preserved 
in many collections, both public and private, it beccmes obvious that the 
objects found may be roughly divided into three groups: articles of stone, 
articles of bone and antler, and articles of clay, shell and metal. The first 
group is, from the imperishable nature of its representatives, naturally the 
largest and comprises a number of sub-groups to be briefly described and 
commented upon in this paper. Examples of this type will be found in 
the table cases previously mentioned. For the following descriptions and 
historical notes the author has largely drawn on Mr. James Kk. Finch’s and 
his own contributions to Volume III of the “Anthropological Papers of the 
American Museum of Natural History” (New York, 1909). 


FIG. 9. TYPES OF ARROW POINTS. 


154 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


CHIPPED ARTICLES. 


Arrow Points (Fig. 9). Two general types may be recognized, and these 
are the stemmed or notched, and the triangular forms. ‘The former are by 
far the most abundant, and while these are usually made of the nearest 
local rock possessing the necessary conchoidal fracture, in some cases they 
are of material brought from a long distance. Specimens made of pink 
flint resembling stone from the Flint Ridge of Ohio, and of jasper found 
to the south of this region have been recorded. Blunt arrow points are 
rare, the Indians probably preferring wooden arrows for this type. Many 
of the so-called ‘‘blunt-points” found in collections, appear to be scrapers 
made over from broken arrow points of a large size. 

The triangular type has long been regarded by the local collectors of this 
vicinity as being the type used in war, the argument being that as it has no 
stem, it was necessarily but loosely fastened in its shaft and, if shot into 
the body, would be very liable to become detached and remain in the flesh 
if any attempt were made to withdraw it by tugging at the shaft. While 
it was no doubt perfectly possible to fasten a point of triangular shape to the 
shaft as firmly as a notched point, the discoveries of Mr. George H. Pepper at 
Tottenville, Staten Island, where twenty-three arrow points were found in 
and among the bones of three Indian skeletons, tend to strengthen this 
theory. While the majority were of bone or antler, all those made of stone 
were of this type, and indeed most of the bone points were also triangular 
in shape. However, it is well to bear in mind that arrow points of triangular 
type have been used for every purpose by all the early Iroquois tribes of 
New York. 

Spear Points and Knives (Fig. 10). None of the early accounts of con- 
temporary European writers seem to mention the use of spears (other than 
bone or antler-headed harpoons) by the Indians hereabouts, and it is prob- 
able that the larger arrow-point-like forms found were used as knives or 
cutting tools. ‘They are usually notched or stemmed, rarely triangular, and 
occasionally round or oval. ‘They vary in size, but it must be remembered 
that one tool may have had various uses, and that drills, knives and 
scrapers may often have been combined in one implement. 

Scrapers (Figs. 10 and 11). Scrapers were probably used in dressing 
skins, and in sharpening bone implements, woodworking and for various 
other purposes. ‘These are usually mere flint flakes chipped to an edge on 
one side. Nevertheless, notched and stemmed forms, requiring some care 
in their making do occur. Broken arrow points were occasionally chipped 
down to serve this purpose. A single serrated scraper has been found. 


SKINNER, INDIANS OF MANHATTAN ISLAND 


FIG. 10. KNIVES AND SCRAPERS 


£55 


156 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


These are very rare in both the Algonkian and Iroquoian areas of New 
England and the Middle Atlantic States. One very large stemmed scraper, 
of a type more common in the far west, also comes from this locality. 

Drills (Fig. 11). These are usually chipped tools presenting an elon- 
gated narrow blade and a considerably swollen or expanded base, suitable 
for grasping in the hand. In some cases the base was absent and those 
were probably hafted in wood. Specimens whose blades have a square 
or rectangular cross section are very rare. The finding of cores left in 
half-drilled objects shows the use of a hollow drill, and it has been suggested 
that a hard hollow reed used with sand and water on a soft stone would 
produce this effect. ‘To bear out this assertion, it has been reported that a 
half-drilled implement has been found (outside this area on the upper 
Hudson) in which the remains of the reed drill were found in the cavity left 


by its action. 


RovuGH STONE ARTICLES. 


Hammerstones. ‘These vary from simple pebbles picked up and used 
in the rough, showing merely a battered edge or edges acquired by use, to 
the pitted forms. They are generally mere pebbles with a pit pecked on two 
opposite sides, perhaps to aid in grasping with the thumb and forefinger. 
Some have battered edges, but many have not, suggesting, when round and 
regular, a use as gaming or “‘Chunké” stones, or as implements used only 
in pounding some soft substance. Hammerstones, pitted on one side only, 
and others with many pits on all sides, occur. These latter may have had 
some special use, and are not to be confounded with the large flat, slab-like 
stones having pits only on one side, found in other regions, and perhaps 
used as receptacles for holding nuts while cracking them. While these are 
common in the Iroquoian area, they are unknown here. 

Large stones, single or double pitted, resembling oversized hammer- 
stones occur, and these may have been used as anvils in chipping flint or 
for like purposes. 

Grooved clubs or mauls, also showing use as hammers are found. 
These are rare and are usually either rough pebbles, grooved for hafting, 
as in the case of the grooved axe, or grooved axes, the blades of which have 
become so battered, broken and rounded by wear as to preclude their 
further use for chopping. 

Net-sinkers. On all sites near the water, either salt or fresh, net-sinkers 
show the prevalence of fishing. ‘These are of two types. In one case a 
pebble is notched on opposite sides of either the long or broad axis; in the 
other a groove is pecked around the entire pebble in the same manner. ‘The 


FIG. 11. DRILLS, SCRAPERS AND OTHER OBJECTS 


158 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


latter type is comparatively scarce, as the former, being more easily and 
quickly made, was just as useful to the savage. The modern Cree and 
Ojibway, residing in the forests north of the Great Lakes, still use pebbles 
for this purpose, but those observed by the writer were not notched or worked 
in any way. Occasionally, sinkers notched on both axes are found in this 
region. 

Foes. ‘Vhese are usually ovoid implements, chipped from trap rock and 
sometimes notched to facilitate hafting, and sometimes not. They usually 
show a slight polish on the blade, caused by friction with the ground. This 
stone type of hoe is the form mentioned by early writers; but perhaps hoes of 
shell, bone or tortoise shell, and wood were used also. None of these, 
however, are still in existence. 

Fand Choppers. Pebbles chipped to an edge on one side, for use as 
hand choppers, occur. ‘These are occasionally pitted on both sides. 

Grooved Axes (Fig. 12). For the purposes of this paper, the writer, 
while aware that many grooved axes are well made and polished, has 
decided to include them under the head of “Rough Stone Articles,” as by 
far the greater majority of the grooved axes and celts from this region lack 
the polish and finish belonging to other articles later to be described. 
Grooved axes are of two sorts: a, those made of simple pebbles, merely 
modified by grooving and chipping or pecking an edge; and b, axes which 
have been pecked and worked all over and sometimes polished. ‘The latter 
(b) may be said to include: 

1. Groove encircling three sides of blade, one side flat. 

Ridged groove encircling three sides of blade, one side flat. 
Groove encircling three sides of blade, longitudinal groove on flat side. 
Groove encircling three sides of blade, longitudinal groove on flat 


ww 


side and opposite. 

5. Groove encircling blade. 

6. Ridged groove encircling blade. 

A seventh type, having a double groove encircling the blade, may occur 
in this territory, but has never been reported. A specimen from the Hudson 
River region, just north of the area here dwelt upon, is in the Henry Booth 
collection in this Museum. While most worked stone axes have been pecked 
into shape, a few have been fashioned by chipping, but these seem to be rare. 

Grooved axes were hafted in various ways. During the summer of 1908, 
the eastern Cree living in the vicinity of the southern end of Hudson Bay 
told the writer that their ancestors, who made and used such axes, hafted 
them by splitting a stick and setting the biade in it, then binding the handle 
together with deer-skin (probably rawhide) above and below the split. No 
specimens of the grooved axe in the original haft seem now to be extant 


SKINNER, INDIANS OF MANHATTAN ISLAND 


159 


TYPES OF STONE AXES AND CELTS, 


12, 


FIG 


160 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


from any locality in the East. From the battered appearance of the butts of 
these axes, it may have been that they were sometimes used in lieu of mauls or 
hammers. It is possible that they may have been used in war. It is gen- 
erally supposed that in cutting down trees, making dug-out canoes and other 
kinds of wood-working, fire was used as an adjunct to:the stone axe, the 
former being the active agent. The process of burning and charring having 
gone on sufficiently, the stone axe was used to remove the burned portion. 
However, some stone axes seem sharp enough to cut quite well without the 
aid of fire. 
Celts (Fig. 12). Ungrooved axes or hatchets, usually called celts, are 
frequent throughout this area; but are nowhere as abundant as the grooved 
axe, especially near the southern border of the region. ‘The grooved axe 
seems to have been the typical cutting and chopping tool of the local 
Algonkin. The widespread idea that the celt was sometimes used un- 
hafted as a skinning tool, has no historic proof, but may possibly have 
some foundation. "The Cree of the southern Hudson Bay region use an 
edged tool of bone for this purpose, a fact which is somewhat suggestive, 
although the implement differs in shape from the celt. Celts with one side 
flat and the other beveled to an edge may have been used as adzes. From 
the worn and hammered appearance of the polls of some celts, it is possible 
that many of these implements were used as wedges in splitting wood, after 
constant manipulation in their chopping capacity had permanently dulled 
their edges. 
The celts of this region are, as a general thing, poorly made, a pebble of 
suitable shape having an edge ground on it with little or no preliminary 
shaping. More rarely, however, they were carefully worked all over by 
pecking and polishing, as in the case of the grooved axe. 
In type, aside from the general division of rough and worked celts, we 
may add that most celts in this region have slightly rounded polls, the bit 
broader than the butt, although some exceptions have been found. ‘The 
forms are as follows: a, rough stone celts, pebbles with one end ground 
to an edge, but otherwise scarcely worked: and b, worked stone celts, which 
include the following: 
1. Wedge-shaped, poll narrower than bit, and angles rounded; common. 
2. Like number one, but with bit much broader than poll. Very rare. 
Cross-section oval. 

3. Like number one, but one side flat, other beveled at one end to make 
a cutting edge. 

4. Like number two, but with cutting edge flaring, broader than body. 
“Bell-mouthed type.” Very rare. 

North and west of this region, we find the Iroquois territory where most 


SKINNER, INDIANS OF MANHATTAN ISLAND | 161 


worked celts are angular, having almost invariably a rectangular cross section 
and squared butt. Types 1 and 3 also occur, but the celt with the rectangu- 
lar cross section seems most typical of the Iroquoian region. Many small 
celts, made of flat fragments or chips of stone, are also found in this area, 
and these could scarcely have had a use as chopping tools. 

In the Niagara watershed and extending eastward as far as the Genesee 
valley, an angular adze-like form having a trapezoidal cross section occurs. 
It is found principally in what was the territory of the Attiwandaronk, Kah- 


FIG. 13. A HAFTED CELT FROM A POND AT THORNDALE, DUTCHESS CO., N. Y. 


Length of celt 16.6 cm. 


Kwah, or Neutral Nation (an Iroquoian tribe, early annihilated by the Five 
Nations). It also-occurs, as has been stated, on the sites of villages of the 
Iroquois proper, but is not abundant. South of the Iroquois in central 
Pennsylvania, another form which does not occur in this region is the chipped 
celt, usually of flint or other hard stone. ‘This form is, however, frequent in 
the country about the headwaters of the Delaware. 

In the “American Anthropologist,’ Vol. 9, No. 2, p. 296 et seq., Mr. 
C. C. Willoughby has figured and described the celts of the New England 


162 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


region with remarks on the methods of hafting employed. ‘These seem to 
be two in number, and consist, in the case of the larger forms, of setting the 
blade through a hole in the end of a club-like handle, the butt or poll pro- 
jecting on one side and the blade on the other as in Fig. 13, found in the 
muck of a pond bottom at Thorndale, Dutchess County, New York, a region 
once in the Mahican territory. Smaller celts were set into a club-like handle, 
the butt resting in a hole or socket. 

Adzes. These seem to be of two kinds, the first and most simple being 
celt-like, but flat on one side, the other side being beveled to an edge on one 
side. ‘The second form differs in having a groove, which is not infre- 
quently ridged. Occasionally, adzes with two parallel grooves occur. ‘They 
were probably hafted by taking a stick at one end of which projected a 
short arm at right angles with the shaft, laying the flat side of the blade 
against this arm and binding it on with sinew, thongs or withes. The 
groove, of course, was of aid in securing the blade to the handle. Adzes 
of stone, hafted in this manner, have been obtained on the North Pacific 
coast. "The celt adze seems not uncommon, but the grooved adze is rare, 
neither form being nearly so abundant as in the New England region. 

Gouges. ‘The stone gouge is rare, and seems always to be a plain, 
single-bladed affair without the transverse grooves so frequently seen in 
New England specimens, and hereabouts is always easily distinguished 
from the adze. Less than half a dozen specimens have been seen by the 
writer from this entire area, although probably quite as much work in wood 
was done by the New York coastal Algonkin as by the New England Indians. 

Pestles. The long pestle occurs throughout the region of the Coastal 
Algonkin of New York, but is nowhere as abundant as in New England. 
They seem always to have been used with the wooden block mortar here- 
abouts, and. are mentioned by the early writers as part of the household 
equipment of the natives. They do not seem to have been used by the 
Iroquois to the north and west of this area either in early or later times. 
The wooden pestle of dumb-bell shape seems to have been preferred by 
them. The latter is used by the Canadian Delaware and may have taken 
the place of the long stone pestle to a great extent in this region. 

Mullers, Grinders, and Polishing Stones. These are frequent, and 
consist merely of rounded pebbles, shaped and worn by use, probably most 
often in crushing corn. They are mentioned by De Vries as being used by 
the Indians with a flat stone slab for grinding corn when traveling. Some 
seem to have been used for polishing stone implements, but it seems hard to 
draw the line, as the appearance gained from friction would be quite similar. 
Such mullers and their attendant slabs, used for preparing corn meal have 
been collected within a few years in use among the Oneida Iroquois of New 
York, one specimen being in the American Museum collection. 


SKINNER, INDIANS OF MANHATTAN ISLAND 1638 


Sinew Stones. These are pebbles showing grooves along the edges, 
popularly supposed to have been worn there by rubbing thongs and sinews 
across the edges to shape them. ‘They occur generally, but are not common. 

Stone Mortars. ‘These are common, but rather local, some sites having 
none at all, and others a good many. One locality on Staten Island is not- 
able for the numbers found there, whereas they are rare elsewhere in that 
vicinity. They may be divided into the following types: 

1. Portable mortar, hole on one side. 

Portable mortar, hole on both sides (New Jersey type). 
Portable slab mortar or metate, used on one or both sides. 

4. Bowlder mortar, one or more holes, immovable. 

The first two types are the most abundant, the third is not uncommon; 
but the fourth is very rare, only one or two being reported. As above stated, 
De Vries claims that the portable mortars were used in bread-making, while 
the Indians were traveling, but certainly the majority of those found are 
far too heavy for this purpose. 

Pigments and Paint-cups. Fragments of pigments such as graphite and 
limonite, showing the marks of scratching with scrapers, are found, which 
have apparently supplied the material for painting. Worked geodes are 
common on many sites. These show traces of chipping in some instances 
and may have been paint cups. ‘There is a tiny pestle-shaped pebble in the 
Museum collection from Westchester County, which is said to have been 
found with a geode of this type. The popular theory is that such geodes 
were used as “paint cups” and this seems probable. 

Stone Plummets. hese are very rare, in contrast to their abundance 
in the New England region. They consist usually of small worked egg- 
shaped stones, grooved at one end, probably for suspension. ‘The writer 
has seen but one from this area. heir use is problematic. 

Semilunar Knives. Knives of rubbed slate, similar in appearance to 
the “ulu” or woman’s knife of the Eskimo are found, though rarely, in this 
region. While sometimes ascribed to Eskimo influence or contact, it 1s 
possible that this form (which occurs throughout New England), judging 
by its distribution, may have been native to the eastern Algonkin also. ‘The 
eastern Cree still use knives of this type as scrapers. Like most other forms 
common in New England, it is less abundant in the southern part of this 
area. 

Stone Beads. Various pebbles generally perforated naturally are to be 
found on some sites, and may or may not have been used as beads or pend- 
ants. On Staten Island, at Watchogue, Mr. Isaiah Merrill once owned a 
number of square beads of pinkish steatite (?), all but one of which have 
been lost, and which he claims were found on his farm. 


oo 


164 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


PoLISHED STONE ARTICLES. 


Gorgets. "lwo types of the gorget occur. ‘These are the single-holed 
pendant form, which is the less abundant of the two, and the double-holed 
type. ‘The latter is flat, rectangular in shape and generally well polished. 
It usually has two perforations a short distance from the middle. ‘The 
modern Lenapé of Canada claim to have used these as hair ornaments. 
Probably the two-holed variety is typical of the Algonkian peoples of this 
region, the single-holed form being on the other hand, the most abundant 
on“old Iroquoian sites. Specimens of the latter have been obtained in use 
among the Canadian Iroquois, and some of them are in the Museum col- 
lections. 

Amulets. Certain problematic articles of the “bar” and even “bird 
amulet” type have been found, but these are probably exotic in origin and 
are not characteristic of the archxology of the region in question. 

Banner Stones. 'Vhese beautiful polished stone implements of unknown 
use may be divided into three great classes, with several sub-types as follows: 

1. Notched banner stones. 

2. Grooved banner stones. 

a. Groove on both sides. 

b. Groove on one side. 
3. Perforated banner stones. 

a. Plain. 

b. Butterfly. 

All three types seem equally abundant, but the notched banner stones 
appear to be the oldest form and occur under circumstances pointing to 
great relative antiquity. ‘They are found, however, on the more recent sites 
as well. Both notched and grooved banner stones are usually more rough 
in appearance than the perforated type, and the writer has never seen a 
polished specimen of the first class. On the other hand, the grooved va- 
riety frequently exhibits the high degree of finish characteristic of the per- 
forated forms. Banner stones grooved only on one side are less common 
than the other forms. While the latter class is generally made of siate, 
steatite or some similar soft and easily worked material the notched and 
grooved forms, especially the former, are often formed either from natu- 
rally-shaped pebbles or chipped roughly into shape. Implements, usually 
naturally-shaped stones with little working, without notches, grooves or 
perforations, but greatly resembling the notched and grooved banner stones 
in shape, are not infrequently found on aboriginal sites hereabouts and 
may have served as banner stones. ‘here seem to be neither records nor 
plausible theories as to their use. 


SKINNER, INDIANS OF MANHATTAN ISLAND 165 


Pipes. Stone pipes, invariably made of steatite, are very rare. Four 
types have been noted as follows: 

1. Monitor or platform pipe, platform not projecting before the bowl. 

2. Monitor or platform pipe, platform projecting before bowl, with or 
without tiny carved stem cr mouthpiece. Of the latter, one speci- 
men is known. 

3. Trumpet-shaped stone pipe. 

4. Rectangular stone pipe, human face carved on front of bowl. 

It may be remarked that more stone pipes have been reported from the 
Indian cemetery at Burial Ridge, Tottenville, Staten Island, than from all 
the rest of the area put together. ‘The second and third types are repre- 
sented by one specimen each from Burial Ridge and from nowhere else in 
this region. Four or five pipes of the first class have been found there as 
well. The last class is represented by a single specimen obtained by Mr. 
W. L. Calver at Inwood, Manhattan Island. Undoubtedly the clay pipe 
was the most common form used in this locality. 

Steatite Vessels. These are not at all abundant, though occurring almost 
everywhere. ‘They were doubtless all imported from New England, as there 
are no steatite quarries within the range of the New York Coastal Algonkin. 
The single form found is that common in the east, an oblong, fairly decp 
vessel with a lug, ear or handle at each end (Fig. 14j). Occasionally, such 
vessels are ornamented by rude incisions along the rim. 


ARTICLES OF CLAY. 


Pottery Pipes are common everywhere. ‘They are usually manufactured 
of a better quality of clay than that used for vessels, and bear fairly similar 
designs. They are susceptible of division into the following classes: 

1. Straight pipe, bowl expanding slightly. 

2. Bowl much larger than stem, leaving it at an angle of forty-five 

degrees. Stem round. 

3. Same as number 2, but stem angular and much flattened. 

4. Effigy pipes, (represented by a pottery human head apparently 
broken from a pipe bowl, obtained by Mr. M. It. Harrington at Port 
Washington, Long Island). 

The straight pipe seems to have been obtained only on Staten Island on 
the north shore in the region occupied by the Hackensack. While nowhere 
as abundant as upon the Iroquoian sites of central and western New York, the 
clay pipe is rather common and is a prominent feature in the coast culture of 
New York (Fig. 15a). It is more abundant perhaps in the southern part 


166 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


of the area, but this may well be due to the fact that data from this region 
are more easily accessible. The triangular-stemmed “trumpet” pipe so 
common on the Iroquoian sites is unknown in this region. 


PoTTreRY VESSELS. 


The pottery of this region may all be considered as being either the native 
Algonkian in type or showing Iroquoian influence with a third and inter- 
mediate variety. Algonkian vessels may be divided into the following 
groups according to shape: 

1. Conical, pointed bottom, slightly swollen sides, circumference 
largest at the mouth, — the typical Algonkian pot of this area, Fig. 14a. 

2. Like number 1, but much rounder and broader, Fig. 14b. 

3. Bottom pointed, sides slightly swollen, neck slightly constricted, 
Fig. 14e. 

4. Identical with number 2, except that just below the beginning of the 
neck, occur small raised lugs, ears or handles. This is rare from this area, 
Fig. 14d. 

5. Rounded bottom, somewhat constricted neck, lip sometimes flaring, 
or even turning down and back, Fig. 14e. 

The intermediate types are as follows: 

6 Rounded bottom, constricted neck, narrow raised rim or collar, 
Fig. 14f. 

7. Like number 6, but with sides more elongated and bottom more oval 
than round, heavier collar, generally notched angle, with or without a series 
of small humps or projections at intervals, Fig. 14g. 

The Iroquoian types are as follows: 

8. Mouth rounded, collar or rim heavy, with humps or peaks at intervals, 
angle notched, neck constricted and bottom rounded; can stand by itself, 
an unknown feature in local Algonkian vessels, Fig. 14h. 

9. Same as number 7, but with mouth square, and humps at every 
angle. Much less common than the preceding, Fig. 141. 

In size, the vessels range from small toy-like pots to jars of very large 
capacity. In general they appear to have been made by the coil process, 
and are tempered with pounded stone or fine gravel, mica or burned or 
pounded shell. Sherds showing tempering by fibre or some other substance 
that disappeared in firing are rarely found. When vessels were cracked or 
broken, a series of holes was bored opposite each other on either side of the 
break and the parts laced together, rendering the vessel capable of storing 
dry objects, at least. 


SKINNER, INDIANS OF MANHATTAN ISLAND _ 167 


Life forms are exceedingly rare in local ceramic art. From Manhattan 
Island and Van Cortlandt Park, there come a number of specimens show- 
ing incised human (?) faces. ‘This is not an uncommon form on Troquoian 
sites in central and western New York. On the Bowman’s Brook site at 
Mariner’s Harbor, Staten Island fragments of a typically Algonkian pot 

_were obtained which bore at intervals, rude raised faces. With the sole 
exception of a rather well-modeled clay face, apparently broken from the 


FIG. 14. POTTERY FORMS OF THE COASTAL ALGONKIN. 


bowl of a pipe (Fig. 15b) found at Port Washington, Long Island, by Mr. 
M. R. Harrington, this brief statement concludes the list of pottery life 
forms reported from this area, although others may yet be found here, 
since some interesting objects have been collected in immediately adjacent 
territory. ; 

The forms of decoration consist of stamping with a stamp, roulette or 
paddle, and incision (Figs. 16 and 17.) Occasionally, but very rarely, 


168 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


stucco work occurs. Under stamping we can enumerate the following 
processes: 

1. Impression with the rounded end of a stick (rare). 

2. Impression with the end of a quill, or hollow reed, leaving a circular 
depression with a tiny lump or nipple (rare) in the center. 

3. Impression with a section of a hollow reed, making a stamped circle 
(rare). 

4. Impression with finger nail (doubtful, but perhaps used on some 
sherds from Manhattan Island). 
5. Impression of the edge of a scallop shell. 
G. Impression with a carved bone, antler or wooden stamp. 
7. Impression of a cord-wrapped stick. 
8. Impression with roulette. 


FIG. 15. TYPICAL ALGONKIAN POTTERY PIPE AND FRAGMENT OF AN EFFIGY PIPE FROM 
PORT WASHINGTON, L. | 


Under the head or decoration by incision we can enumerate the following: 
9. Incised decoration, probably made with a stick. 
10. Incised decoration, possibly made with a flint object (only one 
specimen at hand). 
‘The paddle was frequently used to finish the sides and bottom of the pot 
by imparting an appearance of pressure with fabric when the clay was wet. 
11. Stueco. Occasionally, ridges of clay placed on the rim for orna- 
ment appear to have been added after the shaping of the vessel. 
Ornamentation is usually external, and vessels, either Algonkian or 
froquoian, are rarely ornamented below the rim, although occasionally the 
designs run part way down the side in the case of the Algonkian forms. 
Where decoration has been applied by one of the stamping processes, and 
more rarely by incision, it is sometimes continued over the lip or rim for an 
inch or less on the inside. ‘This only occurs in the typical Algonkian forms, 
and is never seen when incised ornamentation is used. The rims of Iro- 
quoian vessels are never ornamented on the interior, nor is stamping so 
frequently practised on vessels of this class. ‘The intermediate forms, at 
least the first of the two mentioned, are frequently ornamented on the interior 


169 


SKINNER, INDIANS OF MANHATTAN ISLAND 


8A 


Faaaanga 


Aaaa 


a~ 


WLS EVES VA CEP EVES 
Se ae Sa SR Je 
SQ. Dre). a ee ,_, —— a —- 
ie, he oe eer s LSD A LOMITA LEE LE 


FIG. 16. INCISED DESIGNS FROM POTTERY VESSELS. 


a, b, and d, designs from Iroquoian vessels: c, design from an Algonkian vessel; é, design 
from a vessel of the Iroquoian type from a Connecticut rock-shelter, introduced here for com- 


parison. 


170 | THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


of the lip. This internal decoration is much more common in the southern 
portion of this area than elsewhere in the vicinity. 

In design, we must of course, give up all thought of trying to obtain 
symbolism, if such there were, for there are no sources now left upon which 
to base our assumptions. Certain conventional types of decoration seem 
to have been in vogue, usually consisting in rows of stamped or incised paral- 
lel lines and much more rarely of dots regularly arranged in the same manner. 
Zigzag, chevron and “herring bone” patterns are the most common, but 
other angular forms occur, and rows of parallel lines encircling the vessel 
are sometimes to be found. Stamping and incision as decorative processes 
never seem to occur on the same vessel. Curvilinear decoration is exceed- 
ingly rare, and not enough material is at hand to show that patterns were 
used, possibly these were scrolls of some form. On account of the lack of 
material, it cannot be determined whether the designs on the Algonkian 


_————— 


il 


FIG. 17. INCISED DESIGNS FROM ALGONKIAN VESSELS. 


vessels differ from those on the Iroquoian, except in a very general and 
unsatisfactory way. 

The angle formed where the heavy rim or collar leaves the constricted 
neck of the Iroquoian vessel is almost invariably notched, and as such collars 
and angles do not occur on vessels of the true Algonkian type, this feature is 
necessarily absent from them. It is noticeable that Iroquoian vessels are 
usually decorated with incised designs, rather than stamped patterns. 

Pottery is found abundantly on the majority of the sites in this district; 
but, while very much more common than in the New England area, it does 
not equal in abundance that from the Iroquois country. It is rarely found 
buried in graves with skeletons as in the Iroquoian area; when sometimes 
found in graves, however, it is usually at some distance from the human 
remains and apparently not connected with them. Whole or nearly whole 
vessels are exceedingly rare and the number of those found up to date may 


SKINNER, INDIANS OF MANHATTAN ISLAND 171 


easily be counted upon the fingers. Potsherds taken from pits or shell 
heaps, where they have not been exposed to the action of the weather, are 
often as thickly covered with grease as when they were broken and cast aside. 


ARTICLES OF METAL. 


Beads. Beads of native metal, consisting simply of pieces of hammered 
sheet copper rolled into small tubes, have been found, but they are very 
rare. Copper salts, but no objects, were found upon the bones, especially 
on those of the head and neck, of a child’s skeleton at Burial Ridge, ‘Totten- 
ville, Staten Island, which seemed to predicate the use of copper beads. A 
great many beads of olivella shell, some of them discolored by copper salts, 
were found about the neck of the skeleton. A single celt of copper is said 
to have been found in Westchester County, probably on Croton Neck, 
slightly above the limit of the territory treated in this paper." 


ARTICLES OF SHELL. 


Wampum. Objects of shell are not at all common, and notwithstanding 
the coast region of New York was one of the best known localities for wam- 
pum manufacture on the continent, wampum beads are almost unknown 
from iocal sites. With the exception of completed beads, most of which may 
have been shipped into the interior, wampum may be found in all stages of 
manufacture. We refer to the white wampum, for traces of the “black” 
(blue) wampum made from the hard clam or quahog are so far not reported. 
The process of manufacture may be shown by shells with the outer whorls 
broken away in steps until the innermost solid column is reached, ground 
and polished at the end, and needing only cutting off into sections and per- 
forations to make the finished white wampum bead. These do not occur on 
all sites, though they have been found here and there throughout the region. 
Ninety-six conch shells with the outer whorls broken entirely away were 
found in a grave at Burial Ridge, Tottenville, Staten Island, about the head 
and neck of a skeleton. 

Pendants. Occasionally oyster and clam shells, found unworked save 
for perforations in them, may have been pendants or ornaments, but cer- 
tainly have little esthetic value. 

Scrapers. Clam shells seem to have been used as scrapers and some are 


1Native copper occurs in the New Jersey trap ridges, within a few miles of New York 
City, an important source in Colonial times being near Boundbrook 30 miles from the lower 
end of Manhattan Island, Bowlders of native copper occur in the glacial drift. Epivor. 


AZ THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 

occasionally found with one edge showing the effect of rubbing and wearing. 
‘These are rare, however. Some may have been pottery smoothers. Clam 
shells have been reported which contained central perforations and were 
identical in appearance with some shell pottery scrapers and smoothers col- 
lected by Mr. M. R. Harrington among the Catawba. Contemporary 
writers mention the use of knives made of shell. 

Pottery Tempering. ‘Vhis was sometimes done with calcined and pounded 
shells, but was uncommon, considering the abundance of the material at 
hand. Pounded stone or gravel seems to have been more favored. 

Pottery Stamps. ‘The corrugated edge of a scallop shell was frequently 
used as a stamp for pottery, as may be seen by examining the potsherds 
from this region. 


ARTICLES OF BONE AND ANTLER. 


Objects of bone and antler, while perhaps more abundant here than in 
New England, are far less plentiful in form and number than in the Iro- 
quoian area. Cut bones are frequent in most shell pits and heaps. ‘They 
were cut by grooving the bone partly through on all sides, probably with a 
flint knife, and breaking. 

Bone Awls. 'Vhese utensils are the most common of all bone articles 
in this region and are found in almost every part of the area. Some are 
merely sharpened slivers, but others show a considerable degree of work, 
and are well finished and polished. ‘They are usually made of deer or other 
inammal bone, but sometimes from the leg bones of birds. 

In some instances, the joint of the bone is left for a handle, but this is 
often cut off. Grooved, perforated or decorated bone awls are extremely 
rare in this region. While it is generally considered that these bone tools 
were used as awls in sewing leather, as by modern shoemakers, nevertheless, 
they may have served as forks in removing hot morsels from the pot or for a 
number of other purposes. ‘The latter supposition is supported by the 
abundance of bone awls found in some shell pits. ‘The northern Cree of 
the Hudson Bay region use a similar bone implement as the catching or 
striking pin in the ‘“‘cup and ball” game. 

Bone Needles. 'Vhese are rare, but found in most localities. ‘They are 
generally made of the curved ribs of mammals and are six or eight inches 
long, or even longer. ‘They are generally broken across the eye, which is 
usually midway between the ends. A few with the perforation at one end 
have been reported. 

Bone Arrow Points, usually hollow and conical in shape, have been found, 


SKINNER, INDIANS OF MANHATTAN ISLAND _ 173 


especially at ‘Tottenville, Staten Island, in the Burial Ridge. They are 
rather rare, but this may be due to the fact that conditions are not suitable for 
their preservation in most localities. Others are flat and triangular in 
shape. 

Harpoons. No actual barbed bone harpoons, such as occur in the 
Iroquois country have been reported from this region; although the writer 
has seen what appeared to be part of one from Shinnecock Hills, Long 
Island, whence comes a harpoon barb of bone, found by the writer, now 
in the Museum collection, which was apparently made to tie to a woodeu 
shaft. While neither of these forms seems to occur within this region, several 
naturally barbed spines from the tail of the sting-ray, found on the Bow- 
man’s Brook site, at Mariner’s Harbor, Staten Island, may have been used 
as harpoons or fish spears, for which purpose they were admirably suited by 
nature. Long, narrow, chipped stone arrow-heads are generally called 
“fish points”, but they do not seem peculiarly adapted for this purpose and 
the name is probably a misnomer. No bone fish hooks are reported from 
hereabouts, though suggested by early writers. 

Bone Beads and Tubes. While so abundant on Iroquoian sites, tubes 
and beads made of hollow bird or other animal bones, polished and cut 
in sections, are very rare here. 

Draw Shaves, or Beaming Tools, made of bone, and probably used for 
removing the hair from skins, were made by splitting the bone of a deer’s 
leg, leaving a sharp blade in the middle with the joints on either end as han- 
dles. The writer has seen none from this immediate region, but they are 
reported by Mr. M. R. Harrington. A number were obtained for the 
Museum by Mr. Ernst Volk in the Lenapé sites near Trenton, New Jersey. 
An implement, evidently made of the scapula of a deer, and perhaps used as a 
scraper, was found in a grave at Burial Ridge, Tottenville, Staten Island, by 
Mr. George H. Pepper. 

Worked Teeth. Perforated teeth of the bear, wolf and other animals, 
so abundant on Iroquoian sites never seem to be found here. Beavers’ 
teeth, cut and ground to an edge, occur, and may have been used as chisels, 
or primitive crooked knives, or both, as they were till recently by some of 
the eastern Canadian Algonkin. Other cut beaver teeth may have served 
as dice or counters in gaming. 

Turtle Shell Cups. "These are common, and consist merely of the bony 
carapace of the box turtle (Tranene caroline), scraped and cleaned inside, 
the ribs being cut away from the covering to finish the utensil for use. 

Antler Implements. Deer antlers and fragments of antler, worked and 
unworked, occur in all shell heaps and pits. When whole antlers are found, 
they usually show at the base the marks of the axe or other implement used 


174 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


to detach them from the skull. Cut antler prongs, prongs broken from the 
main shaft and others partly hollowed and sharpened show the process of 
manufacture of antler arrow points. ‘These are characteristic of this area 
and are usually conical in shape, hollowed to receive the shaft, and with one 
or more barbs; not infrequently, however, they are diamond-shaped in 
cross section. ‘The shaft fitted into the hollow socket as in the case of the 
conical bone arrow points. A large number were found in and among the 
bones of human skeletons in a grave at the Burial Ridge, Tottenville, Staten 
Island. 

Cylinders, neatly cut and worked all over, or cylindrical tines made of 
deer antler only cut and rounded at the ends, are not infrequent, and were 
probably used as flaking tools in making and finishing arrow points by 
pressure. One broken cylinder or pin, found on the Bowman’s Brook site, 
Mariner’s Harbor, Staten Island, had a rounded, neatly carved head. This 
specimen, however, seems to be unique. 

Pottery stamps, perhaps of antler or bone, but which may be of wood, 
seem to have been used, judging by the decorations of many pottery sherds. 
A pottery stamp, carved from antler, was found slightly east of this region, 
at Dosoris, Glen Cove, Long Island, by Mr. M. R. Harrington, and is now 
in the Museum collection. 


TRADE ARTICLES. 


In spite of the frequent mention by old writers of barter of European for 
Indian goods, the amount of trade material found is small indeed. While it 
is abundant in the Iroquoian area, all that has ever been found here con- 
sists of a few round-socketed iron tomahawks, iron hoes, brass or copper 
arrow points of various styles, a little porcelain, a few glass beads, Venetian 
and plain, and some old pipes, notably those stamped ‘‘R. Tippet” on the 
bowl. All these articles are very rare here, and for this no adequate expla- 
nation can be given. 


RESUME. 


This area was inhabited during historic times by the following tribes:' 
A. The Lenni Lenapé, or Delaware, ranging from the Raritan River, 
including Staten Island, to Saugerties on the west bank of the Hudson. 


1 On the map (Fig. 18), these tribes are shown together with the Long Island and other 
neighboring tribes as indicated by Beauchamp in the map accompanying his *‘ Aboriginal Occu- 
pation of New York,’’ New York State Museum, Bulletin 32, Albany, 1900. 


aed 


SKINNER, INDIANS OF MANHATTAN ISLAND 175 


Raritan or Assanhican. 
Hackensack. 

‘Tappan. 

Aquakanonk. 
Haverstraw. 


* 


OCNON DAGA 


£50 Pus\WAORAMOECK 
PACHAMI 


WAPPIWGER! 
KITCHAW? 
¥ WWARANA- 
<WWAN Koh 
~s 


““CHIKELAc 


KEC)HEMECHES 


NANTIC |= 
2 
CONOY 
FIG. 18. MAP SHOWING THE LOCATION OF THE NEW YORK COASTAL ALGONKIN AND 
THEIR NEIGHBORS. 3 


Waranawankong. 
B. The Wappinger Confederacy ranging along the east bank of the 
Hudson, eastward to Connecticut, from Manhattan Island. 
Rechgawawank or Manhattan. 


176 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


Siwanoy. 
Weckquaskeck. 
Wappinger. 
C. Montauk or Matouwack Confederacy. 
Canarsie. 

These tribes were surrounded on all sides by neighbors of the same 
stock, who differed somewhat in their language and culture. On the south 
and west, lay the Lenni Lenapé, or Delaware proper; on the north, the 
Manhattan, and on the east the New England tribes. Almost without 
exception, these natives were displaced early in the history of this country, 
and have been long since expatriated or exterminated. A very few mixed 
bloods may yet be found on Staten Island, Long Island and in Westchester 
County, but their percentage of Indian blood is extremely low. 

The remains of aboriginal life now to be found, consist of shell heaps, 
occurring at every convenient point along the coast, on the rivers, and, 
more rarely, inland; shell, refuse, and fire pits; camp, village and burial 
sites; and rock and cave shelters. With one prominent exception,! few or no 
relics have been found in graves. ‘The typical interment was of the flexed 
variety, but bone burials are not infrequent. 

Dog skeletons complete and intact, bearing the appearance of having 
been laid out, are sometimes found buried in separate graves. Some writers 
have supposed that these individual dog burials are the remains of “white 
dog feasts” or kindred practices, because the Iroquois even up to the present 
day hold such ceremonies. ‘Vhe white dog is entirely cremated by the Iro- 
quois, and so far as we have been able to find out, there is no record of such 
occurrences among the coastal Algonkin; hence, there seems no reason to 
attribute this custom to them since other Iroquois traits were so infrequent. 
It seems more probable that such burials are simply those of pet animals, 
interred as we to-day honor a faithful dog. 

Occasionally, the skeletons of dogs and rarely of other animals have been 
found in graves associated with human bones. ‘The finding of arrow-heads 
among the ribs of some of these, and other circumstances, seem to point to a 
practice of killing a favorite animal on the death of its owner to accompany 
or protect the spirit of its master on the journey to the hereafter. 

From their appearance and position, many graves seem to indicate that 
the dead may sometimes have beer buried under the lodge, especially in tine 
of winter, when the ground outside was frozen too hard to permit grave 
digging. Others under the same circumstances seem to have been buried 
in refuse pits. ‘The remains further indicate that ‘feasts of the dead,” were 


! Burial Ridge, Tottenville, Staten Island. 


SKINNER, INDIANS OF MANHATTAN ISLAND 177 


also held at the time of the interment, judging by the quantity of oyster shells 
and animal bones in and near the graves. Some graves have rows or layers 
of oyster shells, with the sharp cutting edge upward, placed above the bodies 
as if to prevent wild animals from disinterring and devouring the dead. 

An interesting fact, brought to light by the rock-shelter work of Messrs. 
Schrabisch and Harrington in their explorations in New Jersey and West- 
chester County, New York, is that in the lowest and oldest refuse layers of 
these shelters pottery does not occur. It would be ill advised to infer from 
this that the earliest occupants were peoples of another culture from the 
surrounding village dwellers, as the other artifacts found are quite similar 
to the implements of the latter. Many reasons for this lack of pottery, such 
as the more easy transportation of vessels of bark or wood through the 
mountains and hills, suggest themselves, though they are more or less nul- 
lified by the presence of pottery in the upper layers. The upper layer, 
however, may have been made during the period when the natives were 
being displaced by Europeans and at the same time subjected to Iro- 
quoian raids, when the villages would naturally be abandoned from time 
to time, for refuge among the cliffs and caves of the mountain fastnesses. 

It has been suggested that the rock and cave shelters are remains of an 
older occupation by people with or without the same culture as the later 
known savages. The nature of the finds does not support this view, for the 
specimens obtained are often of as good workmanship as the best to be found 
in the villages and cemeteries of the latter, while pottery, on the other hand, 
occurs on the oldest known Algonkian sites. It seems most probable to the 
writer that, like the shell heaps, the rock and cave shelters form but a com- 
ponent part, or phase, of the local culture, perhaps a little specialized from 
usage and environment, but contemporary with the villages, shell heaps 
and cemeteries of the lowlands. 

Mounds and earthworks do not occur in the region under consideration, 
nor does it appear that most of the Indian villages here were fortified, unless 
they were slightly stockaded. A number of instances of this are known 
historically, however, and a few earthworks occur just beyond this area." 

The remains found do not bear any appearance of very great geological 
antiquity. In a few instances, rock-shelters, shell heaps and village sites 
seem to possess a relative antiquity; but the oldest known remains, in every 
case, may be placed as Algonkian with considerable certainty. No paleo- 
liths have been reported, and it would seem from the comparative lack of 
antiquity of the remains that the natives could not have lived in this region 
for many centuries before the advent of the whites. The accounts of con- 


1 An earthwork at Croton Point on the Hudson has been excavated by Mr. M. R. Harring- 
tom for the American Museum. 


178 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


temporary writers prove conclusively that these archzeological remains, if 
not those left by Indians found here by the early Dutch and English settlers, 
must have been from people of very similar culture. In culture, the local 
Indians were not as high as the Iroquois, nor perhaps as the Lenapé or Dela- 
ware proper from whom they sprang; but they compare very favorably with 
the New England tribes. Absence and scarcity of certain artifacts such as 
steatite vessels, the long stone pestle, the gouge, adze and plummet, and the 
abundance and character of bone and pottery articles show them to have 
been intermediate in character between the Lenapé on the south and west, 
and the New England tribes on the east and north; and consultations of 
the old European contemporaries show that this was the case linguistically 
as well as culturally. Examination of the remains also shows that the 
influence of the Lenapé on the west, and of the New England peoples on the 
east, was most strongly felt near their respective borders. [roquoian in- 
fluence was strong, as evinced by the pottery, and there is also documentary 
evidence to this effect. Finally, as is frequent throughout most of eastern 
North America, the archeological remains may be definitely placed as 
belonging to the native Indian tribes who held the country at the time of its 
discovery or to their immediate ancestors. 


Historical Notes on the Indians of Manhattan.’ 


Historical references to the Indians who occupied this territory in the 
early days are very confusing and contradictory. ‘There seems to be a 
great deal of trouble in the use of the word Manhattan. Van der Donck 
in 1633 classified the Indians of this section by language, and said, ‘‘ Four 
distinct languages — namely Manhattan, Minqua, Savanos and Wap- 


panoos’’—are spoken by Indians. ‘With the Manhattans we include 


those who live in the neighboring places along the North River, on Long 
Island, and at the Neversinks.” * It is probable that “it was... .this clas- 
sification by dialect that led the Dutch to the adoption of the generic title 


of Manhattans as the name of the people among whom they made settle- 


ments.” ® De Laet wrote that ‘‘on the east side, on the mainland, dwell the 


Manhattans,’ and in 1632 Wassenaer adds that they are ‘“‘a bad race of 
savages, who have always been unfriendly to our people” and that “‘on the 
west side are the Sanhikans, who are the deadly enemies of the Manhat- 


1) 4 


tans. “When Hudson returned from his trip up the River which now 


1 First paragraph by James K. Finch. 

2 Wilson, Memorial History of N. Y., Vol. I, p. 34. 
3 Tbid., p. 49. 

4 Ibid., p. 34. 


SKINNER, INDIANS OF MANHATTAN ISLAND — 179 


bears his name, he was attacked by Indians in birch or dug-out (7?) canoes 
at the mouth of Spuyten Duyvil Creek. ‘These Indians were a sub-tribe of 
the Wappingers or Wapanachki called the Reckgawawances.’! ‘This 
name seems to have been given to the Indians who inhabited Manhattan 
Island, while the term Manhattans as already stated was a classification of 
dialect only. Ruttenber says that the Reckgawawancs were named after 
their chief Rechgawac;* and the name also seems to have been applied to 
part of the island for Riker says that,— ‘‘he Indians still [in 1669] laid 
claim to portions of the Harlem lands,....one of the tracts being their old 
and favorite haunt Rechewanis, or Montagne’s Point. The chief claimant 
was Rechewack, the old Sachem and proprietor of Wickquaskeek, who, as 
far back as 1639, had been a party to the sale of Ranachqua and Kaxkeek.”’ ® 

Not much is known of their habits and customs beyond what has been 
inferred from the relics to be seen in this exhibit, but Mr. Bolton writes: 

“We are not without detailed description of our primeval predecessors 
upon the island of Manhattan, for the Hollanders recorded many of their 
impressions of aboriginal peculiarities. We may assume that they pos- 
sessed the usual characteristics, the stolid demeanor, the crafty methods, and 
revengeful nature of the Indian, all of which were exhibited in their dealings 
with the White intruders. These local bands appear to have had, in addition, 
some particular local habits. ‘They painted their faces with red, blue, and 
yellow pigments, to such a distortion of their features, that, as one’sententious 
Dominie expressed it, ‘They look like the devil himself.’ heir depend- 
ence on supplies of game and fish caused their removal from one place to 
another, semi-annually, and we read of their removal to a summer ‘hunting- 
ground’ in Westchester, whence the band returned to ‘Wickers Creek,’ 
for the winter shelter, and to resume their occupation of oystering and fishing 
in the Harlem and Spuyten Duyvil Creek. 

“As for dress, “They go,’ said Juet, ‘in deerskins, loose well-dressed, 
some in mantles of feathers, and some in skins of divers sorts of good furres. 
They had red copper tobacco pipes, and other things of copper they doe 
weare about their neckes.’ 

“ No copper objects have been found in upper Manhattan, probably their 
metallic stock was bartered away with the early colonists, for in 1625, De 
Laet described their use of ‘Stone pipes for smoking tobacco.’ 

“As regards their food, the evident abundance and size of the local oyster 
shells shows that they possessed in them a ready source of subsistence. As 
soon as Hudson’s ship reached the neighborhood of Greenwich, where the 


1 Tbid., p. 46. 
2 Ruttenber, op. cit., p. 7 
3 History of Harlem, p. 287. 


180 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


Indian Village Sappokanikan was located, the natives “brought great store 
of very good oysters aboard, which we bought for trifles.’ De Laet (1625) 
says, ‘their food is maize, crushed fine and baked in cakes, with fish, birds 
and wild game.’ Van der Donck and others wrote in 1649: 


Their fare, or food, is poor and gross, for they drink water, having no other 
beverage; they eat the flesh of all sorts of game that the country supplies, even 
badgers, dogs, eagles and similar trash, which Christians in no way regard; these 
they cook and use uncleansed and undressed. 

Moreover, all sorts of fish; likewise, snakes, frogs and such like, which they 
usually cook with the offals and entrails. 

They know also, how to preserve fish and meete for the winter, in order then to 
cook them with Indian meal. 

They make their bread, but of very indifferent quality, of maize, which they 
also cook whole, or broken in wooden mortars. 

The women likewise perform this labor, and make a apa or porridge called by 
some, Sapsis, by other, Duundare, which is their daily food, they mix this also thor- 
oughly with little beans, of different colors, raised by themselves; this is esteemed 
by them rather as a dainty than as a daily dish. 


“Their weapons were, of course, the usual aboriginal bow, arrow, spear, 
club and tomahawk, though but a few years later, they had acquired from 
the settlers enough fire-arms to become exceedingly expert in their use. 
‘Now, those residing near, or trading considerably with the Christians, 
make use of fire-locks and hatchets, which they obtain in barter. ‘They 
are excessively fond of guns; spare no expense on them, and are so expert 
with them, that in this respect they excell many Christians.’ Many of their 
discarded neolithic weapons have been found, and these exhibit a wide 
variety of material and workmanship, indicating considerable acquisitions 
from other tribes and localities. ‘Their household utensils included ‘mats 
and wooden dishes,’ and Juet refers to their ‘pots of earth to dresse their 
meats in,’ and speaks also of the women bringing “‘hempe.’ ‘The character 
of the grass mats which the women wove is to be seen in the imprints made 
with such material upon the outer surface of some of the local pottery. 
‘They also made the grass baskets, often referred to in early records, as 
‘napsas.’ ‘The pots of earth were the large earthenware vessels made by 
the Indian women, on the decorations of the rims and upper portions of 
which these poor creatures expended all their ingenuity and sense of art. 

“Of these objects, there remain a number of interesting examples dis- 
covered in upper Manhattan, the most complete, and at the same time, 
most artistic, being the fine Iroquoian vessel discovered by Mr. W. L. 
Calver, on the south side of 214th Street, about 100 feet east of 10th Avenue, 
in the fall of 1906. The large vases found in broken condition in the cave 
at Cold Spring, are of the cruder and therefore, earlier design of the original 


SKINNER, INDIANS OF MANHATTAN iSLAND 181 


Algonkian inhabitants, who at a later period, probably by barter, and 
perhaps by inter-marriage, acquired or learned the art of Iroquoian design 
and decoration. 

“Of the period during which the race occupied this locality, we can only 
make conjectures. ‘The extent and character of the shell heaps at Cold 
Spring and the pits and burials at Seaman Avenue, certainly indicate a 
settlement of large numbers or of considerable age. ‘The ceremonial pits 
at 212th Street and certain remains of aboriginal feasting, such as fish bones 
and oyster shells, appeared to exist at a level below the graves of the slaves 
of the settlers, buried at that place. 

“While these conjectures may carry back the period of occupancy to 
antiquity, the tools and weapons are all of the modern order, and no objects 
of true paleolithic character have been discovered, so that we have as yet 
nothing definitely reaching back into the remote ages of the most primitive 
mankind, although on Hunt’s Point in the Bronx, at no great distance away 
from our island, a very interesting rude ax and a hammer were discovered 
by Mr. Calver in a gravel-pit, near the old Hunt burying-ground.” 


LocaTION oF ARCHAOLOGICAL REMAINS ON MANHATTAN ISLAND.! 


The first field work done on Manhattan Island is of very recent date. 
Doubtless many articles of Indian manufacture and evidences of Indian 
occupation were found as the city grew up from its first settlement at Fort 
Amsterdam, but of these specimens we have very few records. The first 
specimens found which have been preserved, to the knowledge of those now 
interested in the subject, were found in 1855, and consisted of a deposit of 
Indian arrow-points found in Harlem during excavation for a cellar on Avenue 
A, between 120th and 121st Streets. Some of these are spoken of by James 
Riker * as being in the author’s cabinet. Riker also speaks of shell heaps 
near here.* ‘The next specimens preserved were found at Kingsbridge Road 
(now Broadway) and 220th Street in 1886, and are in the John Neafie col- 
lection at the Museum. ‘These consist of an arrow point and a few bits 
of pottery. ‘The next work was begun in 1889 by Mr. W. L. Calver of this 
city, and has led to the discovery of much valuable material which has been 
preserved.* 


1 By James K. Finch. 

2 History of Harlem (1881), footnote, p. 137. 

3 Ibid., p. 366. 

4Jn the Spring of 1890 Mr. Edward Hagaman Hall began his investigations and at about 
the same time Mr. Reginald P. Bolton entered the field of local research. In many instances 
these gentlemen and Mr. Calver collaborated with valuable results. In the preservation of the 
traces of Indian occupation of Manhattan Isiand the American Scenic and Historic Preservation 
Society (formed in 1895 under the presidency of the late Hon. Andrew H. Green, but now 
under that of Dr. George Frederick Kunz) has done much pioneer work. Epiror. 


182 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


The following account of the work is taken mainly from Mr. Calver’s 
note-book: 

In the autumn of the year 1889, while exploring the heights of Blooming- 
dale (now called Cathedral Heights) for any relics that might have remained 
from the Battle of Harlem, Mr. Calver discovered one arrow point at 118th 
Street, east of Ninth Avenue, and immediately afterwards a circular hammer- 
stone. Ona later trip to the same locality, he found a small grooved axe or 
tomahawk.! In February, 1890, while hunting for Revolutionary relics in 
the vicinity of Fort Washington, he made a trip to the northern part of the 
Island in search of British regimental buttons, many of which were said to 
have been found in that vicinity. ‘There he met an old acquaintance, Mr. 
John Pearce, a policeman then on duty there, by whom he was introduced to 
Mr. James McGuey, a youth residing in the vicinity of 198th Street and 
Kingsbridge Road. ‘To Mr. Calver, Mr. McGuey presented several relics 
found by himself on camp sites and made an appointment to meet him 
‘arly in March to explore for Indian remains. ‘The same day, Mr. Pearce 
took Mr. Calver to be introduced to Mr. ‘Thomas Reefe who resided near 
Kingsbridge Road and Isham Avenue, and, while crossing the orchard at 
Academy Street and Seaman Avenue, Mr. Calver saw that the ground was 
thickly strewn with shells which afterwards proved to be of Indian origin. 

The first Sunday in March, Messrs. Calver and McGuey explored this 
part of the Island for Indian remains. At the junction of Academy Street 
and Prescott Avenue, they found an Indian potsherd whose importance Mr. 
MeGuey seemed to realize, for, a week later, Mr. Calver met him again and 
was presented by him with a number of fragments of Indian ware. He 
assured Mr. Calver that he had found it by digging in an Indian graveyard. 
The two men dug again at this place, now known as “‘the Knoll,” and found 
more pottery. ‘They then went to Cold Spring, a point on the extreme 
northern end of the Island, and ina shell heap there they found more Indian 
work. Mr. Alexander C. Chenoweth, an engineer, then on the Croton 
Aqueduct, hearing of these discoveries, obtained a permit from the property 
owners and began to explore “‘the Knoll” for Indian remains. Having 
finished here, he went to Cold Spring and made some further discoveries. 
All his specimens were purchased in 1894 by the Museum, and some of them 
are now on exhibition. 

Since this time, several interesting relics have been found and, as the work 
of grading streets and other excavation at this part of the Island are carried 
on, more relics will probably come to light. An account of the recent finds 
will be found in another part of this Guide, the time of this writing having 
been 1904. 


1 The writer found an arrowhead on South Field, in front of Columbia University Library, 
on September 30, 1904. 


SKINNER, INDIANS OF MANHATTAN ISLAND _ 183 


The only Indian remains left on the Island, so far as known to the writer, 
are situated at the extreme northern end at Inwood and Cold Spring. ‘They 
consist of the co-called shell heaps or refuse piles from Indian camps, and 
three rock-shelters at Cold Spring. But we have evidence to show that 
this was not the only part of the Island occupied by the Indians. Mrs. 
Lamb * says that the Dutch found a large shell heap on the west shore of 
Fresh Water pond, a small pond, mostly swamp, which was bounded by the 
present Bowery, Elm, Canal and Pearl Streets, and which they named 
Kalch-Hook or shell-point. In course of time, this was abbreviated to 
Kalch or Collect and was applied to the pond itself.?_ This shell heap must 
have been the accumulation of quite a village, for Mrs. Jno. K. Van Ren- 
sellaer * speaks of a castle called Catiemuts overlooking a small pond near 
Canal Street, and says that the neighborhood was called Shell Point. Hem- 
street refers to the same castle as being on a hill “close by the present 
Chatham Square,” and says that it had once been an “Indian lookout.” * 
Excavations at Pearl Street are said to have reached old shell banks. ‘The 
Memorial History of New York’’® says that a hill near Chatham Square was 
called Warpoes, which meant literally a “small hill.’ ® According to the 
same authority, ‘Corlear’s Hoeck was called Naig-ia-nac, literally ‘sand- 
lands.’ It may, however, have been the name of the Indian village which 
stood there, and was in temporary occupation.”’ ‘This is the only reference 
we have to this village, but there are references to another on the lower end 
of the Island. Janvier? says that there was an Indian settlement as late as 
1661 at Sappokanican near the present Gansevoort Market. According to 
Judge Benson,® Sapokanican was the Indian name for the point afterwards 
known as Greenwich. “‘In the Dutch records references are made to the 
Indian village of Sappokanican; and this name....was applied for more 
than a century to the region which came to be known as Greenwich in the 
later, English, times. The Indian village probably was near the site of the 
present Gansevoort Market; but the name seems to have been applied to 
the whole region lying between the North River and the stream called the 
Manetta Water or Bestavaar’s Kill.”’* Benton says that the name of the 


1 History of New York City, p. 36. 

2Mr. Edward Hagaman Hall, however, derives the name from “ Kolk ” or ‘‘ Kolch” a 
word still in use in Holland and applied to portions of a canal or inclosure of water. The 
word also means ‘‘ pit hole ’’, which aptly describes the Collect Pond. 

EpItTor. 

3 Goede-Vrouw of Manahata, p. 39. 

4 Hemstreet, Nooks and Corners of Old New York, p. 46. 

5 Bulletin, N. Y. State Museum, Vol. 7, No. 32, p. 107, Feb., 1900. 

6 James G. Wilson, op. cit., p. 52. 

7 Evolution of New York. 

8 N, Y. Historical Society Collection, S. II, Vol. II, Pt. I, p. 84, 1848. 

® Thos. A. Janvier, In Old New York, pp. 85-86. 


184 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


village was Lapinican.t Going back to the old Dutch records might lead 
to finding the actual names and other data regarding these places. 

Most of the specimens found on Manhattan Island, as already stated, 
come from the northern part. We have a few from the central portion, 
however. ‘There are the arrow-heads spoken of by Riker, and in Webster 
Free Library there is a fine specimen of a grooved stone axe found at 77th 
Street and Avenue B. Mr. Calver has found an arrow-head at 81st Street 
and Hudson River and specimens from the site of Columbia College have 
been recorded. 

Doubtless the northern part of the Island was inhabited for the longer 
period; but it is probable that all along the shore, wherever one of the many 
springs or small brooks, shown on old maps, emptied into the Hudson or 
‘ast River, there were small, temporary Indian camps. _ It is likely that these 
camps were used only in summer, while the primitive occupant of Manhattan 
retreated to the more protected part of the Island, as at Inwood and Cold 
Spring, during the winter. Or it may be possible that, as Ruttenber ° 
states, the villages on Manhattan Island were only occupied when the Indians 
were on hunting and fishing excursions, while their permanent villages were 
on the mainland. Bolton,* however, says their principal settlement was on 
Manhattan Island. 

Fort Washington Point. ‘There is a small deposit of shells, on the 
southern edge of the point, in which the writer found some small pieces of 
pottery and a few flint chips, thus proving its Indian origin. ‘This was 
probably a summer camp, as it was too exposed for winter use. 

The Knoll. ‘The Knoll” was the name applied to a small rise of land, 
at the southwest corner of Dyckman Street and Sherman Avenue, which ran 
out into Sherman Creek from the eastern edge of the hill at that place. As 
already stated, Messrs. Calver and McGuey found potsherds here; then Mr. 
Chenoweth obtained permission of the property owners to make excavations. 
He found numerous fragments of arrow points and pottery in some refuse 
deposits from an Indian camp and also uncovered what were thought to 
have been “paved fireplaces.” ‘The newspapers of the time had accounts 
of the finds, with pictures of the pottery and other objects found.t Mr. 
Chenoweth also uncovered a number of skeletons. It is stated that these 
graves were marked with rough headstones, and there are pieces of a coffin 
from here in the Terry collection in the American Museum, as are also 
a number of lead buttons found with one interment. Everything seems 


1 New York, p. 26. 

2 Indian Tribes of Hudson’s River, p. 78. 

3 History of Westchester County, p. 25. 

4 New York Herald, January 14, 1894; also Illustrated American, September 19, 1901. 


SKINNER, INDIANS OF MANHATTAN ISLAND | 185 


to point to these as being burials of early settlers, but Mr. Chenoweth holds 
that they are Indian. Several of the skeletons have been preserved in the 
Museum. A parallel condition to this at the Knoll was found at 211th 
Street and will be spoken of later. The Knoll site had undoubtedly been an 
ancient Indian camp. Probably Sherman Creek was open up to this point 
to Indian canoes. 

Cold Spring. Cold Spring is situated at the extreme northern end of 
Manhattan Island on the southern shore of Spuyten Duyvil Creek. ‘The 
Indian remains consist of three rock-shelters and three refuse heaps. ‘The 
rock-shelter is a formation where the overhanging rocks form a small cave 
or shelter which the Indians used as a dwelling place. All their rubbish, 
such as oyster shells, broken pottery and broken arrow heads, were dumped 
near by, forming the so-called shell heaps. Messrs. Calver and McGuey 
explored the shell heaps; but Mr. Chenoweth was the first to suspect the 
existence of the shelters. There is only one which is likely to have been used 
as a dwelling place, the others being places where food was stored or shelters 
for fires used in cooking. These shelters face east, and are at the foot of the 
hill (formerly called Cock Hill) which forms the most northern part of 
Manhattan Island. The largest one was formed by several of the rocks 
breaking off the cliffs above and falling in such a manner that, by digging 
out some of the earth from beneath them, the Indians could make a small 
shelter. Probably it was occupied by one family, while the others lived in 
bark wigwams near by.t. Another of the shelters is simply an excavation 
under the end of a huge fragment which also dropped from the cliffs above, 
and the third is a large crevice in the foot of these cliffs. When Mr. Cheno- 
weth first explored them, all these shelters were completely filled with earth 
which had gradually worked its way in since their occupation, and much 
credit is due him for suspecting their presence. In them he found frag- 
ments of pottery and stone implements, together with the bones of turkey 
and deer. he largest of the refuse heaps is situated on a rise directly in 
front of these shelters. It consists of a layer of shells, in places several 
inches thick, found under a layer of fine loam, a black earth which has 
been deposited since the shells were scattered over the original sandy 
yellow soil. The sheltered position of this place made it an especially de- 
sirable camp site. The hills to the south and west formed a protection to 
the camp from winds, and by Spuyten Duyvil Creek access could be had to 
either Hudson or East River; while the Cold Spring, from which the place 
takes its name, furnished an abundant supply of fresh water. 


1 Memorial History of New York, Vol. I, p. 33, for picture of houses, and p. 39 for descrip- 
tion. : 


186 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


Inwood Station Site. At the foot of Dyckman Street and Hudson River, 
there existed a large deposit of shells, most of which were removed when the 
rocks on which they lay were blasted away for grading the street. A few 
arrow points and bits of pottery, as well as several Revolutionary objects, 
were found here. Part of the deposit is still left on the northern shore of 
the small bay just below Inwood station. ‘There are photographs of this 
deposit in the Museum. 

Harlem Ship Canal. Formerly at 220th Street and Kingsbridge Road 
was a large deposit of shells on the westerly side of the road. ‘This was 
destroyed when the ship canal was put through. As with the Inwood Station 
site, no systematic examination of this place was ever made. Mr. John 
Neafie found some potsherds here in 1886, and Mr. Chenoweth also has 
some potsherds from here.t Mr. Calver says that this was a large deposit, 
and that the peculiar thing about it was that the shells were so wedged and 
packed together that a pick would hardly penetrate them. ‘They lay on the 
bare rock surface in cracks in the rock. 

Harlem River Deposit. My. Calver says, “Extending from 209th Street 
to 211th Street on the west bank of the Harlem River and almost on a line 
with Ninth Avenue was another large deposit of oyster shells lying just 
beneath the top soil of the field. These shells had nearly all been dis- 
turbed by the plow and are interesting only for their color, which was red. 
Pieces of horn of deer and split bones of the same animal were common 
among the shells; but, in spite of the apparent antiquity of the deposit, 
there were, even in the lowest strata of it, some small fragments of glass which 
proved that either the whole mass had been disturbed or else the shells had 
been left during the historic period. ‘There are several stone sinkers and 
hammerstones from this spot in Mr. Calver’s collection and at the Museum. 

Isham’s Garden. his is a large garden about on the line of Isham 
Street and Seaman Avenue. ‘The soil is white with small fragments of shells. 
A number of arrow points, flint chips, hammerstones, sinkers and a few bits 
of pottery have been found here. Mr. Calver has found several shell pockets 
with small deposits of pottery, etc., on the hill to the south of this garden. 

Academy Street Garden. This is a small garden between Academy 
and Hawthorne Streets, running through from Seaman Avenue to Cooper 
Street. It was a British camp site during the Revolution, and a number 
of buttons, gun-flints and bullets have been found there as well as numerous 
Indian remains. It seems to have been the workshop for a red jasper-like 
stone of which numerous chips but no finished implements have been found. 
The shells at this point were first noticed by Mr. Calver in 1890. ‘They 
may not all be of Indian origin, as some may be due to soldiers. 


1 John Neafie collection, 20-2558; Chenoweth, 20-3498. 


SKINNER, INDIANS OF MANHATTAN ISLAND _ 187 


Dog Burials found in #895. In January, 1895, Mr. Calver found two 
interesting “‘dog burials.’ The first burial was unearthed at the summit 
of a ridge of soft earth at 209th Street, near the Harlem River. ‘The ridge, 
which was about twelve feet high, had been partly cut away for the grading 
of Ninth Avenue. It was at the highest part of the hillock that a pocket 
of oyster and clam shells was noticed, from which a few fragments of Indian 
pottery which lay on the face of the bank had evidently fallen. The shells, 
upon inspection, were found to have served as a covering for the skeleton of a 
dog or wolf. Another burial was found on May 18th within fifty yards of 
the first burial. It had been covered with shells just as the first one, but had 
been disturbed by workmen. Mr. Calver says: “The two canine burials 
were situated at a point just without the borders of the Harlem River shell 
heap and were distinct from it. ‘The shells were found to be matched, 
hence it was concluded that they were thrown in unopened or eaten on the 
spot. As the skeletons were intact and the bones uninjured, all probability 
of the animals having been eaten is disposed of.” ‘These burials are com- 
mon in this vicinity. No satisfactory explanation of them has been given; 
but Mr. Calver thinks they were for some religious purpose, and suggests a 
relation to the ‘‘White Dog Feast” of the Onondaga of this State.t It is 
certain that the pockets were in many cases used as fireplaces. 

Shell Pockets at 211th Street. In March, 1903, there was considerable 
excitement over the reported discovery of an Indian graveyard at 211th 
Street.2 The graveyard proved to have been that of some slaves, and was 
situated on the western end of the rise between 210th and 211 Streets, on 
the eastern end of which is the old Neagle Burying Ground. ‘This discovery 
was interesting because under the negro graves several shell pockets of 
undoubted Indian origin came to light. ‘The workmen, in grading ‘Tenth 
Avenue, cut into this hill to obtain material for filling, and uncovered the 
graves and pockets. It seems almost certain that the deposits were made 
some time ago; then the wind blew the sand over the deposits to a depth of 
four or five feet, and negroes later used this place as a burial ground. In 
support of this theory is the fact that the pockets were four or five feet under 
the surface, that the soil above showed no signs of having been disturbed, 
and that this rise is put down on the Government maps of this section as a 
sand dune.* During the summer of 1904, Mr. Calver with Messrs. Hall and 
Bolton uncoyered nine more pockets to the southwest of the graveyard.* 
These pockets all seem to have been of the same period as the others, and 


1N. Y. Herald, May 26, 1895. 

2 Evening Telegram, March 14, 1903. 

3 New York Geologic Folio. 

4 New York Tribune, Oct. 30, 1904, and New York Sun, Dec. 14, 1904. 


188 THE AMERICAN MUSFUM JOURNAL 


all appear to have been on the original ground surface, although those 
farther up the hill were some four feet under the present surface. In one 
of these pockets, was found the complete skeleton of a dog’; in another, 
a turtle shell; two others contained complete snake skeletons; while a fifth 
held the fragments of a small pottery vessel. The pockets were small, 
being about three feet in diameter and of equal depth, showing no signs 
cf having first been used as fire places and then filled up, though charcoal 
was scattered among the shells. Almost all the relics from Van Cortlandt 
Park were found by Mr. James in pockets similar to these. 

During Indian troubles in 1675, the Wickquaskeeks at Ann’s Hook, 
now Pelham Neck were told “‘to remove within a fortnight to their usual 
winter quarters within Hellgate upon this island.” Riker says, ‘This 
winter retreat was either the woodlands between Harlem Plains and Kings- 
bridge, at that date still claimed by these Indians as hunting grounds, or 
Rechawanes and adjoining lands on the Bay of Hellgate, as the words 
‘within Hellgate’ would strictly mean, and which, by the immense shell- 
beds found there formerly, is proved to have been a favorite Indian resort.” ? 
A little later the Indians asked to be allowed to return to their maize lands 
on Manhattan Island and the Governor said that they, “if they desire it, 
be admitted with their wives and children, to plant upon this Island, but 
nowhere else, if they remove; and that it be upon the north point of the 
Island near Spuyten Duyvel.” * 

Mrs. Mary A. Bolton Post, in writing to the editor of “The Evening 
Post,” June 19th of the year of the opening of the Harlem Ship Canal (1895), 
speaks of some Indians who were allowed to camp on the south side of Spuy- 
ten Duyvil Creek on the Bolton property in 1817. Ruttenber says that the 
Reckgawawanos had their principal village at Yonkers, but that on Berrien’s 
Neck (Spuyten Duyvil Hill) was situated their castle or fort called Nipinich- 
sen. ‘This fort was protected by a strong stockade and commanded the ro- 
mantic scenery of the Papirinimen, or Spuyten Duyvil Creek, and the 
Mahicanituk (Hudson River), the junction of which was called the Shor- 
ackappock. It was from this castle that the Indians came who attacked 
Hudson on his return down the river.£| Some small shell deposits occur on 
Spuyten Duyvil Hill, but as yet this “‘castile” has not been definitely located. 
The village site at Yonkers, according to Mr. James, is now covered by 
buildings; but several relics found near the site years ago are now in the 
Manor Hall at that place (1904). 


1 All that could be saved of this skeleton has been presented to the Museum by Mr. 
Edward Hagaman Hall. 

2 History of Harlem, p. 366, 

3 Ibid., p. 369. 

4 Ruttenber, pp. 77-78. 


SKINNER, INDIANS OF MANHATTAN ISLAND _ 189 


Judging from these references, we might conclude that the territory 
occupied by the tribe commonly known as Manhattans included Manhattan 
Island and that part of the mainland which is west of the Bronx River north 
to Yonkers, and that these Indians were a sub-tribe of the Wappinger division 
of the Mahican. 


Indian Burials. 


Indian Burials. Notwithstanding all the efforts of various collectors, the 
first Indian burials to be discovered on the Island were due to the activities 
of Messrs. Bolton and Calver in 1904. ‘The improvement of Seaman Avenue, 
Upper Manhattan, at that time, uncovered many relics of the long extinct 
Indian inhabitants among which Mr. Bolton saw unmistakable signs of 
Indian graves. ‘To quote from this gentleman: “It thus became evident that 
there were human interments in the vicinity, and in August, 1907, the first 
burial was discovered under a shell pit in Corbett’s garden. The grading 
process had been extended only about eighteen inches below the sod, but had 
sufficed to destroy the jaw of the skeleton which extended upwards, as did 
also the foot bones. ‘The bones lay in and upon a close mass of oyster shells, 
some of which were unopened, the skeleton reclined on its right side, facing 
west. ‘The arms were flexed and crossed, the knees bent and the head thrown 
back. No traces of weapons were found, nor were there any other objects 
found, save a fragment of an animal bone. 

“The location and position led to further exploration, which, early in 1908, 
led to still more interesting discoveries. Sunday, March 22nd, being the 
first day in the field for exploration for the season for 1908, W. L. Calver 
and the writer met at Seaman Avenue and Hawthorne Street, Manhattan, 
to discuss plans for further excavations on this Indian village site. The 
rains of the winter 1907-8 had washed the west bank where the layer 
of oyster shells and black dirt lay along the hill, and a patch of red burnt 
earth was observed, which on digging out, disclosed a fireplace, evidently 
of the period of the Revolution, having some large burnt stones, ashes, 
wood charcoal, brick, broken rum bottles, a wine glass nearly complete, 
a large open clasp-knife with bone handle, a hoop-iron pot-hook, various 
forged head nails and a curious folding corkscrew. Gold buttons of 
Revolutionary pattern and an officer’s silver button of the Royal Mariners, 
together with pewter buttons of the 17th Regiment disclosed who had occu- 
pied the spot. 

‘“At one part of this fireplace, we came upon a pocket of oyster shells, 
evidently Indian, about two feet deep, and on removing some of these, had 
the good fortune to uncover a human thigh-bone. We worked carefully 


190 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


into the shells and under the pocket, gradually disclosing the complete re- 
mains of a full-grown man (Fig. 19) lying on its right side, feet to the north, 
head facing east, knees doub!ed up, the left arm extended down through the 
thighs. The feet had been within the area of the hole in which the Revolu- 
tionary fireplace had been made, and only one or two foot bones were found. 
At a later period other foot bones were found on the opposite side of the 
Revolutionary fireplace, evidently having been displaced in its construction. 
The right arm was flexed, and the hand was under the head, the latter was 


FIG. 19. INDIAN BURIAL, MANHATTAN. 


intact and every tooth was in place. Shells had been packed over the body, 
und some around it. We were much puzzled by a number of human bones, 
lying compactly together by the skeleton, in a position that would have been 
in its lap had it been upright. 

“We removed the skull, covered the remains, and on Sunday, March 
29th, renewed the work. We went carefully to work upon the cluster of 
mixed bones in front of the large skeleton, and soon found them to be rather 
compactly arranged in a rectangular form about 14 by 26 inches, the long 
bones parallel. ‘The vertebrae abruptly ended parallel with the head of the 
larger skeleton, and after working some time, we found a skull placed 
below, beneath the pile of bones in a vertical position, facing north, the 


SKINNER, INDIANS OF MANHATTAN ISLAND 191 


ee aa a ee. } 


a a ee | 


Hawthorne dst 


“u 

= 
=} 
] 


ane, 


g 


. 


aN 


® 


yy 
S 
= 


Se€amar 


an 


| 
I 
| 
l 
| 
| 
| 
| 
i 
| 
' 
| 
| 
| 
| 
I 
| 
I 
| 
| 
| 
! 
| 
| 
| 
1 
! 
| 
! 
1 
i} 
4 
' 
| 
| 
! 
! 
3® 
' 
| 
) 
| 
! 
! 
1 
' 
! 
| 
J 


Se eee tes esecc oe 


3} oo 


r--— 


Ye 
ay 
Ze 
x 
1 
1 
' 
) 
\ 
| 
| 
| 
! 
) 
! 
’ 
! 
! 
' 
' 
! 
' 
' 
! 
I 
\ 
i 
! 
! 
J 
| 
| 
| 
i 
1 
| 


2 Pestle 


FIG. 20. LOCATION OF BURIALS, PITS AND SHELL-BEDS NEAR INWOOD. 


1. Humanremains. 2. Shell pit, deerantler. 3. Shell pit. 4. Shell pit, pottery. 5. Shell 
pits. 6. Shell pit, sturgeon below. 7. Shell pit, sturgeon scales. 8, 9. Shell pits. 
10. Human remains. 11. Fire pit. 12. Shell pit. 13. Dog burial, puppy. 14. Shell pit. 
15. Part of a jar. 16. Shell pit, fish and meat bones. 17. Shell pits. 18. Two dogs in shell 
pit. 19. Human skeleton, 1907. 19a. Female skeleton, 1908. 20. Human remains when 
house was built. 21. Small fire pits, Revolutionary. 22. Large shell pit. 23. Large shell 
pit. 24. Shell pit. 25. Dogburial. 26,27,28. Shell pits. 29. Two human skeletons, male 
and female. 30. Revolutionary fireplace ‘‘Royal Mariners” and ‘17th.’ 31. Skeleton and 
infant, female. 32. Skeleton (Chenoweth, 1908). 33. Revolutionary fireplace, 71st, officers’ 
buttons. D. Dyckman dwelling. R!, R2. Revolutionary fireplaces. R#. Revolutionary well. 


192 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


lower jaw of which was disengaged, and was placed sideways in front of the 
face. The back of the skull was broken in, and was black with marks of 
burning. ‘The lower jaw was burned, and some of the teeth split by fire. 
The arm and leg bones were charred at the joints. Inside the skull was a 
burned toe bone. Some oyster shells were among the charred remains. 

“A significant fact was that the right arm bones of the large skeleton 
were below the pile of burned bones. ‘This feature, and the compact 
arrangement of the latter within the space in front of and at the same level 
as the large skeleton, seem to point strongly towards an intentional arrange- 
ment of these bones, in front of the large corpse and to indicate the simul- 
taneous burial of the two bodies. On examination, the large skeleton 
proved to be that of an adult male, and the dismembered remains those 
of a female of about 35 years of age. No implements were found with the 
remains, but a part of a stone pestle and a rude celt lay under the sod among 
the oysters above the large skeleton. 

“On Sunday, June 14, 1908, another burial was found about 20 -feet 
north of the above. ‘This burial consisted of an adult skeleton doubled 
up and its back much curved, and was apparently that of a female of mature 
age. Between the knees, the remains of a small infant were laid, the skull 
of the latter being fragmentary. The right hand of the adult was below 
the infant and the left hand around the throat. The skull was intact and 
had nearly all the teeth. One finger bone had grown together at the joint 
in a crooked position apparently due to disease. On lifting the ribs of the 
right side, an arrow-bead of flint fell out between the fourth and fifth bones. 
‘These skeletons lay about two and a half feet below the grass, and a pocket 
of oyster shells was over the head. ‘The woman’s remains lay within a 
space about 31 inches long by 50 inches wide, flat in the hard red sand bed 
facing east. 

“Shortly after these remains were discovered, Mr. Chenoweth extended 
the excavation previously made by the explorers at the side of a large oyster 
shell pit in the same bank of sand, and uncovered a male skeleton of which 
he preserved the skull. Some small fragments of the skeleton were after- 
wards found by the writer on this spot. Contractors for the sewer in 
Seaman Avenue also uncovered the remains of a young female close to the 
position of several of the shell pits previously described. 

“These interments have some curious features. ‘The position of the 
remains facing east, sometimes west, the absence of weapons or other ob- 
jects and the oyster shells packed with or above them are subjects for inter- 
esting discussion on which future finds may throw much light, as also 
upon the peculiar double burial and the burnt state of the female remains.” 


SKINNER, INDIANS OF MANHATTAN ISLAND 193 


FLOOR PLAN, WESTERN END OF THE HALL OF THE PLAINS INDIANS 
(No. 102). 


EXPLANATION OF CASE NUMBERS. 


1 Mohegan and Delaware. Iroquois: Clothing; Weapons. 
2A Prehistoric Life in Greater New York. 
2B Prehistoric Manhattan Island. 
3A Shinnecock Hills, Long Island. 
3B Van Cortlandt Park. Long Island. 
4A Iroquois: Corn Food; Household Utensils. 
4B Iroquois: Transportation; Games; Ceremonial Objects; Wampum. 
5 Iroquois Group. 
6 Shell Heap. 
7 Iroquois: False Face Society. 
SA Westchester County. 
8B Upper Hudson. 
9A Kah Kwah and Erie Indians of New York State. 
9B New YorkState. Articles of European Manufacture. 
10A_ Pottery of Greater New York. Husk Face Society. 
10B_ Bolton and Calver Collection. 
11 Rock Shelter. 


The American [luseum Journal 


EpmuNpb Otts Hovey, Editor. 


FRANK M. CHAPMAN, 
Louis P. GRaTacapP, Advisory Board. 
WILLIAM K,. GREGORY, 


Subscription, One Dollar per year. Fifteen Cents per copy. 


A subscription to the JouRNAL is included in the membership fees of all classes of Members of 
the Museum, 


Subscriptions should be addressed to The American Museum Journal, 30 Boylston St., Cam- 
bridge, Mass., or 77th St. and Central Park West, New York City. 


Entered as second-class matter January 12, 1907, at the Post-office at Boston, Mass. 
Act of Congress, July 16, 1894. 


No. 


No. 


No. 
No. 


Guide Leaflets published by the 
AMERICAN MUSEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY. 
For Sale at the Museum. 


(Issued as supplements to The American Museum Journal.) 


1— THE BIRD ROCK GROUP. By F. M. Cuapman, Associate Curator 
of Mammalogy and Ornithology. October, 1901. Price, 10 cents. 

2.— THE SAGINAW VALLEY COLLECTION. By H. I. Smrru, Assistant 
Curator of Archeology. December, 1901. Price, 10 cents. 

3.— THE HALL OF FOSSIL VERTEBRATES. By W. D. Marruew, 
Ph. D., Assistant Curator of Vertebrate Paleontology. January, 1902. 
Out of print. 

4.— THE COLLECTION OF MINERALS. By Louis P. Graracap, A. M., 
Curator of Mineralogy. February, 1902. Levised edition, May, 1904. 
Price, 10 cents. 

5.— NORTH AMERICAN RUMINANTS. By J.A. ALLEN, Ph.D. Curator 
of Mammalogy and Ornithology. March, 1902 fevised edition, 
February, 1904. Price, 10 cents. 

6— THE ANCIENT BASKET MAKERS OF SOUTHEASTERN UTAH. 
By Grorce H. Pepper, Assistant in Anthropology. April, 1902. 
Second edition, May, 1909. Price, 10 cents. 

7.— THE BUTTERFLIES OF THE VICINITY OF NEW YORK CITY. 
By Wrt1i1aM BrvuTENMULLER, Curator of Entomology. May, 1902. 
Price, 15 cents. 

8— THE SEQUOIA. A Historical Review of Biological Science. By 
GrorGE H. SHerwoop, A. M., Assistant Curator. November, 1902. 
Price, 10 cents. 

9— THE EVOLUTION OF THE HORSE. By W. D. Marruew, Ph. D., 
Associate Curator of Vertebrate Paleontology. January, 1903. Sec- 
ond edition, May, 1905. Price, 10 cents. 

10.— THE HAWK-MOTHS OF THE VICINITY OF NEW YORK CITY. 
By Witu1am BrvuTenMiuier, Curator of Entomology. February, 
1903. Price, 10 cents. 


. 11.—'IHE MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS OF THE INCAS. By C. W. Meap, 


Assistant in Archeology. July, 1903. Price, 10 cents. 


. 12— THE COLLECTION OF FOSSIL VERTEBRATES. By W. D. Mar 


THEW, Ph. D., Associate Curator of Vertebrate Paleontology. Octo- 
ber, 1903. Price, 10 cents. 


. 13.— A GENERAL GUIDE TO THE AMERICAN MUSEUM OF NATURAL 


HISTORY. January, 1904. Out of print. 


. 14— BIRDS’ NESTS AND EGGS. By Frank M. Cuapman. Associate 


Curator of Mammalogy and Ornithology. April, 1904. Reprinted, 
February, 1905. Price, 10 cents. 

15.— PRIMITIVE ART. July, 1904. Price. 15 cents. 

16.— THE INSECT-GALLS OF THE VICINITY OF NEW YORK CITY. 
By Wi1u1AM BreuTeNnMOLLER, Curator of Entomology. October, 1904. 


Price, 15 cents. 
195 


No. 


No. 


No. 


No. 


(Reprinted jrom The American Museum Journal.) 


. 17.— THE FOSSIL CARNIVORES, MARSUPIALS AND SMALL MAM- 


MALS IN THE AMERICAN MUSEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY. 
By W. D. Marruew, Ph. D., Associate Curator of Vertebrate Palaon- 
tology. January, 1905. ae 15 cents. 

18.— THE MOUNTED SKELETON OF BRONTOSAURUS. By W. D 
MatrHew, Ph. D., Associate Curator ef Vertebrate Paleontology. 
April, 1905. Out of print. 

19.— THE REPTILES OF THE VICINITY OF NEW YORK CITY. By 
Raymonp L. Dirmars, Curator of Reptiles, New York Zodélogical Park. 
July, 1905. Price, 15 cents. 

20.— THE BATRACHIANS OF THE VICINITY OF NEW YORK CITY. 
By Raymonp L. Dirmars, Curator of Reptiles, New York Zodlogical 
Park. October, 1905. Price, 15 cents. 

21.— THE DEVELOPMENT OF A MOLLUSK. By B. E. Dauteren, 
D. M.D. January, 1906. Price, 10 cents. 


No. 22.— THE BIRDS OF THE VICINITY OF NEW YORK CITY. By Frank 
M. CuapMAN, Associate Curator of Mammalogy and Ornithology. 
April-July, 1906. Price, 15 cents. 

No. 23.— THE SPONGE ALCOVE. By Roy W. Miner, Assistant Curator of 


No. 


Invertebrate Zoédlogy. October, 1906. Price, 10 cents. 


(Published as a separate series.) 


. 24.— PERUVIAN MUMMIES. By Cuarites W. Meap, Department of Eth- 


nology. March, 1907. Price, 10 cents. 


. 25.— PIONEERS OF AMERICAN SCIENCE. Memorials of the naturalists 


whose busts are in the Foyer of the Museum. April, 1907. Price, 15 
cents. 


. 26.— THE METEORITES IN THE FOYER OF THE AMERICAN MUSEUM 


OF NATURAL HISTORY. By Epmunp Otis Hovey, Ph.D., 
Associate Curator of Geology. December, 1907. Price, 10 cents. 


. 27— THE MALARIA MOSQUITO. By B. E. Dantcren, D.M.D.  Assis- 


tant Curator of Invertebrate Zodlogy. April, 1908. Price, 15 cenis. 


. 283— THE HABITAT GROUPS OF NORTH AMERICAN BIRDS: By 


Frank M. CHApMAN, Curator of Ornithology. February, 1909. Price. 
15 cents. 

29.— THE INDIANS OF MANHATTAN ISLAND AND VICINITY. By 
ALANSON SKINNER, Department of Anthropology. September, 1909. 
Price, 10 cents. 


196 


ised is Ds ia slaatiacnial ig ' ae —— 


‘Od WAoN oy} 07 oyNor s,Atvaq SMOUS IoOoY oy} WO poyured deur yeois y 


“AIGIHXS GNIO DILOYV AYVSd AHL S6I 


The American Museum Journal 


Vou. IX NOVEMBER, 1909 


ACHIEVEMENT IN POLAR EXPLORATION. 


THE EXHIBIT OF THE Peary Arctic CLUB. 


OR several years a record of Polar exploration has been on exhibi- 
tion at the Museum in the east corridor immediately off the 
main foyer. Here, on two fifteen foot maps painted on seg- 

ments of a globe fastened to the wall have been indicated the routes of 
Arctic and Antarctic expeditions. 

On September 6 the Arctic map showed Nansen’s farthest north, 
86° 14’, reached in 1895, the Duke of the Abruzzi’s (Cagni’s) record, 
86° 33’, made in 1900, and the northernmost point of all, 87° 6’, gained 
by Peary on April 26, 1906, but the routes went no nearer the Pole than 
these points, and from them stretched untraversed a region known to be 
more than two hundred miles wide on all sides of the Pole. On Septem- 
ber 7, 1909, however, the red cord marking Peary’s latest expedition 
spanned this remaining distance and a small flag floated at the center of 
the Arctic map to bear record to the larger American flag that was left 
on April 6, 1909, waving over the drifting ice where half the year is 
day and half is night. 

This achievement, striven for by many men of many nations, marks 
an event in history. It closes a century of Arctic research, which century 
in turn was the culmination of a period of three centuries of exploration, 
if we count the exploits of whaling and sealing vessels and the early 
expeditions in search of a short water-route from western Europe to the 
Orient. Some facts have been discovered, some things proved not true, 
and the field is clear for new achievement along other lines, to the end 
that man may have a fairer understanding of the Universe in which he 


finds himself. 


On the morning of October 12, an exhibition by the Peary Arctic 
Club was opened in the west wing of the Museum. ‘The presentation 


199 


200 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM: JOURNAL 


in this exhibit is unusually vivid. A half hour in the hall leaves one 
imbued with the feeling that he has actually traveled into the unten- 
anted world around the North Pole. In the first place the exhibit is 
installed to give an effect of simplicity and severity, of much uninter- 
rupted space, cold white surroundings and few objects. Those in 
charge were careful not to draw on the Museum’s well-filled store houses 
of Arctic materials to such an extent as to destroy this atmosphere of 
severity. In the second place, because of the nature of the exhibit, 
everything speaks of adventure, of a difficult life, often of narrow escape 
and sometimes of disaster. This is true throughout, from the relic of 
the wrecked “‘ Polaris’ —a battered life boat that acts as a sign board 
just outside the entrance of the hall, to the view of the “Polaris” in 
Thank God Harbor — an immense canvas at the far end. Every object 
in the place seems to take on life as a representative of the daring work 
of some explorer. 

In imagination we see the sleeping bags, displayed near the entrance, 
with their voluminous fur folds wrapped about the traveller shutting 
out the savage cold. We see the sledges not as mere dead frame-works 
of wood, but as active aids to man. In our awakened fancy, they have 
iced runners and, loaded with provisions, they cut deep trails as with 
dogs and drivers they pass always on into boundless ice and snow. 
The mounted dog, placed here to illustrate the Eskimo method of har- 
nessing, brings to mind the long double-ranked teams, or the fan-shaped 
teams of eight as Peary drove them, dragging their burdened sledges, 
obeying word and whip day after day until too weak to help the expedi- 
tion longer, except by giving their bodies as food to strengthen their 
fellows; while those who have read ‘‘ Northward Over the Great Ice”’ 
recall Peary’s tribute to the dogs of that journey, “‘ Faithful, noble servi- 
tors....My only consolation is the knowledge that like ourselves you 
did not suffer pain. The starvation was so gradual that when at last 
your lives went out....the end was painless, as our own would have 
been had it not been for you.” ‘he mounted musk oxen, the many 
shaggy brown pelts wound about the pillars and the numerous skulls 
piled upon the floor, bring to mind forcefully the dependence of the 
explorer upon these animals for food. We get a more vivid under- 
standing of the eagerness with which he has many a time searched the 
ground for musk ox tracks, and a more keen sympathy with his fear 


when he saw one or more of the great creatures, that his eyes blinded by 


AN EXPLORER’S TRAIL LEFT AT THE ICE FOOT ON THE COAST OF GRINNELL LAND. 


Greeley Expedition, May, 1882. 


201 


‘cagT foung ‘uonipedxy epee 


FAVYL DILOUY 4O SSAILINOISSIG S3HL JO 3NO ONIMOHS JO! Y¥v10d HLYON NI 3A9dIY 3YNSSsadd £06 


° 
“- 
¢ 


v : 
’ KARA SEA 


é git? 
* QUKE oF ABRI's 
+ (Caen! 


% 


ABRUZ2IS_ 


NORTH POLE 
eescie 
uh April 6, 1909 


GREENLANDO 


EARY 
April 26,1906 


5c C.Bridgmane 


PART OF THE NORTH POLAR REGIONS, SHOWING LINES OF APPROACH FROM 
AMERICA AND EUROPE. 


205 


206 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


the incessant glare of the ice would give a false aim at the critical 
moment. 

The realism of the exhibit is increased by the work of a newly-invented 
automatic stereopticon placed in a darkened alcove at the right of the 
hall. Through its display of pictures (uninterrupted from nine in the 
morning until five in the afternoon) the visitor is carried into the heart 
of the Arctics. He looks on boats and men, sledges and dogs, in action; 
he sees in these pictures the very mountains and icebergs, the self-same 
pressure ridges or “rafters” of ice and the leads of open water that the 
explorer whose hand held the camera saw in reality. 

The central and most striking feature of the hall is a map painted in 
color on the floor over a space 30 feet by 50 feet in dimensions. It 
presents the approach to the Pole from North America only, the more 
frequently used of the two principal paths of exploration, namely: the 
route between Nova Zembla and Franz Josef Island, the direct course 
from Europe; and that through Davis Straight, Baffin Bay and Smith 
Sound, a lane of open water stretching northward between Greenland 
on the east and the line of Arctic American islands extending from Labra- 
dor to Ellesmere Land on the west. This map, therefore, does not 
show the route of Nansen, nor does it give that of the Duke of the Abruzzi, 
since both of these men made their approach from the Old World. It 
does mark the points reached by Markham and Parry in 1876, by 
Greeley in 1881 and by Lockwood and Brainard in 1882. It shows, 
at Cape Morris K. Jesup and Cape Bridgman, the limit of exploration 
by Peary in 1900 and marks conspicuously the “farthest north” of the 
same explorer as reached April 26, 1906. The chief aim of the map, 
however, is to show the route of Peary’s last or eighth expedition, 
financed by the Peary Arctic Club. 

The story graphically spread out on the floor concerns more than a 
year’s time and a distance of 800 geographic miles from Cape York 
northward to the Pole. The expedition started from Cape York August 
1, traveling up Smith Sound. It reached Cape Alexander August 18 
and Fort Conger September 2, the latter place being about 500 miles 
distant from the Pole. At Cape Sheridan the “ Roosevelt’? remained in 
winter quarters, as is indicated by the presence of a small model of the 
boat placed on the map at this point. On March 1, a few days before 
the sun rose above the horizon after the long Arctic night, the sledge 
journey began, a journey of more than 400 miles over drifting ice. 


PEARY ARCTIC CLUB EXHIBIT 207 


MUSK OX AND POLAR BEAR. 


Peary Arzectic Club Exhibit. 


Through these 400 miles no living thing is to be found, for musk oxen 
and caribou range no farther north than Cape Morris Kk. Jesup, the 
northernmost land, while seal, walrus and narwhal are found only along 
the waters that margin the land. 

The rest of the trip as traced shows a veritable ‘dash to the Pole.” 
On March 11, 84° north was passed, and a week later, 85° north was 
reached, 300 miles from the Pole. By March 27 the expedition passed 
87° north, and April 2, 88° north, only 120 miles from the Pole and 
farther north than any human being had ever before penetrated. Only 
four days later camp was made at the journey’s end, and the American 
flag was flying at 90° north. 

There is scarcely anything in the Peary Arctic Club’s exhibit outside 
of this map that attracts more attention than a sledge on the west side 


‘SOOTY OY} WoIJ UINJEI SP Joye WMESN], OY} Je UML] 9YZ UO WOYBI, 


‘310d HLYON SHL GaHOVaY LVHL 39G37S AuV3ad V '.dNS3r “ SIYYOW,, SHL 806 


eae” Wine at Natal ai oa) has bebe ay 
ow sin 


ant anaes a Sih a: 


PEARY ARCTIC CLUB EXHIBIT 209 


of the hall among piles of musk ox, caribou and walrus hides, crates of 
skulls and antlers, and the many other things that the ‘“ Roosevelt”’ 
brought south with her stowed away in every available place, even drying 
in the rigging. Though only a sledge, it seems deserving honor, for 
it bears this legend ‘‘A sledge that reached the Pole.” In reality, 
success has come to Polar exploration through use of the sledge as a 
means of travel. 

Before 1820 ships alone were used. When frozen in, an expedi- 
tion was delayed until a time of thaw. It was not until the second or 
third voyage of Parry and the second of Sir John Ross, that isin 1821 
and 1834, that sledging expeditions began and the fact was discovered 
that ‘‘ice which arrests the progress of the ship forms the highway for 
the sledge.” Since that time, there has been great advance in sledge 
construction, in the light of which fact it is interesting to compare the 
sledges in the possession of the Museum. ‘This sledge that reached the 
Pole is 12 feet long and 2 feet wide. It consists of two wooden run- 
ners curved upward at both ends and wooden slats crossing the runners 
several inches apart and bound loosely to them by thongs of walrus hide. 
Light and flexible, it is able to rise and dip through the snow of. steep 
descents without the slightest injury to itself, and has surely proved 
its fitness for Arctic travel. 

The exhibit is instructive as to the manner of maintaining life in the 
difficult environment of the Arctics. A case is filled with the skins 
and tools used in igloo building, another contains kayaks, harpoons 
and various fishing and hunting paraphernalia. From the facts brought 
out here, we learn the total dependence of the Eskimo on the few animals 
of the region, particularly the walrus and the seal. Still other cases 
contain garments of fur,—fur of fox, seal and reindeer. They show 
also coats made by fastening together many small bird skins. 

There is much suggested also in the matter of Arctic travel aside 
from what has already been noted. One case contains the instruments 
used in exploration, such as sextant, chronometer and compass, and 
beside these which tell of the success of science in invention and of 
exploration in making use of this invention are dramatically placed 
various crude implements and vessels fashioned by the Eskimo from 
copper taken from the wreck of Sir John Franklin’s ship. An arching 
label “A Century of Arctic Exploration” calls attention to still other 
cases containing the many books descriptive of expeditions to the Arctics. 


“ i 


— 

a i 
: aT 
Praag st S| 


THE PEARY CARIBOU (RANGIFER PEARY! ALLEN). 


Peary Arctic Club Exhibit. 


210 


PAINTINGS OF GREENLAND ESKIMO 211 


These books lie open at their title pages and, covering the time from the 
work of Sir John Ross to the present, invite further investigation. 

As a whole, the exhibit has a note of triumph init. There is triumph 
in the discoveries to science of lands and waters, in the improvement 
in life for the Eskimo through the intervention of civilized man, in the 
final direct route that Peary made and the American flag floating above 
“the top of the world” in the map on the floor. The visitor reads also 
a greater triumph than these, for one who has heard accounts from the 
lips of northern explorers or has felt a choking in the throat over the 
experiences recorded in some of the vivid writings of these same men, 
realizes the hardship involved in Polar exploration, the years of privation 
and physical distress, of sacrifice of all that to ordinary mortals makes 
life worth living. He knows that there has been set before the world an 
example of what above most things makes life worth living,— the in- 
domitable courage and perseverance that ends in accomplishment. 


THE MURAL DECORATIONS OF THE ESKIMO HALL. 


been painted by Mr. Frank Wilbert Stokes, an artist, who, as mem- 

ber of the Peary Relief Expedition of 1892 and of the Peary North 
Greenland Expedition of 1893 and 1894, has made careful study of the 
Eskimo people and their frozen country. 


| far mural decorations at the northern end of the Eskimo Hall have 


Ranged about the hall below are the weapons, the articles of dress, the 
boats, the sleds, while aboye them in this painted frieze these same 
objects are seen put to use in the daily activities of the Eskimo, revealing 
his adaptation to an environment of months’ long days and nights among 
glaciers and icebergs. ‘The combination of the scientific exhibits below 
and the artist’s work above, brings home to the observer not only the 
ethnological facts involved, but also other facts, such as the austerity of 
Eskimo life, its enforced simplicity and the limitations set upon civiliza- 
tion for the people of the Arctics. Much of the interest of these pictures 
rests in the fact that many of the scenes represent localities actually visited 
by the artist. Mr. Stokes established his studio at Bowdoin Bay, 77° 44’ 
N. latitude, and worked there during fourteen months, with the primitive 
life of the Eskimo and the glowing colors of the northern land under con- 
stant observation. As William Walton has said in an aritcle in Scribner’s 
Magazine for February, 1909, Mr. Stokes has here succeeded, despite the 


212 


THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


ESKiMO GODDESS OF THE SUN. 


From the painting on the North Wall. 


Copyright 1908 by Frank Wilbert DEC 
Courtesy of Scribner’s Magazine. 


inadequacy of pigments, in well suggesting “the utmost splendor of lizht 
that blazes in the Polar skies and glows in the Polar, tranluscent ice.’ 


THe NortH WALL. 


The largest picture of the series — in full view from the main foyer 
of the Museum — is a continuous panorama sixty feet long. It is 
intense and realistic in its coloring. In the center the glow of a mid- 
night sun illuminates promontories and sea, toward the right this bril- 
liant color gradually fades to the gray and purple of the twilight that 
precedes the long Arctic night, while toward the left it changes to the 
white lights and deep blue shadows of that other twilight that foreteils 
the approach of the long Arctic day. 

Against the vivid gold and red of the center of the painting is por- 
trayed the artist’s conception of the Eskimo myth of the “Sun and the 
Moon.” ‘There is presented a giant mirage of two figures in full pursuit 
through the air. ‘These figures are Ahn-ing-ah-neh, a hunter, typifying 


PAINTINGS OF GREENLAND ESKIMO 213 


ESKIMO CONCEPTION OF THE MOON, A 
HUNTER IN PURSUIT OF THE SUN. 


Copyright 1998 hy Frank Wilbert Stokes. 
Courtesy of Scribner’s Magazine. 


the moon and ushering in the long winter, and Sukh-eh-nukh, standing 

for the sun, a goddess accompanied by summer and plenty. Ahn-ing- 

ah-neh is dressed in winter garb and is driving his team of dogs. The 

lower part of the figure, like the dogs and sledge, are shadowy in the 

painting, but the upper part reaching forward in the chase, the head 

__ and the right arm with its lashing whip, stand out strong and dark as the 

, forward part of a night cloud that sweeps over the glacier-covered heights. 

Sukh-eh-nukh is represented by a figure uncovered to the waist (the 

Eskimo, both men and women, occasionally strip off the upper garments 

in the summer sun). She carries in her right hand an Eskimo lamp, 

shown as a sun-dog or parhelion such as is often seen near the horizon 

at sunrise and sunset in the Arctics. She is a part of a cumulus summer 

cloud that floats near her head. Summer birds are about her, a long 

line following from the far away horizon. ‘Two fulmar gulls are flying 

in front of her, and two harbor seals are crying to her, the “ Mother of 

the Seals,” from floating ice below, where also little Arctic puffins are 
ranged in military line. 


214 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


The story of the pursuit of the sun by the moon is a legend widely 
spread among the Eskimo people. The North Greenland Eskimo 
believe, as do all other Innuits from Alaska to Labrador and Baffin Land, 
that the sun was originally a woman, Sukh-eh-nukh, who in order to 
escape the unfilial love of her brother, Ahn-ing-ah-neh, fled into the 
heavens bearing a lighted torch. ‘The brother also carrying a torch 
pursued her and was transformed into the moon. _ It is believed that the 
moon is forever in love with the sun and seeks ever to overtake her, but 
that since his torch chanced to be a poor one and he is frequently com- 
pelled to return to earth to relight it, the sun is enabled to keep well in 


I ie 
pa ee ee 
Copyright 1908 by Frank Wilbert Stokes. 

POLAR BEAR AT BAY. 


From the painting on the North Wall. 


advance. According to the myth, disaster would come if he should 
succeed in catching her, for with his embrace would come the end of all 
things. 

This legend of the sun and the moon has many variations among the 
Eskimo people and is sometimes termed the Sedna Cycle, Sedna also 
signifying the sun. It is possible that we have here not only an allegory 
of the great Arctic day and night, but also the proof that there has taken 
root in Eskimo imagination the idea of man’s search after the unattain- 
able. 


PAINTINGS OF GREENLAND ESKIMO 215 


The right portion of the painting, realistic in the extreme, repre- 
sents the twilight before the approach of the long night, the dramatic 
interest resting in an encounter between an Eskimo hunter and a polar 
bear. ‘The hunter has left his sledge and, accompanied by his team, has 
followed in the chase. He has used his arrows and is now near enough 
to give a thrust with his lance, the bear’s attention being held by the 
dogs. 

That part of the painting at the extreme left tells the Eskimo’s method 
of stalking prey. In the foreground on an ice-floe a hunter, harpoon in 
hand, is crawling slowly toward two ring seals, which lie basking in the 


aa 
5. ae a 
¥ 54 » ag 
wer 


Copyright 1908 by Frank Wilbert Stokes. 
ESKIMO STALKING THE SEAL. 


From the Painting on the North Wall. 


sun near their hole. Eskimo hunters’have great skill in giving decoy 
sounds. ‘They can make cautious approach to gulls by waving a gull’s 
wing in the air, while whistling the bird’s notes; they can allay the 
suspicions of seals by lying flat on the ice and waving a foot in imita- 
tion of a seal’s head, while giving the characteristic calls of the seals. 
Beyond the seal hunter in the distance rises above the ice of the glacier, 
a bell-shaped elevation of land which the Eskimo knows as a “nunatak.” 
Still farther to the left towers an iceberg, while over all is the dawning 
light of the summer that is being ushered in by Sukh-eh-nukh, the sun 


goddess. 


216 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


Toe East WALL. 


The first or northern panel — An Innuit Encampment in Late Autumn. 

Pictures of actual events in Eskimo life are continued on the east and 
west sides of the hall, the unity of the compositions being gained by 
making the sky line in the east and west panels the same as that of the 
painting on the north wail. ‘The three panels on the east wall continue 
pictures of Eskimo life as it goes on during the Arctic night. 

The first of the panels gives a view of Inglefield Gulf, which by 
November is well frozen over. In the foreground to the right an 
Innuit (Memkashoo) is cutting up pieces of meat and feeding his 
team after a hunting trip. The sledge lies to the left, and just beyond 
is an Innuit woman with her babe carried on her back in a pouch. Such 
a pouch is made of fox skin and is a part of the hooded upper garment. 
The head and shoulders of the child are covered by soft fox skin, but the 
rest of its body lies naked against the mother’s bare back and so is kept 
warm. ‘The child is secured in the pouch by a sinew which passes around 
its body and around the upper part of the mother’s waist. 

A little Innuit boy stands by his mother, watching his playmate, an 
Kskimo puppy. Immediately to the right is the stone-built entrance of 
the igloo, or winter residence, which, partly covered with snow, is itself 
seen directiy behind the figures. The seal-entrail window of the igloo 
reveals a pale light from the lamp within, a lamp which must serve the 
purposes of lighting, heating, cooking and drying for the whole family. 

Beyond in the middle distance to the left is a bay, its shore covered 
with snow which is about three inches in depth at this season. Beyond 
the bay is a long low promontory stretching into the sea, a November sea, 
completely frozen over and with an iceberg frozen into it. The stars are 
brilliant in the sky, while mountain, sea and shore are enshrouded in 


rich orange light from a sun that is gradually receding. 


The Central Panel — Walrus Hunting in February. 
The east central panel represents a February scene on the ice of 
Baffin Bay, which is never completely frozen over. ‘The flaming colors 
of the Aurora Borealis fill the sky and are reflected by the ice. In their 


ESKIMO ENCAMPMENT IN LATE 


AUTUMN. 


The north panel of the East Wall. 


217 


218 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


Copyright 1908 by Frank Wilbert Stokes. 


WALRUS HUNTING IN THE LIGHT OF THE AURORA BOREALIS 


The central panel of the East Wall. 


weird light is made visible the attack of an Innuit hunter upon a large 
walrus, one of a group of three in the central foreground of the picture. 
In the immediate foreground to the right a bull walrus is just emerging 
from the water. ‘Chere is no look of fear in the animal’s dog-like eye, 
since he has not yet caught sight of the hunter. 


In the Arctics the barking of walrus can be heard for miles. When 


PAINTINGS OF GREENLAND ESKIMO 219 


the Innuit hunter hears it, he may hitch six or eight dogs to his sledge 
and travel toward the sound, often with only the light of the moon or 
of the stars to show him the way. When within a thousand yards to 
the windward of the animals, he tethers his dogs to the ice, and if they 
are unaccustomed to hunting and will not remain noiseless, he may turn 
the sledge upside down, to check any attempt on their part to run away. 
Armed with a stout harpoon and plenty of walrus-hide line, the Innuit 
crawls over the ice toward the animals. He conceals himself behind 
ice blocks or hummocks until the distance between him and the animals 
is short, then suddenly leaps to his feet, singles out a big bull (as in the 
painting) and strikes — usually with unerring aim. The whole herd, 
barking furiously, rushes for the sea. The stricken bull dives, and the 
walrus-hide line pays out rapidly, but not before the Innuit has deftly 
thrust his lance, which he carries in his free hand, firmly into the ice. 
With knee and shoulder braced against the shaft of the lance, he obtains 
sufficient purchase to play the walrus until the big fellow is so weakened 
by loss of blood that the hunter can leave his lance to cut two holes in the 
ice close to the spot where he is standing. Now, whenever the line is 
slack, he hauls in a few fathoms, and running the noose a couple of times 
down through one hole and across through the other, obtains a more 
reliable hold. With the lance now free, he stands over the breathing 
hole, striking the walrus each time that it rises. When it is finally 
despatched, he cuts off piece after piece of the meat and seeks his sledge 
and dogs to carry the spoil home. 

Walrus are huge ungainly creatures, weighing upwards of three 
thousand pounds, but to the nimble Innuit hunter there is usually no 
difficulty in getting out of harm’s way on the ice after he has struck the 
blow. If, however, the iron point slips, or the ice gives way, or if, as the 
coils of the line are running out, the hunter’s legs become entangled, he 
is quickly dragged down beneath the water to speedy death. 


The Third or Southern Panel. Peterawik in Moonlight. 


The third panel represents a winter scene at Peterawik on the shore 
of Smith Sound. In the foreground at the extreme left is a hunter with 
sledge and dogs, bringing a load of walrus meat. His snow igloo is at the 
right, where his wife, carrying a child in her hood, and accompanied 
by an Eskimo woman, is waiting to welcome him. ‘The sea-ice of Smith 


220 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


Sound stretches far to the horizon at the north; the head-line of Cape 
Alexander is visible in the distance.. ‘The rocks at the right are charac- 
teristic of the west coast of Greenland at this latitude, 76° N. 

In the spring before the ice breaks up, the Innuits congregate at 
Peterawik for walrus hunting. They build their snow igloos on the ice 
foot, that portion of the sea-ice bordering the land. Here they remain 
hunting, frolicking and feasting in their joyous fashion, until the sun’s 
warmth has broken up the ice. ‘Then they travel southward, still over 
the ice, some to the settlements of Inglefield Gulf and others even as far 
as Cape York. 


THe West WALL. 


The First or Northern Panel — Reindeer Hunting in Summer. 


The paintings on the west wall represent Eskimo life during the 
long Arctic day. 

In the middle foreground of the northern panel a hunter, crouching 
at the top of a rocky prominence, is in the act of drawing his bow of 
bone and sinew upon a white reindeer,’ which has espied too late some- 
thing to excite its curiosity. In the middle distance at the extreme right, 
is the continuation of the large iceberg of the central panel of the north 
wall. Icebergs in the Arctic regions are frequently from 150 to 300 feet 
in height, measure five to seven times this distance below the surface of 
the sea, and sometimes have a length of three miles. Beyond the ice- 
berg in the distance is a glacier flowing down from the great ice “Sahara”’ 
in the interior of Greenland, while to the left is a dark rocky portion of 
the submerged land. 

In the immediate foreground are purple flowers (Hpilobiwm lati- 
folium) which nestle in pockets in the rocks. ‘The middle foreground is 
covered by stunted grass and mosses, especially by reindeer moss on 
which the deer are feeding. Many flowers bloom in Greenland and other 
polar lands during the short summer, notably members of the mustard 
family, and of the pink, rose, saxifrage and grass families. ‘There is one 
species of sedge known; willows and birches are found, although grow- 
ing only two to three inches in height; while daisies, buttercups, yellow 
poppies, harebells, dandelions, gentians and primroses coyer the ground 
in many places. 

‘A white caribou (Rangifer pearyi Allen) discovered by Peary in 1902 in Elles- 
mere Land near Lake Hazen, latitude 82° N. 


PAINTINGS_OF GREENLAND ESKIMO 221 


Copyright 1908 by Frank Wilbert Stokes. 


WINTER SCENE AT PETERAWIK ON THE SHORE OF 
SMITH SOUND. 


The southern panel of the East Wall. 


Another source of bright color in these northern latitudes lies in two 
species of alge, one red and the other green. ‘They are microscopic 
plants that grow on the ice or snow, but they may occur in such profusion 
as to impart their color to the ground. It is the presence of these algze 
that explains the famous “crimson glacier” or “crimson snow” near 
Cape York. 

As to edible plants, there are a few even in this extreme northern 
region. A blueberry which grows partly concealed under the moss 
can be secured during the greater part of the year, and is eaten with 


REINDEER HUNTING 


IN SUMMER. 


The northern panel of the West 
Wall. 


PAINTINGS QF GREENLAND ESKIMO 223 


aa Ke a os 


m= 


Copyright 1908 by Frank Wilbert Stokes. 
ESKIMO IN SEALSKIN CANOE HARPOONING A NARWHAL. 


The central panel of the West Wall. 


relish by the Innuit. There are several plants, of which roots, leaves, 
buds and even flowers are eaten. A plant resembling celery (Arch- 
angelica officinalis) is a favorite article of food. Iceland moss is also 
eaten. The chief sources of vegetable food, however, are marine. A 
seaweed used commonly for food is Alaria pylaii, closely allied to “blad- 
derlocks,”’ of Scotland, and in flavor somewhat like asparagus. 


224 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


The Central Panel — Narwhal Hunting in Summer. 


The dramatic center of this panel is an Innuit in his kayak or sealskin 
canoe in the act of harpooning a narwhal, which is visible beneath the 
surface of the water at the left of the boat. To the right in the middle 
distance are fulmar gulls. In the distance is the great ice river, the 
Verhoeff glacier. 

The narwhal is an animal about which little is definitely known. 
Some, notably Peary, think that it is the fabled unicorn of the ancients. 
It occasionally has both a long and a short horn, one of which it may 
lose, however. ‘The narwhal is blue-black along the back and spotted 
with dark along the sides, the color fading into ivory white underneath. 
The thin skin covers a very deep layer of fat or blubber, considered a 
delicacy by the Innuit. This blubber is eaten raw, as in fact is most 
of the food in the Arctics, and of course without pepper or salt, neither 
of which is known to the Eskimo. 

In narwhal hunting, the Innuit approaches the animal from the rear 
and one side, decreasing the distance noiselessly until he is within strik- 
ing distance. A companion always accompanies the hunter, so that, in 
the event of his being struck by the narwhal, and his boat overturned, 
there may be some rescue at hand. The harpoons used in narwhal 
hunting formerly had heads made of flakes from the iron meteorites 
near Cape York, but since the first quarter of the nineteenth century 
the Eskimo have obtained their metal from traders and from whaling 
and other ships. ‘The harpoon head is joined to a piece of walrus or 
narwhal ivory, which fits loosely on to the ivory end of the shaft. To 
the center of this harpoon head, is fastened a line of walrus hide kept 
in place by the hand that holds the harpoon. ‘he line itself is coiled 
on the fore part of the kayak, so that it will unwind rapidly and with- 
out becoming tangled. Attached to the other end of this line and 
placed in the after part of the kayak are two objects, a sealskin bag 
and a drag resembling a box lid. When the animal dives and flees 
vainly from the pain of the harpoon point imbedded in its flesh, the 
drag tires it out, and the skin bag, floating on the surface of the water, 
marks its position and keeps it from sinking. ‘The hunter, who adroitly 
gets out of the way of the infuriated animal, can thus trace its course 
and finally tow it home. 

The Verhoeff glacier represented in the painting is one of two glaciers 


PAINTINGS OF GREENLAND ESKIMO 225 


at the head of Robertson Bay, on the northern shore of Inglefield Gulf, 
West Greenland. It was here that Verhoeff, the meteorologist of one of 
the Peary Expeditions, while trying to cross the glacier alone, lost his 
life in September of 1892. The sea wall of the glacier is from 150 to 
200 feet high, but the ice shelves out beneath the water, where the buoy- 
ancy of the sea breaks off parts which float away as icebergs. This 
birth of icebergs at the water’s edge of a glacier often causes waves 
thirty or forty feet in height, miles in extent, and attended by volleys of 
thunderous reports that are terrifying in the ears of the Eskimo. Each 
of these glaciers is an arm of the inland ice cap of Greenland, a mighty 
sheet submerging mountains and valleys to a depth of 5,000 feet or 
more. 


The Third or Southern Panel — Cape York, a Summer Home of the 


Tnnuit. 


The scene depicted is at Cape York, a summer home of the Innuit, 
at the head of Melville Bay. Here the Innuit, or Arctic Highlander, as 
he was misnamed by Sir James Ross, is first met by those visiting the 
Arctics. The painting gives a view of Cape York looking toward the 
north. 

In the foreground is the camp, where an Innuit leans over a harp- 
seal which he has killed and is about to cut up, while his dogs are 
watching for some stray pieces of meat. This man is clothed in bear- 
skin trousers and a hooded jacket made of about seventy auk skins, the 
feathers being turned next to the body. He is wearing boots of seal- 
skin. 

To the left in the camp is a girl of about seven years, painted from 
a sketch made by the artist in 1894. She is clothed in small trousers 
of fox skin and an upper hooded garment, also of fox skin, and wears 
boots of sealskin, reaching to the thighs. She is attending a fire of 
moss and blubber, over which blood soup is being prepared, while 
guarding from the dogs a piece of meat on the ground at her right. 
Behind the girl are two sealskin tents (tupekhs) from one of which 
a young woman is emerging. 

Beyond the tents are mountains towering 1500 to 3000 feet above the 
camp. The summits of these mountains are frequently obscured by 
dense fogs, from which come continuaily the wild cries of innumerable 
multitudes of kittiwake gulls and littie auks. 


226 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


Copyright 1908 Ly Frank Wiikert St.kes. 


SCENE AT CAPE YORK, A SUMMER HOME OF THE ESKIMO. 


The southern panel of the West Wall. 


In this bay, but some miles to the eastward, the three meteorites 
now on exhibition in the foyer of this museum remained for ages. 
It was Peary who wrested them from their ancient abode and brought 
them to New York in 1895. From these meteorites, in olden times, 
the Innuit flaked. off pieces for use in knives, harpoons and arrow 
heads, to aid in the struggle for food and lite. 


NEWS NOTES 227 


MUSEUM NEWS NOTES. 


INCE our last issue the following persons have been elected to 
membership in the Museum: Annual Members, Messrs. 
Witiiam H. ALLEN, CHARLES CoLuins, MAUNSELL S. CrRosBY, 

GusTAVE F. Kos, GILBERT Rospert Livineston, Jr., HENRY MEHL, 
Winiiam Lincotn Parker, Henry M. Toco, Wm. WuitMman, JR., 
and JoHN WILLIAMS and Miss ANNIE TWEEDIE. 


Tue Liprary has recently received from His Royal Highness the 
Illustrious Prince and Archduke Ludwig Salvator of Austria twenty 
volumes descriptive of the natural history of some of the islands and 
towns of the Mediterranean. ‘These books were privately printed by 
the Archduke of Austria and were published in a most sumptuous 
manner. ‘lhe works are as follows: Liparische Inseln, eight volumes, 
Ustica, Columbretes, Alboran, Benzert, Eggligio, Bougie, Zante (two 
volumes), Parga (two volumes), Leokas and a splendid panoramic 
view of Alexandrette. 


Mr. Witrtram G. DE Wirr, one of our Life Members, has just 
presented to the Library his private collection of more than two hun- 
dred volumes on microscopical subjects, which includes a complete set 
of the Transactions of the Royal Microscopical Society from the begin- 
ning to the present time. 


THe Department of Anthropology has recently purchased from 
Professor Eugene Schroeder a collection from the South Sea Islands 
containing, among other objects, garments, hair ornaments, chains, 
fans, war clubs and an assortment of twenty-five shells from the Caro- 
lines. 


Tue Department of Ornithology has received thirty-one King and 
other penguins from the Antarctic, collected by Captain B. D. Cleveland. 
The series includes specimens of both young and adults and represents 
an entirely different kind of bird life from anything the Museum has 


had before. 


228 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 

On account of the recent introduction of the Brown-tail Moth to 
New York state, a special exhibit of the Brown-tail and Gypsy moths 
has been placed on the first floor near the elevators. ‘The life histories 
of these pests together with the damage they do, relatively harmless 
insects which might be mistaken for them, and other introduced insects 
are shown. 


Tue fall exhibition of the Horticultural Society of New York will be 
held at the Museum from November 3 to 7. The exhibition will be open 
on Wednesday after 7 o’clock Pp. M. especially for the members of the 
Museum, the Society and affiliated organizations. On ‘Thursday, 
Friday and Saturday from 9 4. M. to 5 p. M. and from 7 to 10 P. M., and 
on Sunday from | to 5 p. M., the exhibition will be open to the general 
publie. 


LECTURE ANNOUNCEMENTS. 


MEMBERS’ COURSE. 


‘THe first course of illustrated lectures for the season 1909-1910 to Mem- 
bers of the Museum and persons holding complimentary tickets given them 
by Members will be given in November and December. 


Thursday evenings at 8:15 o’clock. Doors open at 7:45. 


November 18.— Pror. HerscHent C. Parker, ‘Alaska and the Explora- 
tion of Mt. McKinley.” 

Professor Parker of Columbia University for many years has made a specialty 
of climbing the high mountains of northwestern North America and has made many 
first ascents in the Canadian Rockies and the Selkirks. He was one of the party 
that attempted the aszent of Mt. McKinley in 1906. His photographs are superb. 


December 2.— Mr. A. Rapcityrre Duemore, “Camera Adventure in the 
Wilds of Africa.” 

Mr. Dugmore is a naturalist who has made a specialty of hunting big game with 
the cameza, and his photographs obtained by flashlight and daylight are wonders. 
They preserve the record of a 1500-mile journey on foot through the dense jungle 
of British East Africa and inelude a charging rhinoceros at close range, lions at from 
nine to twelve yards distant and herds of hippopotamus, zebra and antelope. 


December 9.— Mr. Donatp B. McMinian, ‘With Peary in the Arctic.” 


Mr. MeMillan was a member of the seientifie staff of the Steamer ‘‘ Roosevelt ”’ 
on her latest trip to the Aretie regions and was the leader of the second suppoit- 


LECTURES 229 


ing party in Commander Peary’s successful dash to the Pole. He had charge of 

the tidal work and of compiling notes on the Eskimo and the natural history of the 

expedition. 

December 16.— Dr. Hucu M. Smiru, “The Coast of Brittany and the 
Industries of the People.” 


Dr. Smith is Deputy Commissioner of the United States Bureau of Fisheries 
and has traveled extensively in the discharge of his official duties. Recently he 
made a particularly interesting excursion along the coast of France and obtained 
some remarkable photographs. The results of this expedition are embodied in this 
lecture. 


PUPILS’ COURSE. 
THESE lectures are open to the pupils of the public schools when accom- 


panied by their teachers and to the children of Members of the Museum on 
the presentation of Membership tickets. 


Lectures begin at 4 P. M. 


Oct. Nov. 
Monday, 25. 15.— “The Development of New York City.” By Roy 
W. MINER. 
Wednesday, 27 17.— “Life in the Arctic Regions.” By Mrs. A. L. 
ROESLER. 
Friday, 29 19.— “American Forests and Their Uses.” By GrorGr 
H. SHERWOOD. 
Nov 
Monday, 1 22.— “Scenes in the British Isles.’ By Louis Hus- 
SAKOP. 
Dec. 


Wednesday, 3  1.— “Life Among Our Indians.” By Haran I. Suir. 
Friday, 5 3.— “Animals Helpful to Man.”” By Roy W. Miner. 
Monday, 8 6.— “Mining Industries of the United States.” By E. 


O. Hovey. 
Wednesday, 10 8.— “Animals Injurious to Man.” By F. E. Lurz. 
Friday, 12 10.— “Travels in South America.” By Louis Hus- 
SAKOF. 


PEOPLE’S COURSE. 


GIVEN in coéperation with the City Department of Education. 
Tuesday evenings at 8 o’clock. Doors open at 7:30. 
All lectures illustrated with stereopticon views. 


November 2.— Mr. R. Cornesius Rasy, ‘‘The Historic Alamo City.” 
November 9.— Miss Mary V. Worstett, ‘The Yosemite Valley.” 


230 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


November 16.— ‘‘Mr. BENJAMIN S. Comstock, “The Canadian Rockies.”’ 

November 23.— Dr. Epwarp P. Crowe tu, “‘Across the New England 
States.” 

November 30.— Lecturer and subject to be announced. 


Saturday evenings at 8:15 o’clock. Doors open at 7:30. 


Dr. Witiram L. Estaprooxe,— the last four of a course of eleven lec- 


* 


tures on inorganic chemistry, illustrated by experiments. 


November 6.— ‘‘Chlorine and Hydrochloric Acid.” 

November 13.— “Fluorine, Bromine and Iodine.” 

November 20.— ‘‘ Nitrogen and Its Oxides; Nitric Acid and Ammonia.” 
November 27.— ‘‘Carbon and Some of Its Compounds.” 


Children are not admitted to the lectures of the People’s Course, except 
on presentation of a Museum Member’s Card. 


CARCHARODON MEGALODON. 


RESTORATION OF THE JAWS OF THE FOSSIL SHARK, 


The American Museum Journal 


Vou. IX DECEMBER, 1909 No. 8 


THE GIANT OF ANCIENT SHARKS. 


T the entrance of the Hall of Fossil Fishes there is now exhibited 

a restoration of the jaws of a shark (Carcharodon meqalodon) 

which lived along the coast of South Carolina, in Tertiary time. 

There can be no doubt that this was the largest and most formidable fish 

living or extinct of which we have any record. The jaws of a fully 

grown specimen measured about nine feet across and must have had a 

gape of five or six feet. The teeth themselves average about six inches 

in height in the middle of the jaw, and they gradually decrease in size 

in the direction of the sides of the mouth, the smallest teeth measur- 
ing about two inches. 

In the present restoration the teeth have been arranged as in the liy- 
ing species of Carcharodon, the great White Shark or Man-Eater, for 
there can be no question that the fossil shark differed in no essential 
structure from its modern relative. Accordingly the jaws of Carcharo- 
don rondeleti were carefully measured (a splendid pair having been 
loaned by the Museum of Natural History of Paris, through the cour- 
tesy of Professor Valliant), and the model was prepared according to 
scale, that is, in accordance with the proportions of the teeth in the ex- 
tinct and in the living form. The fossil teeth were then arranged on 
the jaws in the same number of rows and in the same number of banks 
of graded sizes. Fortunately for this purpose a large assortment of teeth 
of the fossil shark was available, out of which an almost complete denti- 
tion was selected. This material had been collected during many years 
by a resident of Charleston, Joseph Cohen, and the collection was se- 
cured through a grant from the Cleveland H. Dodge fund. 

The accompanying picture gives an idea of the impressive size of 
the ancient Carcharodon. Indeed from the teeth alone one can form a 
reasonably accurate estimate of the dimensions of the fossil fish, for it is 
known that a specimen of the living species in which the largest tooth 
was one and one half inches in height measured twenty feet, and that 
another having teeth three inches in height had a total length of forty 
feet. It therefore follows that the length of the Carolina shark whose 


233 


234 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


teeth measured six inches was approximately eighty feet, an estimate, 
by the way, which was made many years ago by Professor Goode. ‘The 
largest living shark is the Whale Shark, Rhinodon which probably does 
not exceed fifty feet in length. 

In spite of its great size, Carcharodon appears to have been quite 
common in its day, Judging at least from the number of teeth found in 
the deposits of phosphate. And from this fact one may form an idea 
of the richness of the marine fish fauna of that time. For where there 
existed one of these sharks there must have been a vast number of fishes 
of the usual bony-fish type, for sharks are proverbially rapacious, and 
we can estimate fairly that the daily provisioning of so huge a creature 
implies the capturing of tons of bony-fishes. ‘This is worthy of mention 
also, because it gives us a striking illustration of the imperfection of the 
geological record. It is a well-known fact that in regions where the 
teeth of this shark are plentiful, there occur few fossils of the common 
kinds of fishes. Even the most fragmentary remains of bony-fishes 
(teleosts) are usually lacking. It is none the less clear from the very 
presence of the sharks that a contemporary fish-fauna must have been 
represented in the most abundant way. 

BAsHFORD DEAN. 


EXPERIMENTAL WORK WITH POMACE FLIES. 


XPERIMEN'TAL studies in evolution are important not only for 
their theoretical interest, but also because it is believed that the 
principles worked out in the lowest forms of life will apply also 

to domestic animals and plants and even to man. 

It is the natural course of scientific progress for verbal description 
and speculation to be followed by mathematical statement and experi- 
mental analysis. Certain experiments were made even before Darwin’s 
time and a large part of Darwin’s own work was experimental; but 
the painstaking studies of de Vries concerning the origin of plant species, 
together with the recognition of Mendel’s Laws of Heredity, not only 
have given an impetus to experimental evolution, but also, in a large 
measure, have determined the character of the work. As a consequence, 


research by pedigree breeding for de Vriesian ‘‘ mutations” and_ the 


POMACE FLIES 239 


testing of the manner of inheritance have been energetically carried on 
during the past few years and have yielded many interesting results. 
Other factors of evolution, such as the effect of environment, the laws of 
fluctuating variation, and selection, have also been studied quantita- 
tively and experimentally, although to a less extent. 

In these experiments it is important to know the characters of both 
the ancestors of the individuals used and of their progeny. Pedigreed 
cultures must be made. Therefore, it is desirable to use some rapidly 
breeding form which can be easily reared. Domestic animals and in- 
sects have been favorite zodlogical material, and among the latter the 
common red-eyed Pomace Fly (Drosophila ampelophila), also known 
as the Vinegar Fly, Sour Fly and Fruit Fly, has been found to be an 
excellent laboratory creature. It feeds upon fermenting vegetable mat- 
ter. At ordinary room temperature a generation can be obtained every 
two weeks. The eggs are laid directly upon the food (e. g. ripe banana) 


Bigs 


FIG. |. FORE LEG OF A MALE POMACE FLY, DROSOPHILA AMPELOPHILA. 


and hatch in two or three’ days into legless larvee, or maggots, which 
pupate after about a week of feeding. The pupal period is four or 
five days long, and in a trifle over twenty-four hours after emergence 
from the pupal case the adults mate and a new generation is started. 
The adults live, on the average, three weeks or a month and the female 
may lay as many as three hundred eggs. 

The males differ from the females very strikingly in the adult stage. 
They are somewhat smaller and the under side of the abdomen is more 
completely pigmented. The most interesting difference, however, is 
the possession by the males of a relatively large comb-like structure, 
upon the anterior legs (see Fig. 1). This is a secondary sexual character 
that is as pronounced as the antlers of deer. It would be explained by 
many, since no other function is apparent, as a male adornment which 
is pleasing to the female. However, I have found that the males from 


‘ 


which the “sex combs” have been removed are just as successful in 


236 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


getting mates as those which possess it, although strong evidence of 


sexual selection with respect to other characters is being obtained. 


It is generally believed that close inbreeding is always attended by 


decreased vitality and disuse by degeneration. ‘This is not the case 


with Drosophila ampelophila. It has been repeatedly bred for a large 


Big.) 2: 


Fig. 


- 


FIG. 2. A WING OF DROSOPHILA AM- 
PELOPHILA SHOWING REDUCTION OF 
VENATION DUE TO SELECTION. 

FIG. 3. A NORMALWING OF DROSOPHILA 
AMPELOPHILA. 

FIG. 4. A WING OF DROSOPHILA .AM- 
PELOPHILA SHOWING INCREASE OF VENA- 
TION DUE TO SELECTION 


number of generations, mating 
brother and sister, without disastrous 
results. I have, furthermore, made 
careful measurements of the wings 
of successive generations and found 
that although my pedigreed stock 
has not been allowed to fly for more 
than fifty generations, there has 
been no degeneration of the wing 
either as to size or as to venation. 
On the other hand, by selective 
breeding I have been able to get 
specimens with greatly reduced wing 
venation as is shown in Figure 2, 
Figure 3 showing the normal wing. 
Selection in the other direction, 7. e., 
for increased venation, is just as 
effective (Fig. 4). A study of the 
inheritance of these variations was 
begun at the Station for Experi- 
mental Evolution of the Carnegie 
Institution and is being continued, 
with other mathematical and exper- 
imental studies of evolution, at the 
Museum. About 200,000 pedigreed 
individuals of this species alone have 
already been obtained. ‘The inter- 


pretation of the results of this work is complicated by the fact that the 


two sexes display the abnormalities to unequal degrees and also because 


the mode of inheritance deviates strongly from expectation on the basis 


of the commonly accepted laws. 


F. E. Luz: 


THE GUFFEY METEORITE 237 


THE GUFFEY, COLORADO, METEORITE. 


N November, 1907, two cowboys, Robert L. Pope of Canyon City, 
Colorado, and J. T. Witcher of Guffey, Park Co., Colorado, dis- 
covered an iron meteorite while they were riding after their cattle 

along the head waters of the Freshwater River. The exact location 
of the find is the N. E. { of the N. E. } of Section 16, Township 35, 
Range 72, 6th Principal Meridian, W. in Freemont County, Colorado. 
The nearest post office is Guffey, Park County, about three and one 
half miles from the spot where the iron was found. ‘The cowboys 
secured help and at last succeeded in getting the mass out of the 
mountains and to Cripple Creek. ‘The American Museum purchased 
it from the finders, and it is now on exhibition in the foyer. 

Guffey, as it must be called from the name of the post office nearest 


oe 


to the spot where it was found, is a “‘siderite,” or wholly metallic mete- 
orite 365 inches long, 15 inches in maximum height and 8 inches wide. 
Its weight is 682 pounds. ‘The mass is roughly pear-shaped, but much 
flattened. One edge is so straight and is so nearly rectangular with 
reference to the adjoining sides that it seems like a definite fracture, 
indicating the possibility of there being another fragment or other frag- 
ments of the meteorite in the vicinity of the spot where this was found. 
The surface of the iron is covered with an extremely thin film of black 
iron oxide, which looks as if it might be the original skin formed by 
the passage of the meteorite through the air. At any rate, the iron is 
free from rusty scale and apparently had not lain long upon the moun- 
tain before it was found. ‘The statement is made that a vivid meteor 
passed over the Freshwater River region in the fall of 1906, and the 
supposition is that this mass is a part of it. The evidence, however, is 
not strong in support of this theory. The cowboys who found the iron 
were not searching for a meteorite, and in fact did not know that they 
had found one. ‘The briiliant white color disclosed on rubbing the sur- 
face ied them to suppose that they had found a mass of pure silver, and 
they started to get it to town accordingiy, after making an unsuccessful 
effort to cut off the small end of the specimen. 

Two sides show in good development the “thumb marks” or ‘‘piézo- 
givphs” characteristic of meteoritic masses. These markings are par- 
ticularly deep upon the flat side shown in Figure 2, and they are less 


oUF JO 4SoW JUO’ UL pus puny VYysit 
SMOLIN} VSO “are 


OU} 
oUt 9} BY} oyvorpur syutod pure 
*MOY OF onp syd [Boluooqns pur 


‘SLIYOSLAW AZ44N95 *| ‘Sid 


toddn ayy pur apis SIU} UQIM we 


94} Ysnory} pessed a411004 
OF TIM uoroty Aq peonpord SUIOUL [R 


foytedns Jo yynser ev sv ase SMOLINY SMOYQ 
“ SLIASISNYS,, YO ‘LNOYS 


SEG 


*SSCUL VY} JO 


Opis styy UO podoporop A]SuONS ok ‘O}LLOJOUU BV JO GIVJIMS Of} TIAOD Aypensn yor ‘sydapsozerd wo syceui-quinyy pol[vo suotssatdep ot], 


‘YIvV BHL HONOYHL ASNUNOLF SLI ONIYNG G3LO4aL0Ud ‘AqGIS YVAN “SLIMOSLASW AasANOS 7% OIA 


686 


‘SMOLINF MOY PUB SYIVUI-GQUINY] SNOIOUINU YIM PoJUIpUL ST 
DOVTINS Ot “1 ol YSnoat Yslf]f S,ojLtoojour oy} JO ySour SuLmMp qyuoay ut sem AyTqeqoad a8po s1yy yo uonaod pury qyoy soddn or 
d Als . . ‘ . . . | | . a . | n ala 


“GALISIHXS SV SSVW JO 39045 YaddN “ALIYOSLSW ASBSANO ‘E ‘DIS 


OFG 


‘oOBJINS Sty} UO podoporop ATtood ore ‘syavur quinyy to ‘sydd[sozaig “ue oY} UL ofA ‘ssvur [euLst.o 
DY} JO aMyoray opquqord B soyworpur YOY ‘sLoqystou s}t OZ ooVJAMS sty} JO UONIor aRMBuRzoor ySoure “Uses ou. Zurmoue 


‘OQSLIGIHXS SV SSVWW JO 3903 YSMO1 ‘“SLINOSLAW ABZSANO “+ ‘DIS 


AY - * - © ee Asi ite ty 


242 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


pronounced and somewhat more elongated in the round edge shown in 
Figure 3. The flat side shown in Figure 1 has comparatively few round 
piézoglyphs, but it has many pits, grooves and points due to the flowing 
of the meiting surface of the mass during flight through the atmosphere. 
The almost square edge, which is illustrated in Figure 4 and which is 
considered to be an abrupt fracture occurring when the meteorite was 
near the end of its atmospheric flight, has an oxidized skin like the rest 
of the mass but shows piézogiyphs very imperfectiy. 

Figure | shows the side which was in front during most of the meteor- 
ite’s atmospheric flight and is called by the Germans the “brustseite.” 
‘The position of the furrows indicates that the line of flight was toward the 
upper right hand quarter of the mass as shown in this picture. Although 
the iron is unusually uniform and dense in structure, as will be brought 
out under the discussion of its composition, it evidently yielded unequaily 
to the heat produced by friction with the atmosphere, and the air in 
passing over its surface plowed deep furrows ending in subconicai pits 
and left sharp projections pointing forward in the direction of flight. 

A piece of the iron which had been sawed from the smail end of the 
mass was polished and etched with dilute nitric acid at the Museum and 
was afterwards polished again and 
treated with dilute and strong nitric 
acid and picric acid in succession by 
the chemists, Booth, Garrett and Blair, 
Philadelphia, picric acid proving to be 
the best mordant. ‘The surface does 
not show the Widmanstiitten lines 
usualiy characteristic of meteoritic iron, 
but instead it possesses an extremely 
fine granular crystalline — structure, 


which is shown magnified 100 diam- 


FIG. 5. GUFFEY METEORITE. PHOTO- eters in Figure 5 from a photomicro- 
MICROGRAPH. ry 

graph made by the analysts. ‘The 
Polished section magnified 100 diam- ; 
homogeneous character of the mass 

eters to show cryptocrystal- ; ; : ut 
tae See, and the paucity of nonmetallic contents 


are indicated by the high specific 
gravity. ‘The chemical analysis, made by Booth, Garrett and Blair, 


resulted as follows: 


RECENT ADDITIONS TO METEORITES 243 


Tron : : . : ‘ : ; . 88.687 % 
Nickel . ; ; . 10.547% 
Cobalt . ; ; : ; : : . O0O546% 
Chromium. ; : A . ; - OOS, 
Manganese. : : none 
Casbon, ; ; : : : . 00259; 
Silicon. 4 : A : : : ; none 
Sulphur . 3 : ; : f f . 0.016% 
Phosphorus — . F : : : ; - 0.020% 

‘Votal 3 ; : z : ‘ . 99.859% 


Specific gravity, 7.939. 


This analysis shows that the Guffey meteorite contains rather more 
than the average percentage of nickel and cobalt and unusually low 
percentages of carbon, sulphur and phosphorus. The extremely small 
amount of sulphur found indicates the practical absence from the mass 
of troilite, the protosulphide of iron which is found only in meteorites. 
This inference is substantiated by the few particles of this mineral which 
are to be seen on careful examination of the surface. The low content of 
phosphorus might have been inferred from the practical absence of 
schreibersite (a phosphide of nickel and iron characteristic of meteorites) 
as shown by the polished and etched specimen, this mineral being the 
substance that usually brings the Widmanstiitten lines out in relief, 

Epmunp Otis Hovey. 


RECENT ADDITIONS TO THE METEORITES IN THE FOYER. 


URING the past summer three important accessions were 

installed among the meteorites in the Foyer. They were 

(1) the newly discovered iron known as Guffey which is de- 

scribed elsewhere in this issue of the JouRNAL, (2) a slice and cast of the 

iron meteorite called Gibeon and (3) the largest known portion, weighing 
20 pounds 3 ounces, of the stone meteorite Modoc. 

The manner of installing the Gibeon section is a new departure in 
the mounting of meteorites, as far as we know. About two years ago 
we received through exchange with the Natural History Museum of 
Hamburg, Germany, a plaster cast of the larger of the two known por- 


‘M3AlIA 1VHYSNA9 “ALIYOSALSAW NOY! NOAEIS PEG 


GIBEON IRON METEORITE. GREAT NAMAQUA LAND, AFRICA. 


Cast iron reproduction with etched slice of original in its proper position. 
The electric light has been inserted in order to display clearly the ** Wid- 
manstatten lines’? that show the crystalline character of meteoritic iron 


and the lack of such lines in artificial iron. 


246 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


tions of this interesting find, together with a polished and etched slice 
giving a complete section of the mass in its greatest dimensions and 
showing in remarkably beautiful development the Widmanstiitten lines 
that are generally characteristic of meteoritic iron. ‘The original mass 


weighed 562 pounds. We determined the correct position of the slice im 


GIBEON IRON METEORITE. POLISHED AND ETCHED SECTION 


One fourth natural size. 


the plaster cast, cut the latter in two and fitted the slice inte its proper 
place. ‘Then we had each portion of the plaster cast reproduced in 
cast iron, and hinged the two parts together, with the natural section 


in its original position, thus showing not only the appearance of the mass 


RECENT ADDITIONS TO METEORITES 247 


as found but also its internal crystalline structure. We also polished the 
opposing surface of the cast iron reproduction and treated it with dilute 
nitrie acid in the same manner as the meteorite itself had been treated, 
in order to bring out the fact that artificial iron does not possess the 
crystalline structure which is so characteristic of the other. A natural 
depression fortunately pierced the upper half of our cast and gave us an 
ideal way of introducing an electric light to enable visitors to see clearly 
the Widmanstiitten lines of the meteorite and the amorphous character 
of the cast iron. 

The meteorite takes its name from the little village of Gibeon whose 
geographical position is about 25° 8’ South latitude and 17° 50’ East 
longitude in the eastern part of Great Namaqua Land, in German 
southwest Africa, the home of the Hottentot. wo other famous iron 
meteorites have been found within a radius of 125 miles of Gibeon: 
Mukerop, of which there is a fine slice in the Ward-Coonley collection 
of meteorites, now in our Hall of Geology, and Lion River, which 
came from near the hamlet of Bethany and is represented by a small 
part of a slice in our general series. ‘The latter has been known for 
more than half a century, having been described by Prof. C. U. 
Shepard in 1856. The former has come to public notice more recently. 
It resembles Gibeon in crystalline structure so closely that some authori- 
ties have been inclined to consider them parts of the same fall. Lion 
River, however, is entirely distinct in character. 

Modoc is an aérolite or stony meteorite that was seen to fall near the 
town of Modoc, Scott County, Kansas, and the occurrence is described 
by Mr. J. K. Freed, an eyewitness of the fall and the finder of our 
specimen, as follows: 


“The meteorite appeared as a ball of fire in the west September 2, 1905, 
at 10 0’clock in the evening, the sky being cloudless and the clear atmosphere 
of the plains being undisturbed by wind. From Scott City to Syracuse, 
75 miles southwest, it was light enough to read common newspaper print on 
the street and the explosions rattled doors and windows. ‘The mass ex- 
ploded, and then the resulting fragments exploded several times in rapid 
succession. The fragments gleamed brightly at first but their light went out 
almost immediately after the explosions. "Then came the sounds of the 
explosions, the whistling like bullets or heavy hail of the smaller fragments 
and a most intense humming like that of a rapidly revolving cylinder of some 
heavy machine, evidently caused by the larger mass. This was followed by 


248 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


fierce cannonading (echoes of the explosions ?) like the discharge of a battery 
of artillery or a rapid-fire machine gun, gradually growing fainter and dying 
out like rolling thunder in the distance. ‘The first explosion took place about 
40 miles west of the fall and fully as far above the surface of the earth. The 
fragments were scattered over an area nine miles by three; the largest ones 
going farthest. I heard the largest one drop and hunted for it for over two 
years. 

“On May 6, 1908, I was breaking new ground on the prairie with a gang- 
plow and a five horse team that was a little too high-spirited to be controlled 
easily, but having half-mile furrows as smooth as a lawn before me, I had set 
the plow a few notches deeper into the ground and let them go, thinking 
nothing of meteorites. While congratulating myself upon our speed we 
suddenly — very suddenly — struck something hard. It threw me out of 
my seat and piled my gang-plow up in a promiscuous heap against the team, 
which was too badly surprised to do anything. I had plowed hundreds of 
acres and knew there was not a rock within ten miles of me, so my first 
thoughts were of dynamite. After sitting for some time trying to think, I 
ventured back to where my plow had left the ground. Seeing nothing, I 
commenced stabbing with my jack-knife and soon located the cause of the 
disturbance. It was the largest fragment of the Modoc meteorite and com- 
pletely buried under the tough buffalo sod (virgin soil) and was pounded in 
so hard that the force of the blow of my gang-plow had not loosened it. So 
completely was it buried, that I had hunted dozens of times all over that 
pasture without either finding the rock or the hole in the ground which it had 
made.” 


‘Twenty-five fragments of Modoc have been found. All are covered 
with the thin glassy black coating or “skin” that is generally character- 
istic of aérolites and that is caused by the melting of the surface in the 
great heat generated by friction with the air during flight through the 
sarth’s atmosphere. Flakes broken off by the plow reveal the interior 
of the mass and show that the meteorite is composed of whitish stony 
material like some terrestrial lavas, but containing bright specks of 
metallic iron. 


SPIDERS OF SOUTHERN MEXICO 249 


A TRIP TO SOUTHERN MEXICO FOR SPIDERS. 


HEN I found in June, 1909, that I was to visit southern Mexico 
to collect spiders, I anticipated the trip with great interest 
since only a few species of spiders had been described from 

the States of Vera Cruz and ‘Tabasco, while Chiapas remained entirely 
unexplored. From the geography of the country we should expect to 
find a continuation of the Central American coast fauna along the 


BVERA CRUZ 


~* oe 
LA BUENAVENTURA @ \< 


\ 
/ 


it-. 
\ 


@POAXACA 1 
© A xX An 

' 

e 


1 = } 
Bee 4 Pe 
@PALOMARES 
= = 


— 


; 
RSAN GERONIMO. C 


= 
itt Te 


s 2 
Ne@MAPASTEPEC/ Uy 


s . 
S@tazacuatPa f 
\ 
TAPACHULASS 
e 1 


22) 
MERISCAL 
, 0 


MAP OF SOUTHEASTERN MEXICO SHOWING REGION VISITED BY DR. PETRUNKEVITCH. 


Pacific coast of Chiapas. On the other hand, the fauna of the lowlands 
of Tabasco, Campeche and Yucatan shows some relation to the West 
Indian fauna, which itself has close relation to the fauna of Venezuela. 
Thus a study of the fauna of Central America is a clue to the under- 
standing of the insular fauna which represents remarkable features in 
the West Indies. 

I left New York July 1 by the Ward Line of steamers and landed 


250 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


at Vera Cruz, July 9. The sky was cloudless, and vegetation showed all 


signs of prolonged drought. During the day the breeze from the sea 


al 


But one other specimen is known. 


and is a specialist on palms and orchids. 


was refreshing, but each even- 
ing this died away leaving the 
night hot and uncomfortable. 
After two days at Vera Cruz, I 
went south on the Vera Cruz 
al Isthmo Railroad, passing 
alternately through savannas 
of mesquite and palms and 
extensive, beautiful jungles. 
Leaving the train at the Santa 
Rosa flag station on the Isth- 
mus of Tehuantepec, an hour’s 
ride brought me to the rubber 
plantation La Buena Ventura, 
where it was my good fortune 
to experience for ten days the 
hospitality of Mr. J. C. Harvey, 
one of the owners. Mr. Harvey 
has extensive knowledge of 
tropical plant and animal life 

His house is surrounded by a 


veritable botanical garden of trees and other plants from all parts of the 


world, while the plantation itself is picturesquely shut in by the jungle. 


TRAP-DOOR SPIDER, CHORIZOPS LORICATUS. 


Side view. 


Enlarged. 


End of abdomen, used 
as the ‘ trap-door.”’ 


Judging from foot-prints, the locality was a good one for hunting 


jaguar, tapir, wild swine and deer, but I was intent on smaller game. 


In the depth of the jungle, there is little 


life on the ground. Along the 


SPIDERS OF SOUTHERN MEXICO 251 


trails, however, and at the edge of the woods are great numbers of butter- 
flies and grasshoppers and many species of other insects. During two 
days, one species of butterfly was migrating high over the jungle in 
immense numbers. I found two large tarantulas common. ‘There 
was found also and presented to me by Mr. E. Howard, a specimen of a 
very rare trap-door spider, Chorizops loricatus C. KK. ‘There is only one 
other specimen of this spider known to exist, and that is in the Paris 
collection. 

After leaving La Buena Ventura, I spent four days at Palomares in 


E. O. Hovey, Pro.o, 1906. 
SANTA LUCRECIA. A NATIVE VILLAGE ON THE ISTHMUS OF TEHUANTEPEC 


the State of Oaxaca on the Isthmus. Here there is also an extensive 
jungle, but the character of the vegetation is somewhat different, owing 
to different soil. It did not, however, afford enough peculiarities to 
merit a long stay, so I proceeded to San Geronimo. At this place, 
the country has the character of a semi-desert with mesquite and cactus 
and very little rainfall. This year, however, about a week before my 
arrival, an especially heavy rain flooded the land for miles. The water 
ran off quickly, and soon the heat of the sun caused the soil to crack, 


202 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


forming crevices in all directions, some of them more than three feet deep 
and so broad that I could thrust my arm into them. Much of the life of 
the surface evidently had been destroyed by the water. I found many 
hundreds of trap-door spiders’ nests but all were deserted and ruined. 
The most striking and distinctive character of the fauna at San 
Geronimo seems to be brilliancy of coloring. ‘Thus the black spider, 
Latrodectus mactans, common all over tropical countries, has here broad 
coral-red stripes which give it an appearance more red than black. ‘The 


E. O. Hovey, Photo., 1906. 
ON THE JALTEPEC RIVER, ISTHMUS OF TEHUANTEPEC. 


black scorpion is replaced by a yellow one, the black and brown tarantula 
by a species with pink cephalothorax and red-striped abdomen. Speci- 
mens of arachnida were abundant, but the number of species was few, 
so that three days proved time enough to get a representative collection. 
My next stop was made at Tonala, Chiapas. ‘This town is in the 
rainy belt which begins a few miles to the southeast of San Geronimo 
and extends along the Pacific coast into Guatemala. In the lowland, it 
was hard to collect, owing to the great amount of water over the ground 


from the swollen brooks. One trip only was made through the little 


SPIDERS OF SOUTHERN MEXICO 253 


ranches on the plain, and the remaining days were spent on the slopes 
of the hills about 1200 feet above sea level. 

Finally I decided to go to Tapachula and the Guatemalan border — 
although it turned out that I first had two days of good hunting at a 
rubber plantation, La Zacualpa, on the way to Vapachula. When we 
reached ‘Tapachula on the evening of Thursday, August 5, the rain was 
falling in torrents and did not stop even for a moment until Sunday. We 
wanted to reach the Guatemalan border from Tapachula and return on 


TLS eae 


E. O. Hovey, Photo., 1906. 


CN THE TEHUANTEPEC RIVER. 


the same day, the distance being only some forty-eight kilometers on the 
Pan-American Railroad, but the country was already so flooded that the 
train proceeded very slowly. At one place it stopped, and a ditch was 
made to allow the water to run from one side of the track to the other, 
while an improvised support was constructed for the rails. Meanwhile 
the rain began to fall again, and when, late in the afternoon, we reached 
the last station, about one kilometer from the border, the conductor was 
so afraid of a washout, since the wheels of the cars were already plowing 
through water in many places, that after only a twenty-minute wait he 


254 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


started the train on its backward journey. Therefore on Monday, as I 
heard that the expected washout had occurred and would take some 
two days for repairs, I went again to the rubber plantation La Zacualpa. 

It was no longer possible to collect anywhere in the jungle. In fact 
the water was so deep that it was impossible to enter within its borders, 
except in a canoe. ‘There was plenty of life, however, in the high grass 
among the rubber trees, and in the period of waiting my collection grew to 
such an extent that I had to get all kinds of odd bottles to hold the speci- 
mens. Wednesday we were told that it would take another two days 
to repair the washout. We remained at Zacualpa. When on Friday, 
however, we were told that the washout extended over eighty-eight kilo- 
meters of the railroad more or less, that several bridges were destroyed 
and that some eight days would be required to make the necessary re- 
pairs, we decided to go to the last station to which the train was running 
and there to get horses for Pijijiapam. 

It rained nearly all day Friday, and we had _ to spend the night in a 
railroad car. Next morning we let the horses swim across the river, 
while we carried the baggage over a bridge, the approach to which on 
both sides of the river was dangerous owing to the fact that the track 
had no support, the ties hanging in the air suspended from the rails. 
Furthermore, a great amount of brush and logs had been caught by the 
piers in the middle of the bridge so that it bent perceptibly under the 
pressure. We walked over this bridge one at a time, then resaddled our 
horses and leaving the railroad started on the ‘‘Camina Reale,” or 
“Royal Highway.” Fortunately the rain did not begin until about two 
o’clock or else we should not have been able to cross some of the rivers 
that we encountered. In the dry season these are mere brooks, but now 
some of them were about one hundred yards wide and three to four feet 
deep and so rapid that many a time we hesitated before urging the 
horses to enter. During the three days of our ride, we crossed twelve 
such rivers and more than double that number of smaller streams. 

It would be hard to imagine a worse road than this “Royal High- 
way,” the only road between Tapachula and ‘Tonala. In some places 
it was many yards wide, in others it narrowed to a mere path. It ran 
through the woods and the fields of ranches which were separated from 
each other by miles of beautiful jungle. Where the path was narrow, the 
water from the recent rains was often two feet deep. In other places 
the road was so muddy that we had to lift our feet to the horse’s neck 


SPIDERS OF SOUTHERN MEXICO 259 


to prevent their plowing long distances through the soft clay. Along 
one part of the road a great number of trees had been uprooted by some 
storm and lay across our way. ‘lo ride around the free ends of these 
trees necessitated in many cases the use of the machete and in conse- 
quence much delay. 

It is not surprising that, under such circumstances, we were able to 
make no more than four kilometers an hour on the average. With our 
baggage soaked because of repeated crossings of rivers and ourselves so 
wet that we no longer minded the rain, we arrived on the evening of the 
first day at Mapastepec where we stopped over night. On the next day 
we reached Margarita and stopped at a Mexican ranch, sleeping 1n 
hammocks in the same wet clothing of our journey. On the third day 
we reached Pijijiapam and were glad to remain over night in the rail- 
road station. We found that the bridge over the Pijijiapam River had 
been swept away the twisted rails being washed ashore some hundred 
yards farther down the stream. The following day we crossed this river, 
then paid off our guides and waited for a train that was hourly expected. 
It did not come till late in the evening and proved to be a mere work 
train, but we were grateful to get under cover from the rain and spent 
the night in a box car, reaching Tonala early in the morning. 

These days of ride through the jungle were, perhaps, the most inter- 
esting part of the whole journey. Not only could we study many recent 
foot-prints of wild animals, but also we were accompanied for a long 
time by a crowd of monkeys. They showed no fear and chattered, 
played and swung from tree to tree looking down on us with curiosity. 
Red and green parrots were also present in great numbers, and their 
cry in the evening reminded me forcibly of the distant calling of the 
European crows, when in large flocks they are looking for a night’s 
shelter. The insect life was abundant and apparently the same as at 
Tonala and Zacualpa, but it was impossible to do any collecting under 
the conditions. 

To my great disappointment my collection of spiders from Zacualpa 
and 'Tapachula was considerably damaged during this trip. At first I 
tied the basket containing the jars around my neck and held it on the 
saddle in front, but after fording the first river, I appreciated the fact that 
in case the horse slipped, I should not be able to swim ashore with that 
weight on my neck, so thereafter I fastened my basket to the pack horse. 
The constant shaking resulted in rubbing many specimens to powder, 


56 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


and as though that were not misfortune enough, the horse fell on its 
back in a ditch and broke some of the most valuable vials. Finally, 
so many had been the mishaps that I felt grateful to see that the entire 
collection was not ruined. 

The rest of the journey had fewer unexpected incidents. I did some 
collecting at Cordova and in the vicinity of Mexico City. On the way 
to Texas a flood at Monterey made it impossible to reach San Antonio 
through Laredo, so a westerly detour was made by way of Eagle Pass. 
At Austin, I spent a week collecting under very difficult conditions, for 
the weather had been dry so long that the soil was desiccated and cracked 
and the insects and spiders were hidden deep in the ground. Professor 
Paterson of the University of Texas and Professor Brown of the Pease 
School accompanied me on several of these excursions and most cour- 
teously helped in the collecting. 

As may be easily imagined, the work of the trip was considerably 
impeded by the heavy rains and floods which turned the forests of the 
lowlands into swamps and lakes. With all that, however, the net result 
of the expedition was large. The collections consist not only of some 
2000 specimens of spiders, scorpions and other arachnids but also of 
more than 400 vials containing many specimens each of myriapods and 
insects. ‘lo this list must be added a few specimens of amphibians and 
reptiles and a small collection consisting of nineteen Mexican snakes 
given to me by Mr. Olmstead of Mexico City for presentation to the 
Museum. 

ALEXANDER PETRUNKEVITCH. 


i 
Ey v4 
Kk. O. Hovey, Photo., 1906. 
TEHUANA TRANSPORTATION 


NEWS NOTES 257 


MUSEUM NEWS NOTES. 


T the regular meeting of the Board of Trustees, held on November 
8, Dr. James Douglas was elected a member of the Board. Prince 
Ludwig Salvator was elected a Life Member of the Museum on 
account of the valuable gift of books noted in the last number of the 
Journal; Mr. R. R. Cornell was made a Life Member on account of 
important gifts of the heads of big game and Dr. Hugh M. Smith was 
elected to Life Membership on account of many services rendered and 
courtesies extended to the Museum. 


In addition to the gifts already reported in the Journal the following 
important donations were announced at the Trustees’ meeting: A collec- 
tion of types of North American spiders, received from Dr. Thomas H. 
Montgomery; one hundred books on angling, from Miss Grace H. 
Dodge; an atlas of hand-painted plates of Brazilian flowers, from Mr. 
Anson W. Hard; two hundred volumes on microscopy, from Mr. William 
G. DeWitt; a head-dress from Abyssinia, from Dr. U. S. Kahn. 


SINCE our last issue the following persons have been elected to member- 
ship in the Museum: Patrons, Messrs. James Douaias and Grorce J. 
GouLtp; Life Members, Messrs. S. B. CHaprin, R. R. Cornett, 
Wi1am R. Craig, THos. Dre Wirr Cuyter, Wu. T. Davis, Lewis 
L. DELAFIELD, A. F. EstaBprook, ALESSANDRO FABBRI, CHILDS FRICK, 
JOHN Huspparp, M. R. Jacospus, GoopHveE Livineston, JAMES Mc- 
Lean, Epwarp C. Moore, Jr., Vicror Morawetz, DupLey Otcort, 
2p, J. SANFORD SALTus, PRINZEN UND HERRN ErRzHERzOG LupwiG 
SALVATOR, EDWARD SHEARSON, FRANCIS SKINNER, Byam K. STEVENS, 
FREDERICK StuRGES, F. W. VANDERBILT and Henry R. Watcort, Dr. 
Hucu M. Smira and Mes. Emmons Buaine and SrpNey WEBSTER; 
Sustaining Members, Messrs. H. D. Bapcock, Epwarp S. HarkKNEss, 
Mortimer L. Scuirr, Grant B. ScHLEY and DeLtos O. WickHam and 
Mrs. D. C. Biatr; and Annual Members, Messrs. JosepH A. BLAKE, 
ALBERT CaLMAN, J. B. Francis HERRESHOFF, Cary T. HuTCHINSON, 
Harry La Montacur, James LAUGHLIN, JR., CaarLes L. LEONoRI, 
Frank J. LoGan, Putire M. Lypie, J. M. McCartruy, Wu. McDonatp 
CHARLES MacDonatp, Marvin H.-Meap, Henry H. MELvILiLe, 
Truman H. Newserry, DupLey Otcotrr, Gro. Carp PEASE, VERYL 


258 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


PrEsTON, JOHN T.. Pratr, EpmunD P. Rocers, ALEXANDER RUBEL, 
GeorceE S. Runx, Henry A. Ruscu, WILLIAM SALoMons, T’. P. SHONTs, 
H. B. SmirHers, Geo. S. Terry, S. Breck P. TROWBRIDGE, FRANK 
VIncENT, GEO. D. WipEneEr, P. A. B. WIDENER, WILLIAM WILLIAMS 
and JoHN M. WootseEy, Docrors CLEMENS FuLpa, Utysses S. KAHN 
and E. H. Raymonp, Mayor GENERAL D. E. Sickuss, U. S. A., GEN. 
SAMUEL C. LAWRENCE, Mmes. James Lent Barcuay, C. LepyarD 
Biarr, Davip H. Greer, CHARLES McBurney and JosepH WALKER, 
Jr., and Misses CAROLINE COVENTRY Haynes and Fanny P. Mason. 


THe annual autumn exhibition of the Horticultural Society of New 
York was held at the Museum from the evening of November 3 to 7 
inclusive and was attended by 30,734 visitors. The exhibit was broader 
in scope than that of last year and was more effectively displayed, being 
installed in the foyer and the adjacent halls. ; 

Durina the past summer, Dr. Edmund Otis Hovey of the Depart- 
ment of Geology visited some of the iron and copper mines of the Upper 
Peninsula of Michigan and secured valuable and interesting specimens 
for our collections illustrating economic geology. ‘Through the kindness 
of the Oliver Mining Company, its noted hematite mines at Ishpeming 
were studied in detail and characteristic specimens secured. ‘Through the 
courtesy of Dr. Alexander Agassiz, President of the Calumet and Hecla 
Mining Company, a complete series of specimens was collected illus- 
trating the occurrence of native copper in the celebrated mines of that 
company at Calumet. Through the courtesy of Mr. F. W. Denton, the 
mines at Painsdale were visited and characteristic specimens were se- 


cured. 


Dr. Louis Hussakor, Assistant Curator of Fossil Fishes, recently 
returned from a five months’ trip to Europe. He spent most of his time 
studying the collections of living and fossil fishes in the leading museums; 
among others, the Royal Seottish Museum, the British Museum, the 
Musée d’Histoire Naturelle of Paris and the Berlin Museum. Con- 
siderable attention was given to the methods employed in the exhibition 
and installation of specimens. ‘The last two weeks of the trip were spent 
in studying and collecting living fishes at the Stazione Zoologica, Naples. 
Many valuable scientific data were obtained for future publication, 


NEWS NOTES 259 


DurtinG the past summer collecting in the Eocene deposits of Wyo- 
ming for the Department of Vertebrate Paleontology was continued by 
Mr. Walter Granger. His party was four months in the field and 
devoted its attention principally to the exposures of the Wind River 
beds of the Lower Eocene formation in the Wind River basin in the 
central part of the State. This is the formation in which the famous 
skeleton of the small four-toed horse, Eohippus, was found in 1880 
by Professor Cope’s collectors. Fossil remains are rare in the Wind 
River beds and usually are fragmentary and badly preserved. ‘They are 
desirable, however, because they fill an important place in the Eocene 
history of North America. The collection obtained this season com- 
prises more than four hundred specimens, representing probably all of 
the forms previously known to occur in the formation as well as several 
new ones. It will, therefore, considerably increase our collection illus- 
trating early Eocene life. 


Mr. Barnum Brown of the Department of Vertebrate Paleontology 
returned early in November from a field season spent in collecting in the 
Laramie Cretaceous rocks of Montana. Mr. Brown was assisted by 
Mr. Peter C. Kaisen, and their efforts were richly rewarded by securing 
the major portion of a ceratopsian skeleton besides parts of three skele- 
tons of a new predentate dinosaur from the Hell Creek horizon. Further- 
more, much material was obtained which will be used in mounting a 
skeleton of the three-horned dinosaur ‘Triceratops. 


THERE has been installed in the new accession cases of the Depart- 
ment of Anthropology (Siberian Hall, southwest corner of the ground 
floor) a selected series of specimens from the material collected by Mr. 
Alanson Skinner last summer among the Winnebago, Ojibway and Cree 
Indians, and by Mr. W. C. Orchard among the Penobscot Indians. 


THE twenty-seventh annual convention of the American Ornitholo- 
gists Union is to be held at the Museum ‘Tuesday to Thursday, Decem- 
ber 7 to 9, inclusive. 


260 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM JOURNAL 


LECTURE ANNOUNCEMENTS. 


MEMBERS’ COURSE. 


The following illustrated lectures remain to be given to Members of the 
Museum and persons holding complimentary tickets given them by Members. 


Thursday evenings at 8.15 o’clock. Doors open at 7:45. 


ee 


December 2.— Mr. A. RapcityFrre DuGMore, ‘Camera Adventure in the 
Wilds of Africa.” 

December 9.— Mr. Donatp B. McMitxan, “With Peary in the Arctic.” 

December 16.— Dr. HucuH M. Smirn, “The Coast of Brittany and the 


Industries of the People.” 
PUPILS’ COURSE. 


These lectures are open to the pupils of the public schools when accom- 
panied by their teachers and to the children of Members of the Museum on 
the presentation of Membership tickets. 

Lectures begin at 4 P. M. 

Wednesday, December 1.— H. I. Surru, “Life Among our Indians.” 
Friday, December 3.— R. W. Miner, “ Animals Helpful to Man.” 
Monday, December 6.— E. O. Hovey, “Mining Industries of the United 
States.” 
Wednesday, December 8.— F. E. Lutz, “Animals Injurious to Man.” 
Friday, December 10.— Louis Hussakor, “Travels in South America.” 
PEOREE:S COURSE: 

Given in coéperation with the City Department of Education. 

Saturday evenings at 8:15 o’clock. Doors open at 7:30. 

The last three of a course of eleven lectures by Dr. Witiiam L. Esra- 
BROOK on inorganic chemistry, illustrated by experiments. 

December 4.— ‘*Carbon Dioxide and Ventilation.” 
December 11.— ‘‘’Vhe Atmosphere.” 
December 18.— ‘Combustion and the Flame.”’ 

‘Tuesday evenings at 8:15 o’clock. Doors open at 7:30. Lectures illus- 
trated with stereopticon views. 

December 7.— Mr. Grorce Newton Cross, “The White Hills.” 
December 14.— Mr. GEorGE NEwToNn Cross, ‘City of Washington.” 

Children are not admitted to the lectures of the People’s Course, except 

on presentation of a Museum Member’s Card. 


> ~-omeeagee oe (OO 


0 


oo EE eee 


MEETINGS OF SOCIETIES 261 


LEGAL HOLIDAY COURSE. 


Fully illustrated. Open free to the public. No tickets required. Doors 
open at 2:45, lectures begin at 3:15 o'clock. 

Thanksgiving Day, November 25, 1909. CHartes H. ‘TOWNSEND, 
“The Fiji Islanders and Other People of the South Seas.” 

Christmas Day, December 25, 1909. ALANSON SKINNER, ‘‘ By Canoe 
to Hudson Bay.” 

New Year’s Day, January 1, 1910. Roy W. Miner, ‘Sea Animals of 
Our Shores.” 

Washington’s Birthday, February 22, 1910. Epmunp Oris Hovey, 
“Some American Mining Regions.” 


Particularly those producing Coal, Iron, Copper, Gold and Silver. 


MEETINGS OF SOCIETIES. 


Public meetings of the New York Academy of Sciences and Affiliated 
Societies are held at the Museum according to the following schedule: 


On Monday evenings, The New York Academy of Sciences: 


First Mondays, Section of Geology and Mineralogy; 

Second Mondays, Section of Biology; 

Third Mondays, Section of Astronomy, Physics and Chemistry; 
Fourth Mondays, Section of Anthropology and Psychology. 


On Tuesday evenings, as announced: 


The Linnzan Society of New York; 
The New York Entomological Society; 


The Torrey Botanical Club. 

On Wednesdays, as announced: 
The Horticultural Society of New York; 
The New York Mineralogical Club. 

On Friday evenings, as announced: 


The New York Microscopical Society. 


The programmes of the meetings of the respective organizations are pub- 
lished in the weekly Bulletin of the New York Academy of Sciences and 
sent to the members of the several societies. Members of the Museum on 
making request of the Director will be provided with the Bulletin as issued. 


The American [luseum Journal 


Epmunp Otis Hovey, Editor. 
Mary CyntTuota DickEerson, Associate Editor. 
FRANK M. CHAPMAN, 


Louis P. GRATACAP, Advisory Board. 
WILLIAM K. GREGORY, 


Subscription, One Dollar per year. Fifteen Cents per copy. 


A subscription to the JouRNAL is included in the membership fees of all classes of Members o 
the Museum, 


Subscriptions should be addressed to The American Museum Journal, 30 Boylston St., Cam 
bridge, Mass., or-77th St. and Central Park West, New York City. 


Entered as second-class matter January 12, 1907, at the Post-office at Boston, Mass. 
Act of Congress, July 16, 1894. 


Guide Leaflets published by the 
AMERICAN MUSEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY. 
For Sale at the Museum. 


(Issued as supplements to The American Museum Journal.) 


1.— THE BIRD ROCK GROUP. By F. M. Cuapman, Associate Curator 
of Mammalogy and Ornithology. October, 1901. Price, 10 cents. 

2— THE SAGINAW VALLEY COLLECTION. By H. I. Siru, Assistant 
Curator of Archeology. December, 1901. Price, 10 cents. 

3— THE HALL OF FOSSIL VERTEBRATES. By W. D. Matruew, 
Ph. D., Assistant Curator of Vertebrate Paleontology. January, 1902. 
Out of print. 

4— THE COLLECTION OF MINERALS. By Lovis P. Graracap, A. M., 
Curator of Mineralogy. February, 1902. Revised edition, May, 1904. 
Price, 10 cents. 


. 5— NORTH AMERICAN RUMINANTS. ‘By J.A. ALLEN, Ph.D. Curator 


of Mammalogy and Omithology. March, 1902 Revised edition, 
February, 1904. Price, 10 cents. 

6.— THE ANCIENT BASKET MAKERS OF SOUTHEASTERN UTAH. 
By Grorce H. Pepper, Assistant in Anthropology. April, 1902. 
Second edition, May,.1909. Price, 10 cents. 

7— THE BUTTERFLIES OF THE VICINITY OF NEW YORK CITY. 
By Witi1AM BreurenMiLier, Curator of Entomology. May, 1902. 
Price, 15 cents. 

8.— THE SEQUOIA. A Historical Review of Biological Science. By 
GrorcrE H. SHerwoop, A. M., Assistant Curator. November, 1902. 
Price, 10 cents. 

9— THE EVOLUTION OF THE HORSE. By W. D. Marrtuew, Ph. D., 
Associate Curator of Vertebrate Paleontology. January, 1903. Sec- 
ond edition, May, 1905. Price, 10 cents. 


. 10.— THE HAWK-MOTHS OF THE VICINITY OF NEW YORK CITY. 


By Wim Bevurenmiuier, Curator of Entomology. February, 
1903. Price, 10 cents. 


. 11.— THE MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS OF THE INCAS. By C. W. Mean, 


Assistant in Archeology. July, 1903. Price, 10 cents. 


. 12— THE COLLECTION OF FOSSIL VERTEBRATES. By W. D. Mar 


THEW, Ph. D., Associate Curator of Vertebrate Paleontology. Octo- 
ber, 1903. Price, 10 cents. 


. 13.— A GENERAL GUIDE TO THE AMERICAN MUSEUM OF NATURAL 


HISTORY. January, 1904. Out of print. 


. 14. BIRDS’ NESTS AND EGGS. By Frank M. Cuapman. Associate 


Curator of Mammalogy and Ornithology. April, 1904. Reprinted, 
February, 19805. Price, 10 cents. 


263 


No. 


No. 


No. 


. 15.— PRIMITIVE ART. July, 1904. Price, 15 cents. 
. 16— THE INSECT-GALLS OF THE VICINITY OF NEW YORK CITY. 


By WiLu1AM BruTENMULLER, Curator of Entomology. October, 1904. 
Price, 15 cents. 


(Reprinted from The American Museum Journal.) 


. 17— THE FOSSIL CARNIVORES, MARSUPIALS AND SMALL MAM- 


MALS IN THE AMERICAN MUSEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY. 
By W. D. Marruew, Ph. D., Associate Curator of Vertebrate Palzeon- 
tology. January, 1905. Price, 15 cents. 


. 18— THE MOUNTED SKELETON OF BRONTOSAURUS. By W. D. 


MarrHEw, Ph.D., Associate Curator of Vertebrate Paleontology. 
April, 1905. Out of print. 


. 19.— THE REPTILES OF THE VICINITY OF NEW YORK CITY. By 


Raymonp L, Dirmars, Curator of Reptiles, New York Zodlogical Park. 
July, 1905. Price, 15 cents. 


. 20.— THE BATRACHIANS OF THE VICINITY OF NEW YORK CITY. 


By Raymonp L. Dirmars, Curator of Reptiles, New York Zoological 
Park. October, 1905. Price, 15 cents. 


. 21— THE DEVELOPMENT OF A MOLLUSK. By B. E. Dauteren, 


D. M.D. January, 1906. Price, 10 cents. 


. 22.— THE BIRDS OF THE VICINITY OF NEW YORK CITY. By Franx 


M. CHAPMAN, Associate Curator of Mammalogy and Ornithology. 
April-July, 1906. Price, 15 cents. 


. 23.— THE SPONGE ALCOVE. By Roy W. Miner, Assistant Curator of 


Invertebrate Zodlogy. October, 1906. Price, 10 cents. 


(Published as a separate series.) 


. 24— PERUVIAN MUMMIES. By Cuarites W. Mean, Department of Eth- 


nology. March, 1907. Price, 10 cents. 


. 25.— PIONEERS OF AMERICAN SCIENCE. Memorials of the naturalists 


whose busts are in the Foyer of the Museum. April, 1907. Price, 15 
cents. 


. 26— THE METEORITES IN THE FOYER OF THE AMERICAN MUSEUM 


OF NATURAL HISTORY. By Epmunp Otis Hovey, Ph.D., 
Associate Curator of Geology. December, 1907. Price, 10 cents. 


. 27.— THE MALARIA MOSQUITO. By B. E. Dantcren, D.M.D.  Assis- 


tant Curator of Invertebrate Zodlogy. April, 1908. Price, 15 cents. 
28.—THE HABITAT GROUPS OF NORTH AMERICAN BIRDS. By 
Frank M. Cuapman, Curator of Ornithology. February, 1909. Price. 
15 cents. 
29.— THE INDIANS OF MANHATTAN ISLAND AND VICINITY. By 
ALANSON SKINNER, Department of Anthropology. September, 1909. 
Price, 10 cents. 


30.—THE STOKES PAINTINGS REPRESENTING GREENLAND ESKIMO. 


November, 1909. Price, 5 cents. 


264 


~